Cities Index.
Item 06 Suspension of Competitive Bidding, Contract Supplements and Budgetary Adjustments for the Martin Luther King Jr. (MLK) Library Renovation Project: (C15000840) (Two-Thirds Vote Required) [Published for 10-Day Review 1/23/2025] PART 3

Sacramento City Council
February 4, 2025

Document
Item 06 Suspension of Competitive Bidding, Contract Supplements and Budgetary Adjustments for the Martin Luther King Jr. (MLK) Library Renovation Project: (C15000840) (Two-Thirds Vote Required) [Published for 10-Day Review 1/23/2025] PART 3
Meeting
February 4, 2025
Body
Sacramento City Council
Pages
9
Original file
48.7 MB
Text extracted from the city's file for reading and search. Open the original on sacramento.granicus.com. That file is the official record.

3. Performance/Construction
a. Conductors AWG #20.
b. Conductors Stranding: 7 by 28.
c. D.C. Resistance Per 1000 feet 15 ohms maximum.
d. Shield: Aluminum polyester foil with #20 AWG stranded tinned copper drain wire.
e. Diameter 0.24 inch maximum.

4. Where 2A indicated, provide 2 each SP

5. Manufacturer
a. Belden 8762
b. West Penn.
c. Or equal.

C. Cable, Microphone and Line Level, Miniature

1. Drawing Symbol: 2SP

2. Restriction: For use within fixed equipment racks only.

3. Description: Shielded, single twisted pair, with #22 AWG color coded stranded conductors and foil shield with drain wire.

4. Performance/Construction:
a. Conductors AWG #22.
b. Conductors Stranding: 7 by 30.
c. D.C. Resistance Per 1000 feet: 20 ohms maximum.
d. Shield: Aluminum polyester foil with #24 stranded tinned copper drain wire. e. Diameter 0.15 inch maximum.

5. Where 2A indicated, provide 2 each SP

6. Manufacturer
a. Belden 8451, 9451, 1266A.
b. Alpha.
c. West Penn.
d. Or equal.

D. Cable, Antenna, Assistive Listening System

1. Description
a. Nominal 50 ohms (actual 51 or 52 ohms) coaxial cable.

2. Minimum 97 percent shield coverage.

3. Joint Army Navy (JAN) or Military (MIL) Construction a. RG-8/U to JAN-C-17A
b. RG-8 A/U to MIL-C-17D
c. RG-9/U to JAN-C-17A.

4. Manufacturer
a. Belden 8237, 9251 or 8242.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 40 b. CommScope.
c. Or equal.

E. Cable, Loudspeaker and D.C. Power

1. Drawing Symbol(s)
a. #18TP
b. #16TP
c. #14TP
d. #12TP

2. Description
a. Twisted pair, jacketed, unshielded cables, #12, #14, #16, or #18, as shown on Drawings.

3. Plenum rated where installed in open plenum return voids.

4. Performance/Construction
a. Conductor, AWG: #12, #14, #16, and #18, as noted.
b. Maximum diameter
a) 0.384 inch (#12)
b) 0.332 inch (#14)
c) 0.256 inch (#16)
d) 0.224 inch (#18).

5. Manufacturer
a. Belden.
a) #12TP, Belden 8477
b) #14TP, Belden 8473
c) #16TP, Belden 8471
d) #18TP, Belden 9740
e) West Penn.
f) Or equal.

2.10 VIDEO CABLES, COPPER COAX AND RELATED
A. General

1. Provide cable with electrical conductors of soft drawn annealed copper, bare or tinned, solid or concentric stranded as applies, conductivity not less than 98 percent of pure copper.

2. Comply with applicable Code for insulation, jacket, marking and listing for applicable use.
a. Refer to California Electrical Code, Table 725-61. Cable Uses and Permitted Substitutions.
b. Manufacturer part number specified is for a Listed Type CM construction to indicate intended cable construction and quality.

3. Code requirements take precedence.
a. Provide type required by Code at no additional cost to the City.

B. Cable, Precision Video
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 41

1. Drawing Symbol(s): P-VID, V.

2. Description: 100 percent sweep tested from 0.01 to 100 MHz, double braided shield solid center conductor 75 ohms coaxial precision video cable.

3. Performance
a. Cable Type: Coaxial precision video.
b. Center Conductor AWG: Twenty (20) bare copper.
c. Insulation: Polyethylene.
d. Shield: Tinned copper double braid, minimum 98 percent coverage. e. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms.
f. VeloLibrary of Propagation: 66 percent.
g. Attenuation Per 100 feet:
a) 1.0 MHz: 0.25 dB
b) 4.5 MHz: 0.45 dB
c) 10.0 MHz: 0.78 dB.
h. Jacket: Polyethylene.
i. Diameter: 0.305 inch maximum.

4. Manufacturer
a. Belden 8281A or 8281B.
b. Canare
c. Gepco
d. Or equal.

C. Cable, Miniature Precision Video

1. Drawing Symbol: Miniature Precision Video.

2. Description: 100 percent sweep tested from 0.01 to 100 MHz, braided shield plus foil shield, stranded center conductor 75 ohms coaxial miniature precision video cable.

3. Performance
a. Cable Type: Coaxial precision video.
b. Center Conductor AWG: 22 or 23 bare copper.
c. Center Conductor Stranding: 7 by 30 or 7 by 32.
d. D.C. Resistance Per 1000 feet: 15 ohms maximum.
e. Insulation: Cellular Polyethylene.
f. Shield: 100 percent foil plus trimmed copper braid, 95 percent coverage. g. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms.
h. VeloLibrary of Propagation: 66 percent.
i. Attenuation Per 100 feet:
a) 1.0 MHz: 0.15 dB
b) 10.0 MHz: 1.3 dB
c) 100 MHz: 5.0 dB.
j. Jacket: Polyethylene.
k. Diameter: 0.240 inch maximum.

4. Manufacturer
a. Belden 9209A.
b. Canare LV-61S.
c. Or equal.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 42 D. Cable Set, Audio Video, Manufactured

1. Provide signal type as indicated on Drawings.

2. Manufacturer
a. Liberty Wire & Cable Interflex Z-200 and Z-300 Series b. Markertek
c. Or equal.

E. Cable, Data Monitor Precision Video

1. Plan Reference(s):
a. D5
b. 5DVideo

2. Construction
a. 5 miniature high resolution coax cables in an overall shielded overall jacket to transmit analog component video based on the Red-Green-Blue- Horizontal Sync-Vertical Sync (RGBHV) transmission method. b. Sub cables are color coded Red, Green, Blue, Black, Grey; or approved alternate color coding scheme.
c. Jacket: Code approved equal for application.
d. Overall five sub cable assembly diameter: 0.56" maximum in raceway applications.
e. Center Conductor AWG: Twenty two (22) ga Silver Plated Copper. f. Insulation: Foamed Teflon.
g. Shield:
a) Each subcable is double shielded
b) Overall cable has 100% tape shield.

3. Approval/Rating:
a. UL: Recognized Type CL2P (Article 725 of NEC) for plenum application, riser rated elsewhere.

4. Performance - each sub-cable:
a. Resistance: 0.0162 ohms/ft nominal @ 20C
b. Impedance: 75 ohm nominal
c. Capacitance: 17.5 pf/ft nominal
d. VeloLibrary of Propagation: 80% nominal
e. Time Delay: 1.19ns/ft nominal
f. Maximum Attenuation Per 100':
a) 10 MHz: 0.8 dB/100 ft.
b) 50 MHz: 2.5 dB/100 ft.
c) 100 MHz: 3.5 dB/100 ft.
d) 200 MHz: 4.6 dB/100 ft.
e) 300 MHz: 5.0 dB/100 ft.
f) 400 MHz: 7.2 dB/100 ft.
g) 1000 MHz: 14.6 dB/100 ft.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Altinex CB5100PL in plenum spaces, riser rated elsewhere. b. Extron
c. Belden
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 43 d. Gepco.
e. or equal.

F. DVI Cabling

1. Drawing Reference: DVI

2. Features/Functions
a. Supports single link DVI-D signals up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz and 1080p/60:
b. Data rates to 4.95 Gbps
c. Color depth to 24 bits - 8 bits per color
d. For cable lengths up to 12 feet: 24 AWG copper wire construction e. For cable lengths 25 feet and longer: 22 AWG copper wire construction f. NEC CM rated

3. Manufacturers, copper cabling and extenders:
a. Extron
b. or equal.

2.11 CONTROL AND CONTROL MEDIA CABLING
A. General

1. Provide cable with electrical conductors of soft drawn annealed copper, bare or tinned, solid or concentric stranded as applies, conductivity not less than 98 percent of pure copper.

2. Comply with applicable Code for insulation, jacket, marking and listing for applicable use.
a. Refer to California Electrical Code, Table 725-61. Cable Uses and Permitted Substitutions.
b. Manufacturer part number specified is for a Listed Type CM construction to indicate intended cable construction and quality.

3. Code requirements take precedence.
a. Provide type required by Code at no additional cost to the City.

B. High Speed, TIA/TIA Category Cabling

1. Drawing Reference:** UTP6-4, where ** denotes cable count

2. Construction:
a. Provide horizontal copper cable in accordance with:
a) EIA ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2
b) UL 444,
c) NEMA WC 66 (Performance Standard for Category 6 and
Category 7 100 Ohm Shielded and Unshielded Twisted Pair) d) ICEA S-90-661
b. UTP (unshielded twisted pair),
c. 100 ohm impedance
d. Four each individually twisted pair, 22 or 24 AWG conductors, a) Color code
b) Pair 1 White/Blue Blue
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 44 c) Pair 2 White/Orange Orange
d) Pair 3 White/Green Green
e) Pair 4 White/Brown Brown
e. No shield in the sheath.
f. Jacket
a) Thermoplastic jacket
b) Color: Blue unless otherwise indicated.
c) Cable imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission
performance rating (category designation) at regular
intervals not to exceed 2 feet.
d) The word "FEET" or the abbreviation "FT" shall appear after each length marking.
e) Provide communications general purpose (CM or CMG),
communications plenum (CMP) or communications riser
(CMR) rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70.
f) Type CMP and CMR may be substituted for type CM or
CMG and type CMP may be substituted for type CMR in
accordance with NFPA 70.

3. Certification
a. Warrantied by the manufacturer to provide Category 6 performance when installed in accordance with applicable EIA/TIA standards and when terminated with the jacks supplied by the Contractor for this Project.

4. Performance
a. Assembly electrically meets or exceeds EIA ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 6 performance standards

5. Manufacturers:
a. Berk-Tek LANmark-6
b. Belden/CDT
c. Berk-Tek
d. Commscope/Systimax
e. Commscope/Uniprise
f. General Cable
g. Mohawk/CDT
h. Superior/Essex
i. or equal

2.12 CONTROL MEDIA CABLING
A. General

1. Provide cable with electrical conductors of soft drawn annealed copper, bare or tinned, solid or concentric stranded as applies, conductivity not less than 98 percent of pure copper.

2. Comply with applicable Code for insulation, jacket, marking and listing for applicable use.
a. Refer to National Electrical Code, Table 725-61. Cable Uses and Permitted Substitutions.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 45 b. Manufacturer part number specified is for a Listed Type CM construction to indicate intended cable construction and quality.

3. Code requirements take precedence.
a. Provide type required by CEC at no additional cost to the City.

B. Low Speed Audiovisual Cabling

1. Drawing Reference: AVNet

2. 1 cable equivalent to a 1 pair, 18 gauge cable suitable for RS-485 (A/V Net) signaling and remote device powering.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Crestron
b. Liberty Wire & Cabling
c. AMX
d. Extron
e. or equal.

C. Shielded High Definition Category Media Cabling

1. Drawing Reference(s):
a. HCAT MEDIA

2. Features/Functions:
a. Proprietary 4 twisted-pair cable in overall shield designed to transmit manufacturer's proprietary implementation of HDBaseT

3. Manufacturers:
a. Crestron DigitalMedia 8G Cable – DM-CBL-8G
b. Liberty Wire & Cabling
c. AMX
d. Extron
e. or equal.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. SURFACE RACEWAY, NON-METALLIC:

B. Drawing & Spec Reference: AV CONTROL ROOM #132 (see TA4.1.4) C. Construction
a. Three chamber, 2.5 inch:
b. System components to provide at least a one (1) inch bend radius at corners. c. Color: Ivory, to best match surrounding surfaces.
d. Three chamber surface raceway shall have three adjacent chambers separated by removable horizontal dividers. System and installation shall not compromise separation of services.
e. Keyed cover plate shall require tool for removal.

D. Approvals:
a. Plastic meeting UL 94 V-0 flammability rating.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 46 E. Manufacturers, subject to the above:
a. Three chamber, 2.5 inch (3SR2.5)
b. Wiremold 5500 Series with 5500BD Base (Design Basis). c. or equal.

F. Cable Termination Devices and Related:

1. Screw-type or Tubular Clamp Barrier Blocks:
a. Buchanan 125, 0625 Series.
b. Electrovert
c. TRW-Cinch 140, 141, 142 Series.
d. Weidmuller .
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
f. Phoenix
g. Or equal.

2. Tubular Clamp Barrier Blocks, High Density, Switch Block Section a. Drawing Reference: TB15.
b. Features/Functions
a) Paired screw terminals on opposite sides of insulating base. b) TB15 Base mounts to DIN rail, providing space beneath TB15 to dress field and source cabling.
c) Terminates range of wire gages used by project – at least 30 gauge to 10 gauge.
d) High density:
e) At least 33 pairs of connections per foot for 12 and smaller gage terminations,
f) At least 16 pairs of connections per foot for 10 gage terminations.
g) Switch Block Section permits load, such as field devices, to be separated from monitoring panel for testing independent of source then restored without disturbing field wiring terminations.
h) Rated at least fifteen (15) amperes at 300V AC/DC
c. Approvals
a) UL
d. Manufacturers:
a) Allen Bradley Isolation Switch Blocks,
b) 1492-H7 for 30 to 12 gauge
c) 1492-CE9 for 10 gauge.
d) Tyco Buchanan 0135 Series.
e) WECO Electrical Connectors
f) Altech
g) Curtis Industries
h) Electrovert
i) Weidmuller
j) Pass & Seymour/Legrand
k) Phoenix
l) or equal.

3. Low Level Audio Cable Termination, Insulation Displacement Products a. Coordinate with wire size, type and insulation
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 47 b. Manufacturer
a) ADC "Dense Patch".
b) Siemon Model S66M450 with D10 Designation Strip.
c) Any meeting 110TB under Section 27 11 19 –
Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels.
d) Or equal.

G. Audio and Control Connectors and Related:

1. Circular Audio Connector, Cord, 3 through 5 contacts, gold plated contacts, captive cable clamp strain relief, matte black chrome finish over nickel metal shell a. Neutrik C-Series, X-Series.
b. Switchcraft.
c. Or equal.

2. Circular Audio Connector, Panel mount, male and female devices to fit same panel cutout including fasteners, 3 through 5 contacts, gold plated contacts, matte black chrome finish over nickel metal shell, female receptacles locking type:
a. Neutrik D Series Version L.
b. Switchcraft
c. Or equal.

3. Loudspeaker Connector, Panel mount, female devices to fit same panel cutout including fasteners as other panel mount receptacles, 4 contacts, matte black finish Polyamid/graphite shell, female receptacles locking type. UL Component Recognized:
a. Neutrik NL4MP.
b. Switchcraft
c. Or equal.

H. Video Connectors and Related

1. Video Connector, BNC type, 75 ohms, Panel, recessed, flush with panel face, insulated from panel, double female
a. Manufacturer
a) Canare BCJ-JRU.
b) Tec Nec
c) Liberty Wire & Cable/Panelcraft
d) or equal.

2. Video Connector, BNC type, 75 ohms, Panel, recessed, flush with panel face, insulated from panel, single female to solder pin
a. Manufacturer
a) Canare BCJ-RU.
b) Tec Nec
c) Liberty Wire & Cable/Panelcraft
d) or equal.

3. Video connector, BNC type, 75 ohms, cord, crimp applied. Coordinate with cable. a. Manufacturer
a) Amp.
b) Amphenol.
c) Augat/LRC Products
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 48 d) Canare.
e) Kings.
f) Liberty Wire & Cable/Panelcraft
g) RFI/Celltronics.
h) Trompeter.
i) or equal.

4. Video Precision 75 ohms Terminator, BNC:
a. Manufacturer
a) Canare BCP-TA
b) Trompeter TNAI-1-75.
c) or equal.

5. XGA Connectors, DB15
a. Drawing Reference HD15
b. Manufacturer
a) Amp.
b) Amphenol.
c) Canare.
d) Kings.
e) Liberty Wire & Cable/Panelcraft
f) RFI/Celltronics.
g) or equal.

I. Custom Facility Panels and Rackmount Auxiliary Panels

1. Drawing Reference(s):
a. MP* - Media Panels, where * is a number indicating the panel type. b. FP* - Facility Panels, where * is a number indicating the panel type. c. Aux Panel

2. Provide connector types and plate finish as shown. If none shown, provide:
a. Rack mount panels:
a) 16 gauge minimum, cold rolled steel or 1/8" minimum
aluminum, finish to match rack finish.
b) At contractor's option, fabricate using rack mount panels with Decora/Decorator openings and steel plates with
specified connectors. Match insert color to panel color provided. Refer to Rack Panel with Decora Openings below. b. Wall Panels: 16 gauge minimum cold rolled steel, finish to match surrounding electrical and other low voltage panels.

3. Manufacturers, Rack Mount Panels
a. BGW Systems Inc.
b. Conquest
c. Middle Atlantic Products Universal Connector Panel
d. Middle Atlantic Products Universal Connector Panel, Modular Custom Connector Panel Systems
e. ProCo Sound, Inc.
f. Ultimate Plates and Panels
g. or equal.

4. Manufacturers, Wall Panels
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 49 a. PanelCrafters Division of Liberty Wire & Cable, Classic Series b. FSR
c. RCI Systems
d. Middle Atlantic
e. Ultimate Plates and Panels
f. Whirlwind
g. Or equal.

5. Manufacturers, Decora/Decorator connector inserts:
a. Connector Plates by Radio Design Labs. Provide specified connectors rear mounted in D-Blank insert for connector combinations not available from RDL.
b. Grey by Pathway Connectivity Solutions. Provide specified connectors rear mounted in 5100 insert for connector combinations not available from Pathway Connectivity Solutions.

6. Manufacturers, Rack Mount Decora Panel Openings
a. Lowell Manufacturing LD8-RMP with Lowell DBB-4 blank Decora plates at openings not fitted with equipment.
b. Middle Atlantic DECP Series
c. or equal.

2.14 POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT:

A. Comply with applicable Codes. Provide UL Listed devices suitable for commercial use.

Provide all junction boxes, raceway, fittings, wire, supports and fastenings as required for complete installation. Contractor to coordinate plug end of selected strip with rack power receptacles installed under the work of Division 16. Unless otherwise noted, provide receptacles of NEMA 5-15R configuration.

B. Power Sequencer System

1. Drawing References
a. Power Sequencer
b. Fire Alarm Interface – provide where required to shunt system operation on receipt of closure from Fire Alarm system.
c. Sold State Relay (SSR) SSR1 through SSR7

2. Features
a. Power sequencing system.
b. Solid state switching, zero crossing.
c. Sequencing on power up and power down.
d. Front panel button and external closure activation.
e. Alarm terminal to sequence the system down when tripped. f. UL Listed.

3. Manufacturer
a. FSR Inc. Power Products Group SPC-20 Power Sequencer and SPC-20X Solid State Relay
b. Furman
c. Or equal.

C. UPS, Rack Mounted, 1400 VA
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 50

1. Drawing Reference: UPS10

2. Features/Functions/Performance:
a. Provide continuous, no-break power with sine wave output. b. Size to carry connected load at least 10 minutes following loss of power, after at least two hours of charge time.
c. Provide Transient Over-Voltage (TOV) Surge Suppression; comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1980, Category A and Category B.
d. Provide complete isolation from Line.
e. Provide output voltage regulation to ANSI C84.1 for computing equipment. f. SNMP manageable and status reporting to Library’sManagement console.

Provide output KVA, switch-mode power supply rated, not less than 150% of connected load indicated.
g. Rack Mounted

3. Manufacturer:
a. SmartUPS 1400 RM series by American Power Conversion (APC) b. Trip-Lite
c. Or equal.

D. Power Supplies and Related:

1. Drawing Reference: PS24.

2. Relay and Lamp Power Supply:

3. 24 VDC, regulated within 5%. Ripple not greater than 1.5%. Output current rating at least 150% of maximum possible load. Circuit breaker or intrinsic over current protection. UL Recognized or UL Listed.

E. Full Height Receptacle Strip, One (1) Circuit, 15A

1. Features/Construction:
a. Not less than 60" Long
b. Not less than eleven (11) 15A receptacles
c. Integral circuit breaker
d. NEMA 5-15P plug on 6' cord.
e. UL Listed Assembly
f. Provide mounting hardware as necessary to attach to rack interior.

2. Manufacturers.
a. Wiremold Series 7011ULBC.
b. Lowell ACS 1524
c. Geist NSVB200-101S15
d. Hubbell PR206
e. Leviton
f. Middle Atlantic
g. Chatsworth 12848-701
h. or equal.

F. Full Height Receptacle Strip, One (1) Circuit, 20A

1. Features/Construction:
a. Not less than 70" Long
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 51 b. Not less than eleven (11) 15A receptacles
c. Integral circuit breaker
d. NEMA 5-20P plug on 6' cord.
e. UL Listed Assembly
f. Provide mounting hardware as necessary to attach to rack interior.

2. Manufacturers. Contractor to coordinate selected strip with rack power receptacles installed under the work of Division 26.
a. Geist NSVB200-102S20
b. Hubbell PR20820DRTL
c. Leviton P104x series
d. Lowell ACS-2024
e. Midde Atlantic PD-1020C-NS
f. Wiremold Series 7011ULBC20.
g. Chatsworth 12848-705
h. or equal.

G. Rackmount Power Panel, Horizontal Mount, User Aux device use:

1. Drawing Reference: POWER.

2. Functions/Features:
a. Front face of panel shall provide two electrical power outlets and a switch.

An indicator lamp shall show the presence of AC power when on. The front face of panel shall have a black finish. The rear face shall provide a minimum of at least four receptacles. The panel shall be racked mounted in a maximum of two rack units. The panel shall be Code approved and UL rated for this application.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell MCCPSS19TS
b. Leviton 4515
c. Geist SP124-1020
d. Or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with acknowledged industry and professional standards and practices, and the procedures specified herein.

B. Furnish and install (herein, "provide") all materials, devices, components, and equipment required for complete, operational systems.

3.2 PRECONSTRUCTION PROGRAMMING MEETING
A. Not less than 30 days prior to the scheduled completion of the project, Contractor to initiate a request of the Library’sRepresentative to schedule an Audiovisual Systems programming meeting.

1. The Library’sRepresentative will schedule the meeting at the reasonable mutual convenience of the Contractor and the Library’stechnical systems representatives.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 52

2. The purpose of the meeting is for the Library’sRepresentative to indicate to the contractor how the programmable interfaces of the audiovisual systems are to be implemented, including:
a. Button assignments and labels for physical button panels b. Touchscreen menu hierarchy, scene arrangement, button and background colors, text size, logos
c. Whether authorization codes or passwords will be required to access special functions/menus.

3. Contractor to document the information received from the Library’sRepresentatives at this meeting.

4. Contractor to submit the documentation of the requirements meeting, along with their proposed response to the Library’sprogramming requirements in the form of screen shots and system menu flow diagrams as required under Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications Systems, 1.4 D Submittals.

3.3 WIRING CLASSIFICATION AND RELATED
A. Audio Signal Wiring Classification:

1. Type A-l: Microphone level wiring less than -30 dBμ, 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

2. Type A-2: Line level wiring -30 dBμ to +24 dBμ, 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

3. Type A-3: Loudspeaker level or circuit wiring greater than +24 dBμ, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

B. Video and Related Signal Wiring Classification:

1. Type V-1: Baseband and composite video wiring 1 volt peak-to-peak into 75 ohms, 0 to 10.0 MHz.

2. Type V-2: Synchronization and switching pulse wiring 4 volts peak-to-peak into 75 ohms, 15.62 to 15.75 kHz.

3. Type V-3: Color subcarrier wiring 0 to 4 volts peak-to-peak into 75 ohms, 3.57 to

4.43 MHz.

4. Type V-4: MATV system wiring 0.1 to 1000 uV peak-to-peak into 50 or 75 ohms, 47 to 890 MHz.

C. Control Signal Wiring Classifications:

1. Type C-1: DC control wiring 0 to 50 volts.

2. Type C-2: Synchronous control or data wiring 0 to 40 volts, peak-to-peak.

3. Type C-3: AC control wiring 0 to 48 volts, 60 Hz.

D. Additional Wiring Classifications:

1. Type M-1: DC power wiring 0 to 48 volts.

2. Type M-2: AC power wiring greater than 50 volts, 60 Hz.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 53 E. Wiring Combinations:

1. Except as indicated herein, conduit, wireways and cable bundles shall contain only wiring of a single classification. The following combinations are acceptable in conduit, or cable harnesses. Additional acceptable combinations may be indicated on the Contract Drawings.
a. Types A-1, C-1, and M-1.
b. Types A-2, C-l, C-2, and M-l, runs less than twenty (20) feet. c. Types A-2, C-1, and M-1.
d. Types A-3, C-1, C-2, and M-1.
e. Types A-2, V-1, and V-3.
f. Types V-1, V-2, V-3, and C-1.
g. Types M-2 and C-3.

3.4 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Provide permanent identification of run destination at all raceway terminations.

B. All wire and cable shall be continuous and splice-free for the entire length of run between designated connections or terminations.

C. All shielded cables shall be insulated. Do not permit shields to contact conduit, raceway, boxes, panels or equipment enclosures.

D. Within buildings, make splices only in designated terminal cabinets and/or on designated equipment backboards. Outside buildings, make splices only in designated manholes and/or handholes. Protect splices outside of buildings with splicing kits equivalent to Scotchcast Re- enterable. Make splices only with connectors or terminal devices specified herein.

Document all splices on Record Drawings.

E. Verify that all raceway has been de-burred and properly joined, coupled, and terminated prior to installation of cables. Verify that all raceway is clear of foreign matter and substances prior to installation of wire or cable.

F. Inspect all conduit bends to verify proper radius. Comply with Code for minimum permissible radius and maximum permissible deformation.

G. Apply a chemically inert lubricant to all wire and cable prior to pulling in conduit. Do not subject wire and cable to tension greater than that recommended by the manufacturer. Use multi-spool rollers where cable is pulled in place around bends. Do not pull reverse bends.

H. Provide a box loop for all wire and cable routed through junction boxes or distribution panels.

Provide tool formed thermal expansion loops at cable at manholes, handholes and at both sides of all fixed mounted equipment. Cable loops and bends shall not be bent at a radius greater than that recommended by the manufacturer.

I. Secure all wire and cable run vertically for continuous distances greater than thirty (30) feet.

Secure robust non-coaxial cables with screw-flange nylon cable ties or similar devices appropriate to weight of cable. For all other cables, provide symmetrical conforming nonmetallic bushings or woven cable grips appropriate to weight of cable.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 54

3.5 SIGNAL POLARITY CONVENTION
A. Maintain consistent absolute signal polarity at all connectors, patch points and connection points accessible in the system. Comply with AES26-2001.Where applicable, a positive polarity electrical signal shall yield positive acoustic pressure from the loudspeakers.

B. Audio signal connector convention: Comply with AES 14-1992 (r1998) Signal Connector Wire
Signal Phase Pin 2 Red or White
Signal Anti-Phase Pin 3 Black
Signal Ground Pin 1 Drain Wire
C. Video and RF/MATV Connector Convention:

Signal Connector Wire
Signal Phase Center Pin Center conductor
Signal Anti-Phase Shell Shield
Signal Ground Shell Shield

3.6 WIRING PRACTICE
A. Land all non-coaxial field wiring entering each equipment rack at specified terminal devices prior to connection to any equipment or devices within racks. At Contractor's option, such terminals may be located in the equipment racks or in the terminal cabinets provided.

Coordinate such selection with Project construction sequence and test procedures specified herein.

B. Identify all wire and cable clearly with permanent labels wrapped about the full circumference within one (1) inch of each connection. Indicate the number designated on the associated field or shop drawing or run sheet, as applies. Assign wire or cable designations consistently throughout a given system. Each wire or cable shall carry the same labeled designation over its entire run, regardless of intermediate terminations. Conform with the requirements of Section 27 05 00.

C. Apply all crimp connectors only with manufacturer's recommended ratchet type tooling and correct crimp dies for connector and wire size. Plier type crimp tooling shall not be acceptable.

D. Coordinate insulation displacement (quick connect) terminal devices with wire size and type.

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Make connections with automatic impact type tooling set to recommended force.

E. Make all connections to screw-type barrier blocks with insulated crimp-type spade lugs.

Lugs are not required at captive compression terminal type blocks. Provide permanent designation strips designed for use with the terminal blocks provided. Make neat, intelligible markings with indelible markers equivalent to "Sharpie".

F. Tin terminated shield drain wires and insulate with heat shrinkable tubing.

G. Use only rosin core 60/40 tin/lead solder for all solder connections.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 55 H. Dress, lace or harness all wire and cable to prevent mechanical stress on electrical connections. No wire or cable shall be supported by a connection point. Provide service loops where harnesses of different classes cross, or where hinged panels are to be interconnected.

I. Termination and buildout resistors and related circuit correction components shall be visible.

Do not install in connector shells or internally modify equipment. Show locations on Record Drawings.

J. Correct any and all of the following unacceptable wiring conditions:

1. Deformed, brittle or cracked insulation.

2. Insulation shrunken or stripped further than 1/8" away from the actual point of connection within a connector, or on a punch block.

3. Cold solder joints.

4. Flux joints.

5. Solder splatter.

6. Ungrommeted, unbushed, or uninsulated wire or cable entries.

7. Deformation or improper radius of wire or cable.

3.7 FINISHES
A. Finishes and materials for contractor fabricated assemblies such as racks, custom control panels, brackets, blank panels, equipment mounting in furniture or casework, speaker baffles, speaker grille material and in general any item or component herein which is visible shall adhere to the following:

1. Finish shall be as directed by the Library’sRepresentative.

2. In the event that the Library’sRepresentative provides no direction as to finish, finish shall match exactly the surrounding and adjacent surfaces.

3. Wooden speaker back boxes and baffles shall be painted flat black if not otherwise finished or stained.

3.8 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE (RACK) AND EQUIPMENT FABRICATION A. Combustible material, other than incidental trim of indicated equipment, is prohibited within equipment racks.

B. Within each equipment enclosure, provide a full-height multi-circuit ground outlet strip with branch circuit count as shown on drawings; locate on the left side of the equipment enclosure, as viewed from the rear. In each enclosure provide number of receptacles required by present and future equipment indicated on drawings, plus at least two spare receptacles. Provide flexible steel raceway and junction box for connection of power service. Bond internal raceway to rack frame.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 56 C. Provide a permanent label on the front of each equipment rack including the rack designation, and the circuit breaker number and associated electrical distribution panel designation servicing same.

D. Maintain separation of wiring classifications as specified herein. Separately dress, route and land microphone and line level cables and related on the right side of the equipment enclosure, as viewed from the rear; dress, route, and land loudspeaker level and control cables on the left side of the equipment enclosure, as viewed from the rear.

E. Access shall not require demounting or de-energizing of equipment. Install access covers, hinged panels, or pull-out drawers to insure complete access to terminals and interior components.

F. Fasten removable covers containing any wired component with a continuous hinge along one side, with associated wiring secured and dressed to provide an adequate service loop.

Provide an appropriate stop locks to hold all hinged panels and drawers in a serviceable position.

G. Provide permanent labels for all equipment and devices. Where possible, fasten such labels to the rack frame or to blank or vent panels which will remain in place when active equipment is removed for possible service.

H. At jackfields, provide service loop to permit removal of jackfields from rack sufficient to conveniently access all jack contacts for routine cleaning and maintenance. Organize the service loop and harness such that reasonable reconnection of jacks and jack normals is possible without cutting apart the harness.

I. Coordinate the design and execution of wire harnessing of multi-bay rack ensembles with conditions of delivery to installation locations at Project Site, and with the requirement herein for test of the completely wired system in the shop prior to delivery to the Project Site.

Organize the wiring harnesses such that they will fold within one shippable unit without risk of damage, or provide polarized multipin connectors and related interconnect systems as specified elsewhere herein.

J. At each equipment backboard, provide UL Listed surge suppressing multi-outlet assembly with at least six (6) receptacles.

3.9 EQUIPMENT RACK AND EQUIPMENT TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES A. Conduct procedures in fabrication shop. Verify safe and proper operation of all components, devices, or equipment, establish nominal signal levels within the systems and verify the absence of extraneous or degrading signals. Make all preliminary adjustments and document the setting of all controls, parameters of all corrective networks, voltages at key system interconnection points, gains and losses, as applicable. Submit test report. Request and coordinate verification of submitted test data by the Library’sRepresentative. Correct all non-conforming conditions prior to shipment to Project Site. Perform at least the following procedures:

B. Preliminary: Verify:

1. Grounding of devices and equipment. Integrity of signal and electrical system ground connections.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 57

2. Proper provision of power to devices and equipment.

3. Integrity of all insulation, shield terminations and connections.

4. Integrity of soldered connections. Absence of solder splatter, solder bridges.

5. Absence of debris of any kind, tools, etc.

6. Routing and dressing of wire and cable.

7. All wiring, including polarity and continuity, including conformance with wire designations on running sheets, field and shop drawings.

8. Mechanical integrity of all support provisions.

C. Rig temporary power and grounding. Comply with all applicable Codes, regulations and ordinances.

D. Determine the proper sequence of energizing systems to minimize the risk of damage.

Energize. Burn in for at least 168 hours.

E. Sound Systems:

1. Gain control settings: Establish tentative normal settings for all gain controls. Set all equalizers flat. Set all automatic gain control devices to bypass. Terminate power amplifier outputs with power load resistors with resistance value within 10% the nominal output impedance of the respective amplifier. Adjust all gain controls on equipment for optimum signal-to-noise ratio and signal balance and, unless they are sub-panel mounted, cap them to prevent tampering. Unless specified or directed otherwise, adjust gains such that in a given system the "front end" operates at unity gain and maintains 10 dB of clip margin referenced to the first onset of clipping of the associated power amplifier(s). Measure and document system gains at 1 kHz.

Settings may require further adjustment by the Contractor, a result of testing by the Library’sRepresentative.

2. Freedom from parasitic oscillation and radio frequency pickup: Maintain previous setup. Set up for each mode of operation specified in the functional requirements; verify that all systems are free from spurious oscillation and radio-frequency pickup using broadband oscilloscope. Correct any such defects.

3. Hum and noise level/signal to noise level/signal to crosstalk level: Maintain previous setup. Terminate microphone and line-level inputs with shielded resistors of 150 and 600 ohms, respectively. Set available variable gain controls such that full power amplifier output would be achieved with -40 dBm input level at a microphone input and +12 dBm at a line-level input. Measure and document the specified parameters of the system overall for each microphone input channel and line-level input channel.

Compare with nominal signal level.

4. Total Harmonic Distortion: Maintain previous setup. Measure at reference operating level at least at 63 Hz, 125 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz.

F. Baseband Video Systems:

1. Picture Monitors:
a. Apply crosshatch. Verify linearity.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 58 b. Apply red field. Adjust purity.
c. Apply SMPTE bars and PLUGE. Adjust to standards.

2. Video Path Test: Use manufacturer's procedures. Use full field or line signals.

G. Data/Graphics Systems:

1. Projector:
a. Apply crosshatch. Converge at design distance. Verify linearity. b. Apply red, green and blue field. Adjust purity.

2. Wideband Component Analog Video Path Test: Use manufacturer's procedures.

H. Control System:

1. Demonstrate complete operation.

3.10 PROJECTION SCREEN INSTALLATION
A. Inspection

1. General: Examine surfaces and rough framing to determine suitability to install screen and mount. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Installation

1. Install screen and projector mount horizontal and plumb for proper operation per manufacturer's recommendations. Securely anchor to supporting structure to withstand all loading conditions and strain of service.

C. Adjustment

1. Adjust units as required for smooth operation and alignment as required.

2. Just prior to final acceptance of project, clean the screen surface according to the manufacturer's instructions.

3. Protect completed work from damage until acceptance by the Library’s Representative.

3.11 LOUDSPEAKER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Loudspeakers:

1. Verify proper installation of loudspeaker enclosures and related support.

2. Verify that no loudspeaker assembly is subjected to stresses or loading effects in any way contributing to possible extraordinary failure.

3.12 VIDEO PROJECTOR ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Design, engineer and provide complete, all means of support, suspension, attachment, fastening, bracing, and restraint (hereinafter "support") of such equipment. Provide engineering of such support by parties licensed to perform work of this type in the Project jurisdiction. Submit in timely manner.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 59 B. Comply with applicable Code and the requirements of the Authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Provide safety factor greater than six (6) or as required by Code, whichever is greater.

D. Mountings shall:

1. Permit projector lens to align with top of projection screen.

2. Permit Video Projector to be re-oriented at least plus or minus 3o from angles shown on the Contract Drawings for optimum picture.

3. Maintain precise location and orientation of Video Projector after such adjustment when subject to normal building motion and Code defined seismic induced building motion.

E. Do not apply any load to building structure without first obtaining written approval of the Library’sRepresentative. Obtain per Project procedures.

F. During Acceptance Testing, adjust orientation of Video Projector as directed to achieve optimum picture. Provide workers and ladders as required. Perform such adjustment with no claim for additional cost or time.

3.13 PERMANENTLY INSTALLED MICROPHONES
A. General

1. Orient generally as shown in the plans with respect to area of intended pickup.

B. Ceiling Mount Microphones

1. Review indicated mounting location in the field prior to installation. Verify that location is not associated with excessive levels of vibration or background noise (due to HVAC, Projector fans and loudspeakers installed under the work of this or other projects, audible occupancy sensors. Report such conditions to the Library’s Representative and obtain direction prior to proceeding.

2. Coordinate installation location of boundary microphones with final floor plan for maximum uniformity of coverage, and maintainance of unobstructed line-of-site between the projector(s) and the screen(s).

3.14 PERMANENTLY INSTALLED PROGRAM AUDIO SPEAKERS
A. At projection screen conditions,

1. Coordinate the installation location with the projector screen to maintain symmetry.

2. Place speakers indicated for mounting at underside of ceiling oriented to place their long dimension parallel to the ceiling plane.

B. Provide resilient mounting vibration isolation at all wall and roof deck supported loudspeakers to minimize coupling of program audio sound into other building spaces. This requirement does not apply to ceiling supported distributed ceiling speakers.

C. Dress cabling neatly and out of side of audience.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 60 D. Orient on adjustable speaker mounts for maximum uniformity of coverage for audience area and maximum gain before feedback at presenter microphones.

3.15 SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES A. Upon completion of the installation of all equipment in an area, perform the following tests and record results. Verify safe and proper operation of all components, devices, or equipment, establish nominal signal levels within the systems and verify the absence of extraneous or degrading signals. Make all preliminary adjustments and document the setting of all controls, parameters of all corrective networks, voltages at key system interconnection points, gains and losses, as applicable. Submit test report. Correct all non-conforming conditions prior to requesting Acceptance Review and Testing. Perform at least the following procedures:

1. Mechanical: Verify:
a. Integrity of all support provisions.
b. Absence of debris of any kind, tools, etc.

2. Power and Isolated Ground: Verify:
a. Isolation of Isolated Ground system from raceway and related ground. b. Grounding of devices and equipment. Integrity of signal and technical power system ground connections.
c. Proper provision of power to devices and equipment.

3. Signal Wiring: Verify:
a. Integrity of all insulation, shield terminations and connections. b. Integrity of soldered connections. Absence of solder splatter, solder bridges. c. Routing and dressing of wire and cable.
d. Continuity, including conformance with wire designations on running sheets, field and shop drawings.
e. Absence of ground faults.
f. Polarity.

4. Use the proper sequence of energizing systems to minimize the risk of damage.

Energize.

5. Sound Systems, Electronic Tests; confirm:
a. Gain at 1 kHz.
b. Maximum output.
c. Input clipping level.
d. Frequency response.
e. Total harmonic distortion.
f. Signal to noise ration.
g. Signal to crosstalk ratio.

6. Electro/Acoustic Tests:
a. Uniformity of coverage.
b. Electronic and acoustic frequency response/one-third octave equalization.

Measure at ear level. Comply with applicable portions of ANSI (SMPTE) PH22.202M-1984, "B chain electro-acoustic response - control rooms and indoor theaters." Adjust to "curve X of B chain characteristic". Library’s Representative will direct final adjustment.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 274116 – 61 c. Maximum continuous sound pressure level (in the reverberant field). Drive systems with broadband pink noise. Sustain for at least five (5) minutes with no system damage. Measure for "A" and "C" weightings at ear level on loudspeaker axis. Turn off noise.
d. Acoustic signal-to-noise ratio referenced to the specified maximum continuous sound pressure level in the reverberant field. Measure for "A" and "C" weightings at ear level on loudspeaker axis with mechanical systems operating. Present comparison with previous measurement.

7. Video Systems:
a. Picture Monitors:
a) Apply crosshatch. Verify linearity.
b) Apply red field. Adjust purity.
c) Apply SMPTE bars and PLUGE. Adjust to standards.
b. Video Path Test: Use NTC Report No. 7 procedures. Use full field or line signals.
a) Insertion Gain.
b) Gain/Frequency Distortion.

8. Control System: Demonstrate complete operation.

3.16 LABELING
A. Conform with the requirements of Section 27 05 53 – Identification for Communications Systems.

B. Provide permanent "wedge" type labels on all controls, as applies, to indicate correct settings after systems performance testing and adjustment procedures have been successfully completed.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 1 SECTION 275116 – PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Provisions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

B. Materials, methods and procedures contained in Specification Sections 27 05 00, 27 10 00 and 27 15 00 apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide all labor, materials, transportation and equipment to complete the furnishing, installation, assembly, set up, and testing of the Public Address Systems work indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Notwithstanding any detailed information in this Section, provide complete, working systems.

B. Design, engineer and provide complete, all means of support, suspension, attachment, fastening, bracing, and restraint (hereinafter "support") of the Work of this Section.

Provide engineering of such support by parties licensed to perform work of this type in the Project jurisdiction.

C. Public Address System

1. Building Public Address System provides zoned public address functionality using station-microphone and SIP interface to receive zone-calls from City/Library-furnished VOIP telephone system as an input and constant voltage (70V) distributed speakers for speaker output.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Division 26: Power.

B. Section 27 05 33: Raceway and backboxes for the work of this Section.

C. Section 27 10 00 and 27 15 00: Wiring and cabling for the work of this Section other than within racks or speaker wiring.

D. Section 27 11 16 – Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures and

1. Racks for the work of this Section

1.4 COORDINATION
A. In addition to the requirements of Sections 27 05 00, coordinate:

1. Audiovisual Systems
a. Coordinate integration of the public address signal and all-call signaling into Audiovisual Systems audio and control systems.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications

1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Public Address Systems:

1. Electrical Performance; Source Input to Power Amplifier Output:
a. Frequency Response (Equalizer flat): ±0.5 dB 30 Hz to 15 kHz. b. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 0.5%, 30 Hz to 15 kHz, +4 dBm line level.
c. Signal to Noise: At least 70 dB, 30 Hz to 15 kHz, referenced to input of +4 dBm.
d. Crosstalk: At least -60 dB, 30 Hz to 15 kHz.

2. Electro/Acoustic Performance; Distributed Systems, measured at 5 feet above floor:
a. Minimum Average SPL, prior to tuning and commissioning: 83 dBA. b. Consistent with devices specified herein. Uniformity of not less than ±6 dBA.

3. Equipment: Specified individually.

4. Audio Signal Path: Shall not degrade performance of connected equipment.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test Equipment.

1. Refer additionally to Section 27 05 00

2. Public Address Systems:
a. True RMS audio digital volt-ohm-millimeter (Example: Fluke 87). b. Pink Noise generator (Example: Ivie IE-20B, Neutrik). c. 70V Impedance meter (Examples: TOA ZM-104, University, Sennheiser).
d. ANSI Type 2 Sound Level Meter displaying A-weighted Sound Pressure Level (Examples: CEL, RION, Larson-Davis, Bruel & Kjaer). e. Real-time precision audio spectrum analyzer (Examples: CEL, RION, Larson-Davis, Bruel & Kjaer) with ANSI Type I or Type II calibrated microphone.

1.8 TRAINING
A. Conduct training on completed system at reasonable convenience of the City during normal City business hours.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 3 B. Operator Training: Three (3) hours.

1.9 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of Terms: The following definitions and conditions apply to each of the respective parameters and the measurements of those parameters, unless specifically stated otherwise:

1. Frequency Response: The minimum acceptable frequency band over which the amplitude response is within 3 dB (or any specified range), or the specified limits of the response relative to the reference frequency (1 kHz for audio, 1.0 MHz for video) under design load conditions, at any operating level up to and including the specified maximum output while fully in compliance with all other performance specifications.

2. Maximum Output Level: The minimum acceptable maximum signal output level (voltage, current or power) attained under design load conditions attained while fully in compliance with all other performance specifications.

3. Harmonic Distortion: The maximum acceptable harmonic distortion measured at any operating level, up to and including the specified maximum output, with an applied sine wave signal of any frequency in the range of the specified frequency response.

4. Audio Intermodulation Distortion: The maximum acceptable intermodulation distortion resulting from the introduction of 60 Hz and 7 kHz signals in a ratio of 4:1 under design load conditions at any operating level up to and including the specified maximum output level.

5. Signal to Noise Ratio: The minimum acceptable ratio of signal to noise levels derived from broadband measurements under design load at maximum output over the entire range of the specified frequency response.

6. Clipping Level: The minimum acceptable maximum level of signal applied to the device under design load conditions while fully in compliance with all other performance specifications.

7. Sensitivity: The maximum acceptable level of input signal applied to the device that is necessary to provide the maximum output under design load conditions.

8. Design Load: The load (in ohms) specified by usage of the particular device input or output.

B. Signal Levels: The following voltage levels shall be considered the standard operating levels for the particular circuitry, unless specifically noted otherwise (0.775 Volt = O dBu = 0 dbm for a 600 ohms terminated circuit):

1. Microphone Circuits: -30 dBu or less.

2. Audio Line Level Circuits: -30 dBu to +24 dBu; equivalent to -30 dBm to +24 dBm for a 600 ohms terminated circuit.

3. Loudspeaker Level Circuits: More than +24 dBu.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 4 C. Characteristic Impedances: The following operating impedances shall be considered to be the standard operating impedances for the particular circuitry, unless specifically noted otherwise:

1. Microphone Circuits: 50-250 ohms source, 150-1500 ohms terminating, electrostatically and electromagnetically balanced to ground.

2. Audio Line Level Circuits: 600 ohms maximum source, 600 ohms minimum terminating, line to line, electrostatically and electromagnetically balanced to ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DISTRIBUTED LOUDSPEAKER ASSEMBLIES AND RELATED
A. Provide tamper resistant fasteners at all assemblies mounted within 10 feet of finished floor in public occupancy spaces. Provide UL 1480 assemblies where required by code.

B. 3” Loudspeaker Driver Assembly

1. Drawing Reference: SA

2. Functions/Features:
a. 3” Full Range Loudspeaker
b. Integral 70v tap transformer
c. Frequency Response 110Hz – 12kHz
d. Dispersion: 135-degrees
e. Power Taps: 2, 4, 8, 16 Watts & 6-ohms
f. Sensitivity: 89.7dB (1W/1m)
g. UL1480 and UL2043 Listed
h. Blind access mount

3. Manufacturer:
a. JBL Control 12C-VA
b. Atlas FAP33T-W
Or equal.

C. 3" Loudspeaker Assembly - 70V Coupled, Ceiling Mounted in Gyp or Plaster Ceiling:

1. Drawing Reference: SC

2. Complete Assembly to consist of:
a. Provide 3” Loudspeaker Assembly specified elsewhere herein with blind access mount backbox.
b. Baffle to match that supplied for SA
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 5 D. 6" Loudspeaker Assembly, Waterproof - 70V Coupled, Ceiling Mounted in Gyp or Plaster Ceiling:

1. Drawing Reference: SG

2. Complete Assembly to consist of:
a. Six-inch loudspeaker.
b. Seventy volt tap transformer, 4 watt output minimum. c. Waterproof driver. Suitable for installation in shower room environment, including regular exposure to steam.
d. Ceiling baffles with 1” wide maximum steel trim ring at the baffle perimeter, fine perforated mesh over the remainder of the baffle, blind studs for mounting loudspeaker, and torsion spring for blind attachment of baffle to enclosure. The baffle can mount to the enclosure through ceilings up to 2” thick.
e. Round recessed steel enclosure, with damping compound to prevent metallic resonance.
f. Height: Less than 6”.

3. Manufacturer
a. Misco JC6WP-4T70 w/ Atlas Sound FAMT-6 adapter, 62-8 baffle, BMT95-8 backcan, 81-8R tile bridge
b. Or equal.

E. Ceiling Pendant Loudspeaker, 70V

1. Drawing Reference: SP

2. Features/Functions:
a. Frequency Response (-10 dB) 65 Hz - 15 kHz
b. Frequency Response (+/-3 dB) 85Hz - 14 kHz
c. Power Rating 100 W Continuous Program (2 hrs) 50 W (200W peak), Continuous Pink Noise (2 hrs) 40 W (160W peak) Continuous Pink Noise (100 hrs)
d. Maximum Input Voltage 18.2 V RMS (2 hrs), 36.4 V peak e. Nominal Sensitivity 88 dB Nominal
f. Coverage Angle 120° (averaged 1 kHz to 4 kHz)
g. Directivity (Q) 6.2
h. Directivity Index (DI) 7.3dB (averaged 1kHz – 16kHz) i. Rated Maximum SPL @ 1m 105 dB continuous pink noise, 111 dB peak
j. Rated Impedance 8Ω
k. Transformer Taps 70V: 30W, 15W, 7.5W & 3.7W 100V: 30W, 15W, 7.5W
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 6 l. Transformer Insertion Loss 0.94dB @ 3.7W, 0.89dB @ 7.5W,

0.83dB @ 15W, 0.94dB @ 30W
m. Driver 100 mm (4 in) polypropylene-coated paper with cloth surround, 20 mm (0.8 in) copper voice coil
n. Enclosure Material High impact polystyrene
o. Grille Zinc-plated steel grille with powder-coat finish, foam backing (removable for painting)
p. Environmental Exceeds Mil Spec 810 for humidity, salt spray, temperature & UV. IP44 capability per IEC 529 – splash-proof rating. q. Termination Two removable locking euro-block 2-pin connectors with screw-down terminals for bare wire. Connectors paralleled for input and loop-thru. Max. wire 12 AWG (2.5 mm2). Rubber terminal covers included.
r. Suspension Two identical suspension systems (one as main suspension cable and the other as safety cable), each consisting of 4.5 m (15 ft) long 2 mm (0.077 in) high-tensile galvanized-steel wire rope suspension cable with spring-clips for clipping onto the loudspeaker bracket and Gripple™ brand adjustable-height cable fasteners for infinitely adjustable height. Cables have SWL rating of 45 kg (99 lb). s. Safety Agency Ratings Speaker listed per UL1480, transformer registered per UL1876. In accordance with IEC60849/EN60849.

Suspension system and Gripple®-brand cable fastener listed per UL1598 and UL2239, TUV, and CSA Class 3426-01 & Class 3426-81. t. Dimensions (L x W x H) 234 mm (9.3 in) diameter x 259 mm (10.2 in) height to top of cabinet. 279 mm (11.0 in) to top of suspension bracket.
u. Net Weight (ea) 2.35 kg (5.2 lbs)
v. Shipping Weight (pair) 6.07 kg (13.4 lbs)
w. Included Accessories Two suspension cable systems (see “Suspension”, above), two 2-pin removable locking euro-block connectors, two rubber covers for euro-block connectors. x. Color: White

3. Manufacturer:
a. JBL 64 P/T White
b. QSC
c. Or equal

2.2 POWER AMPLIFIERS, ANALOG LINE LEVEL INPUT
A. Power Amplifiers, General

1. Drawing Symbol: PA[number].

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 7 a. Provide the following functions and/or features
1) Employ solid state devices (integrated circuits and/or transistors) throughout and employ positive protection of circuit
components.
2) With amplifier input driven 10 dB beyond input level required to produce full rated output, amplifier shall withstand for at least 15 seconds any of the following load conditions without instability or operation of main over current protection (i.e. no blown fuses or circuit breakers).
a) "Short" circuit of 0.1 ohm.
b) Open circuit (no load).
c) Standard Reactive Load: 5.4 ohms in series with the parallel combination of 12.5 microhenrys; 800
microfarads and 18.3 ohms resistive.
3) Peak voltage of turn on and/or turn off transients not greater than 20 dB below maximum rated amplifier output.
a) Time duration of transients not to exceed 3 seconds. 4) Input level controls for each output channel to be calibrated, stepped attenuators with at least 50 dB range.
a) For 0 to 34 dB of attenuation, steps not to be greater than

2.0 dB.
b) Attenuators to track calibration within 0.5 dB.
c) Stepped attenuators are not required at Power Amplifiers where the connected driving source device includes a
precision attenuator under digital control with precision not less than that specified herein.
5) Input Connectors: XLR connector or tip sleeve (standard) phone jack or barrier strip.
6) Output Connectors: Standard 0.75 inch spacing "5 way" binding posts, or barrier strip.
7) Where integral cooling fans are provided, such fans shall have a minimum life rating of 50,000 hours at 25 degree Centigrade ambient temperature.
8) Where indicated, provide balanced input, differential or transformer. Provide matching accessory to implement if not a standard feature of the product provided.
9) Listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. b. Minimum performance requirements with all channels driven 1) Power Output Per Channel: As scheduled on Drawings as Minimum Amplifier (Min Amp) and specified below;
continuous average sine wave power into 70 Volt line over a bandwidth of 40 Hz to 20 kHz.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 8 a) Frequency Response: plus 0 dB, minus 0.5 dB, 40 Hz to 20 kHz at rated output.
b) Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 0.25 percent at rated output, 40 Hz to 20 kHz.
c) Intermodulation Distortion: Less than 0.04 percent at rated output using frequencies of 60 Hz and 7 kHz,
mixed in a ratio of 4:1.
d) Input Impedance: 15,000 ohms minimum; unbalanced,
or balanced as shown on drawings.
e) Hum & Noise: At least 94 dB signal to noise ratio.
f) Channel Separation: At least 75 dB at 1 kHz.
g) Phase Shift: Less than plus20 degrees from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
h) D.C. Offset: Less than 10 millivolts.

B. Public Address Analog Audio Interface

1. Drawing Reference: PA-AUDIO

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia VI-6
b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

C. Public Address VoIP Interface

1. Drawing Reference: PA-VOIP

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia VOIP-1
b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

D. Public Address Pre-recorded Message/Announcement Module

1. Drawing Reference: PA-MIR

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia MS-1e
b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

E. Public Address Analog Line Output Module

1. Drawing Reference: PA-AMP4
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 9

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia VO-4
b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

F. Public Address 8-Channel Distributed Audio Zone Amplifier w/ failover

1. Drawing Reference: PA-AMP8

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia VA-8600c w/ AM-600c and VFOM-1 modules as required b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

G. Public Address Ambient Noise Sensor

1. Drawing Reference: PANC

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia ANC-1
b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

H. Public Address Line Monitor

1. Drawing Reference: PA-LM

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia PLD-2
b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

I. Public Address Local Volume Control

1. Drawing Reference: PAVC

2. Manufacturer:
a. BiAmp Vocia WR-1
b. Qsys
c. Or equal.

2.3 PUBLIC ADDRESS CABLING
A. General. Provide wire and cable with electrical conductors of soft drawn annealed copper, bare or tinned, concentric stranded, conductivity not less than 98% of pure copper. Comply with applicable Code for insulation, jacket, marking and listing for applicable use.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 10 B. Cable, Microphone/Line Level (General Purpose):

1. Drawing Reference: SP.

2. Description: The cable shall be a shielded, single twisted pair, with #20 AWG color coded stranded conductors and foil shield with drain wire.

3. Performance:
a. Conductors AWG: #20.
b. Conductors Stranding: 7 x 28.
c. D.C. Resistance Per 1000': 15 ohms maximum.
d. Shield: Aluminum-polyester foil with #20 AWG stranded tinned copper drain wire.
e. Diameter: 0.24" maximum.

4. Acceptable, subject to above:
a. Alpha.
b. Belden.
c. West Penn.

C. Cable, Loudspeaker and D.C. Power:

1. Drawing Reference: #12AWG

2. Description: The cables shall be twisted pair, jacketed, unshielded cables, #12, #14, #16, or #18, as shown on drawings. Plenum rated where installed in open plenum return voids.

3. Performance:
a. Conductor, AWG: #12, #14, #16, and #18, as noted.
b. Conductors, Stranding:
1) 19 x 25 (#12),
2) 19 x 27 (#14),
3) 19 x 29 (#16),
4) 16 x 39 (#18).
c. D.C. Resistance Per 1000':
1) 1.7 ohms (#12),
2) 2.7 ohms #14),
3) 4.27 ohms (#16),
4) 6.48 ohms (#18).
d. Diameter (maximum):
1) 0.384" (#12),
2) 0.332" (#14),
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 11 3) 0.256" (#16),
4) 0.224" (#18).
e. Manufacturers
1) Alpha.
2) Belden.
3) West Penn.
4) Or equal.

2.4 CATEGORY RATE CABLING AND WORK AREA OUTLETS
A. ANSI/TIA Category 6 Cabling

1. Drawing Reference: ** UTP6-4, where ** denotes cable count

2. Provide as specified in Section 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling.

B. High Speed, Category 6 Cabling, Plenum Rated

1. Drawing Reference:** UTP6-4P, where ** denotes cable count

2. Provide as specified in Section 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling.

C. Work Area Outlets and Jacks

1. Drawing Reference: Work Area Outlet Triangle with L subscript for Fire Alert Lighting Rough-in and Cabling.

2. Provide as specified in Section 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling.

2.5 CABLE TERMINATION DEVICES AND RELATED, NON-CATEGORY RATED A. Cable Termination Devices and Related:

1. Screw type or Tubular Clamp Barrier Blocks:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Buchanan 125, 0625 Series.
2) Electrovert.
3) TRW Cinch 140, 141, 142 Series.
4) Weidmuller.
5) Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
6) Phoenix.
7) or equal.

2. Tubular Clamp Barrier Blocks, High Density, Switch Block Section a. Drawing Reference: TB15.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 12 b. Features/Functions
1) Paired screw terminals on opposite sides of insulating base. 2) TB15 Base mounts to DIN rail, providing space beneath TB15 to dress field and source cabling.
3) Terminates range of wire gages used by project – at least 30 gage to 10 gage.
4) High density:
a) At least 33 pairs of connections per foot for 12 and smaller gage terminations,
b) At least 16 pairs of connections per foot for 10 gage terminations.
5) Switch Block Section permits load, such as field devices, to be separated from monitoring panel for testing independent of source then restored without disturbing field wiring terminations. 6) Rated at least fifteen (15) amperes at 300V AC/DC
c. Approvals
1) UL
d. Manufacturers:
1) Allen Bradley Isolation Switch Blocks,
a) 1492-H7 for 30 to 12 gage
b) 1492-CE9 for 10 gage.
2) Tyco Buchanan 0135 Series.
3) WECO Electrical Connectors
4) Altech
5) Curtis Industries
6) Electrovert
7) Weidmuller
8) Pass & Seymour/Legrand
9) Phoenix
10) or equal.

3. Low Level Audio Cable Termination, Insulation Displacement Products.

Coordinate with wire size, type and insulation
a. Manufacturers:
1) ADC "Dense Patch".
2) ADC UP3, UP3 N.
3) ADC I.C.O.N. Series.
4) AMP "AMP BARREL".

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 13 5) Gentner Electronics Flexiblock Series.
6) Gentner Electronics EasyTerm Series.
7) Siemon Model S66M450 with D10 Designation Strip.
8) Leviton
9) Any meeting 100TB requirements of Section 16765.
10) Or equal.

4. Low Level Audio Cable Termination, "Christmas Tree" or "Vee" Blocks a. Manufacturers:
1) ADC Model PJ 660 6.
2) Or equal by Thomas and Betts
3) or equal.

2.6 SPARES
A. Provide spare equipment in manufacturer's original packing complete with all specified accessories and documentation.

B. Provide quantity not less than four (4) per cent (rounded up to the nearest full unit) of the quantity provided of each of the distributed loudspeaker and paging horn assemblies provided under this Section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. The requirements of Sections 27 05 00, and 27 15 00 apply.

3.2 EQUIPMENT RACK TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES
A. Gain control settings

1. Establish tentative normal settings for all gain controls.

2. Set all equalizers flat.

3. Set all automatic gain control devices to bypass.

4. Adjust all gain controls on equipment for optimum signal-to-noise ratio and signal balance and, unless they are sub-panel mounted, cap them to prevent tampering.

5. Unless specified or directed otherwise, adjust gains such that in a given system the "front end" operates at unity gain and maintains 10 dB of clip margin referenced to the first onset of clipping of the associated power amplifier(s).

B. Freedom from parasitic oscillation and radio frequency pickup:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 14

1. Maintain previous setup.

2. Set up for each mode of operation specified in the functional requirements; verify that all systems are free from spurious oscillation and radio-frequency pickup.

3. Correct any such defects.

3.3 LOUDSPEAKER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Loudspeakers:

1. Verify proper installation of loudspeaker enclosures and related support.

2. Verify that no loudspeaker assembly is subjected to stresses or loading effects in any way contributing to possible extraordinary failure.

3. Connect loudspeaker assemblies to the appropriate 70 volt-line transformer tap as applies.

4. Verify specified polarity.

5. Use insulated crimp connectors or insulated "bobtail" splices applied with manufacturer's recommended ratchet tooling. Wire nuts or "Scotchlock" connectors shall not be acceptable.

6. Verify that loudspeaker grille openings and loudspeaker components are clear of paint after finishing.

7. Perform preliminary loudspeaker tests specified herein.

8. Correct non-conforming conditions.

9. Adjust 70 volt-line transformer taps as required to realize uniform sound pressure level as specified herein.

10. Document final 70 volt-line transformer taps on the Record Drawings.

11. Correct all conditions giving rise to noise, rattle or other extraneous sounds owing to operation of a loudspeaker assembly under any specified operating condition.

B. Loudspeaker Assembly Testing and Adjusting Procedures

1. Upon completion of the installation of all loudspeakers in an area, perform the following tests and record results.

2. Correct non-conforming conditions, unless the cause is clearly outside the Work of this Section, in which case submit the apparent cause to the City’s Project Manager.

C. Loudspeaker Line Impedance:

1. At terminal cabinets at equipment rooms, measure the modulus of impedance of each loudspeaker line.

2. Measure at at least 4 frequencies over the range from at least 31 Hz to 16 kHz.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 15 D. Loudspeaker Polarity:

1. Test the acoustic polarity of all loudspeakers using an Acoustic Polarity Tester.

E. Freedom from Buzzes, Rattles and Objectionable Distortion:

1. Individually apply to each loudspeaker line a slow sinewave sweep from 50 Hz to 5 kHz at a level of 6 dB below rated power amplifier output voltage.

2. Listen carefully for buzzes, rattles and objectionable distortion.

F. Uniformity of Coverage: Apply broadband Pink Noise.

1. Adjust level to approximately 70-80 dBA at measurement locations.

2. Measure in 4 kHz octave band at ear level.

3. Adjust loudspeaker aiming and amplifier level or 70 Volt loudspeaker tap as applies for uniformity of coverage.

3.4 SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES A. Upon completion of the installation of all equipment in an area, perform the following tests and record results.

1. Verify safe and proper operation of all components, devices, or equipment, establish nominal signal levels within the systems and verify the absence of extraneous or degrading signals.

2. Make all preliminary adjustments and document the setting of all controls, parameters of all corrective networks, voltages at key system interconnection points, gains and losses, as applicable.

3. Submit test report.

4. Correct all non-conforming conditions prior to requesting Acceptance Review and Testing.

5. Perform at least the following procedures:
a. Mechanical: Verify:
1) Integrity of all support provisions.
2) Absence of debris of any kind, tools, etc.
b. Power and Ground: Verify:
1) Grounding of devices and equipment.
2) Integrity of signal and technical power system ground connections.
3) Proper provision of power to devices and equipment.
c. Signal Wiring, Verify:
1) Integrity of all insulation, shield terminations and connections.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 275116 – 16 2) Integrity of soldered connections. Absence of solder splatter, solder bridges.
3) Routing and dressing of wire and cable.
4) Continuity, including conformance with wire designations on running sheets, field and shop drawings.
5) Absence of ground faults.
6) Polarity.

6. Use the proper sequence of energizing systems to minimize the risk of damage.

Energize.

7. Electro/Acoustic Tests:
a. Uniformity of coverage.
1) Walk pattern of devices and adjust obvious irregularities.

8. System Overall:
a. Verify levels.
b. Provide permanent "wedge" type labels on all controls, as applies, to indicate correct settings after systems performance testing and c. adjustment procedures have been successfully completed.

3.5 DEMONSTRATE
A. Demonstrate Paging Functionality using all system inputs. Demonstrate paging system function through City's telephone system.

B. Control switch/attenuator functionality.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-1

SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 28 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Common standards and procedures for the Electronic Safety and Security Work

2. Design, engineer and provide complete, all means of electronic security systems pathway, as well as support, suspension, attachment, fastening, bracing, and restraint (hereinafter "support") of the Work of this Division. Provide engineering of such support by parties licensed to perform work of this type in the Project jurisdiction.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Provisions of this Section apply to Electronic Safety and Security Work, including the following Sections:

1. Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

2. Section 28 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding For Electronic Safety And Security

3. Section 28 05 28 – Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security

4. Section 28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm Systems

5. Section 28 23 00 – Visual Surveillance

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS/DIVISIONS
A. Division 8

1. Provides the electronic door locking hardware, including electronic locks and power transfer hinges.

B. Division 27

1. Installs the structured cabling used to support the Project IP Cameras.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. Usage in accordance with Section 01 42 00 - References B. Conform to the applicable portions of the following standards agencies:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI C39.1 (1981; R 1992) Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-2

SAFETY AND SECURITY

2. ASTM International (ASTM)
a. ASTM A 123/A 123M (2002) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
b. ASTM B 32 (2004) Solder Metal

3. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
a. EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA-232-F (2002) Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA ICS 2 (2000) Industrial Controls and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC
b. NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2001) Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures

5. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) a. SMPTE 170M (1999) Television - Composite Analog Video Signal - NTSC for Studio Applications

6. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA) a. 47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices

7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a. UL 1037 (1999; Rev thru Sep 1999) Antitheft Alarms and Devices b. UL 1076 (1995; Rev thru Feb 1999) Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
c. UL 1610 (1998; Rev Aug 2001) Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units d. UL 294 (1999; Rev thru Oct 2001) Access Control System Units e. UL 636 (1996; Rev thru Mar 2001) Holdup Alarm Units and Systems f. UL 639 (1997; Rev thru Sep 2002) Intrusion Detection Units g. UL 681 (1999; Rev thru Jan 2001) Installation and Classification of Burglar and Holdup Alarm Systems
h. UL 796 (1999; Rev thru Dec 2003) Printed-Wiring Boards (1982 issue or latest revision).

1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. See also Section 01 42 00 - References, and Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications.

B. General Abbreviations used in these specifications. Refer additionally to the abbreviations list appearing on the Drawings.

1. ADA Americans With Disabilities Act.

2. AFC Above Finished Ceiling.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-3

SAFETY AND SECURITY

3. AFF Above the Finished Floor.

4. BLDG Building

5. CAT Category

6. CL Centerline

7. DIV Division

8. (E) Existing

9. FBO Furnished By City and/or Sacramento Public Library

10. HR Home Run

11. ID Inside Diameter

12. LAN Local Area Network

13. MAX Maximum

14. NIC Not In Contract.

15. OD Outside Diameter

16. OFE City and/or Sacramento Public Library Furnished Equipment.

17. PSRH Project Standard Receptacle Height.

18. PSSH Project Standard Switch Height.

19. TYP Typical

20. UON Unless Otherwise Noted.

C. Definitions of Terms:

1. As defined in Section 28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm Systems.

1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. As defined in the individual Specification Sections of Division 28.

1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following according to Conditions of the Construction Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. General Requirements

1. Submit all materials for review arranged in same order as Specifications, individually referenced to Specification Section, Paragraph and Contract Drawing number. Conform in every detail as applies to each referencing Section.

2. Submit 8 ½"x 11" items bound in volumes and drawings in edge bound sets.

Submit all drawings on sheets of the same size.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-4

SAFETY AND SECURITY

3. Make each specified submittal as a coordinated package complete with all information specified herein. Incomplete or uncoordinated submittals will be returned with no review action.

C. Progress Schedule: Comply with Section 01 32 19 – Submittal Schedules, Daily Reports and Field Reports.

D. Manufacturer's Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's Product Data Sheets. Collate in sequence of List of Materials:

2. Data sheet for each item in each Electronic Security Section, including all accessories, clearly marked for proposed product required for the Project, to including but not limited to the following where required by the Project scope:
a. Electronic Security Systems Pathway
1) Raceway
2) Raceway connectors
3) Gutter
4) Terminal Cans, Pull Boxes, Device Boxes
5) Enclosures
6) Means of support
b. Access Control and Intrusion Device Field Devices provided under the work of the Base Construction Contract
1) Door position sensors
2) Request to exit devices

3. Material Safety Data Sheet, where applies.

4. List of Materials Schedule. For each item, include:
a. Referencing Specification Section
b. Referencing Paragraph
c. Referencing Drawing, if specified only on plans
d. Manufacturer.
e. Model number.
f. Listing, including name of Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. g. Precede each submittal book with a summary schedule, with columns for each item above and rows for each item submitted.
1) Example:

Specification
Section
Paragraph Contract Drawing
Reference
Manufacturer Model
No.

UL/CLA
Listed
28 05 00 2.03C XYZ 123 Y
28 05 26 2.07A1 AAA 34-56 Y
TY2.01 ZZY 456 Y
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-5

SAFETY AND SECURITY
E. Field (Installation) and Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Collate in sequence at least the following plans:

1. Drawing index/symbol sheet.

2. Floor plans. At scale of Contract Documents. Show:
a. Device rough-in locations
b. Mounting height.
c. Conduit size.
d. Rough-in.

3. Sections/Elevations: At scale of Contract Documents:
a. Mounting location reference.
b. Terminal cabinets.
c. Electrical power receptacles required for the work of this Section. d. Clearances

4. System Conduit Riser Drawing. Submit drawings that clearly and completely indicate the function of each Electronic Safety and Security component. Indicate termination points of devices, and interconnections required for system operation. Indicate interconnection between modules and devices. Show:
a. Terminal cabinets.
b. Coordination with floor plans.

5. Mounting details:
a. Identify each item requiring seismic restraint installation in accordance with CBC Chapter 16. Include floor mounted items weighing more than 400 pounds and wall mounted or suspended items weighing more than 20 pounds.
b. Supports for such items shall be provided support, bracing, and anchorage, designed by the Contractor in accordance with the following criteria:
1) Design to resist seismic forces in accordance with CBC Chapter

16. 2) Minimum Design Parameters - As defined for the Project in Division 1 and/or on the Code Compliance sheet of the
Architectural Plans, with respect to Occupancy Category, Site Classification, Seismic Design Category, Importance Factor, Spectral Acceleration and SDI.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-6

SAFETY AND SECURITY
c. Specific details of restraints including anchor bolts submitted under the Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems for mounting and maximum loading at each location, showing compliance and coordination with Code and the project Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Documents.
d. Stamped and signed by an Engineer licensed in the Project jurisdiction for work of this type.
1) Submit an accompanying Engineering analysis stamped and signed by an Engineer licensed in California for work of this type, indicating that the Equipment Enclosure System will comply with California Building Code for the Project Seismic Zone when loaded with the weight of the equipment submitted. 2) Show calculations on drawings or in bound volume for review by Authorities having jurisdiction.
e. Show loads, type and strength of connections, sizes, dimensions, materials, etc.
f. Provide details for:
1) Equipment Rack anchorage.

6. Installation details
a. Terminal cabinets: Draw elevations of terminal blocks corresponding to the Single Line Diagram.
b. Firestopping,
c. Details of flexible raceway connections to be made to vibrating equipment
d. Details of J-Box and sealant application for the typical conditions listed in Section 27 05 48 – Noise and Vibration Controls for Communications Systems.
e. California Access Compliance Manual and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliance.

7. Fabrication details
a. Receptacles.
b. Panels.
c. Special mounting provisions
d. Legends/engraving details. Half or full size:

8. Schedules of Application
a. An itemized list of all items of equipment to be fitted with flexible electrical connections.
b. Catalog cuts of the products to be applied as J-Box mastic and Acoustical Sealant, and a schedule of rooms to receive application of mastic and sealant at J-Boxes.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-7

SAFETY AND SECURITY
F. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available that does not contain asbestos, PCB or other hazardous materials as determined by the City’s Representative, a "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) equivalent to OSHA Form 20 shall be submitted for that proposed product or material prior to installation.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Procedures: In accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Designated Supervisor: Provide a designated supervisor present and in responsible charge in the fabrication shop and on the Project Site during all phases of installation and testing of the Work of this Section. This supervisor shall be the same individual through the execution of the Work unless illness, loss of personnel, or other circumstances reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor intervene.

C. Reference Documents: At all times when the work is in progress, maintain at the workplace, fabrication shop or Project Site as applies.

1. A complete set of the latest stamped, actioned submittals of record.

2. A complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item.

D. Standard Products

1. Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section. All components must be of new condition, used or reconditioned products will not be accepted.
a. Alternative Qualifications. Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

2. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
a. Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.9 A. Manufacturer’s identification tags or marks are not acceptable on surfaces which will remain exposed to view after installation.

1. Evidence of “patching” after removal of tags or marks is not acceptable.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-8

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulations Applicable: Including but not limited to those defined in Section 01 42 00 - References.

1. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit Work not conforming to applicable laws, ordinances, rules, or regulations.

2. Safety Agency Listing: All devices provided under the Work of this Section which are connected to the Project electrical system shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, and shall be so labeled.

3. In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the City’s Representative. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Procedures:

1. In accordance with General Conditions and Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”, as specified in the individual sections of Division 28 and the following.
a. General
1) Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for cabling and equipment placed in storage.

1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

1.13 SEQUENCING
A. Comply with Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Works and Section 01 32 16 – Construction Project Document.

1.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the Electronic Safety and Security cabling and pathway system. Precede the manuals with a systems narrative specific to this Project, outlining the major systems functionality, the major systems components, and identifying which manuals document the performance of which subsystems.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-9

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents and as specified herein not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy.

B. Spare Parts

1. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures and Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking.

1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Comply with 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, and the following.

1. Record Drawings
a. Content
1) Provide a least as required for the Shop and Installation Drawings defined elsewhere in this Section.
2) Contractor shall be responsible for updating building and Electronic Safety and Security plans to reflect as-built conditions.
3) Indicate actual work on Drawings; indicate actual products used, replace vendor neutral nomenclature used in bid set with makes and models of actual installed devices.
b. CAD.
1) Use a computer aided drafting (CAD) system in the preparation of record drawings for this Project. CAD system shall produce files in AutoCAD® .DWG format, latest release at time of Project bid closure. Campus Standard, no substitution permitted. 2) Except where prohibited by Contract, City’s Representative will furnish CAD backgrounds in AutoCAD® .DWG format, for use by the Contractor in preparing Record Drawings.
3) Disk copy of Record Drawings: Provide 2 separate disc copies of each drawing file in the format noted above. Submit on City Representative’sdirected media format.
c. Reproduceables: As specified in Division 1.

1.16 WARRANTY SERVICE
A. In addition to provisions of General Conditions and Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”, provide the following.

1. Response Time:
a. Provide an access control manufacturer qualified technician familiar with the work at the Project Site within 24 hours after receipt of a notice of non-emergency malfunction.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-10

SAFETY AND SECURITY
b. Provide an access control manufacturer qualified technician familiar with the work at the Project Site within 4 hours after receipt of a notice of an emergency malfunction. An emergency malfunction is defined as one causing gate or door openings to be either inaccessible or unsecured. c. Provide the City’s Representative with telephonenumber attended 8 hours a day, 7 days a week, to be called in the event of a malfunction.

B. Provide all additional Warranties as defined in each Electronic Safety and Security Systems Section.

1.17 CLOSEOUT
A. Punch List: Perform any and all remedial work, at no claim for additional cost or time.

Where required, retest and submit Test Report. Notify the City’s Representative of completion of Punch List.

B. Portable Equipment: Furnish all portable equipment and spares to the City’s Representative, along with complete documentation of the materials presented. Where applicable, furnish portable equipment in the original manufacturer's packing.

C. Operating and Maintenance Data: Install framed operating and maintenance instructions.

Submit Manuals.

D. Project Record Documents: Submit print and digital copies. Digital files shall be in AutoCAD .dwg format, latest release at time of Project bidding.

E. Keys: If applicable, replace construction locks with permanent locks. Provide 5 sets of keys to the City’s Representative.

F. Instruction: Conduct specified instruction.

G. Warranty: Submit Warranty dated to run from date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Where a particular material, device, piece of equipment or system is specified directly, the current manufacturer's specification for the same shall be considered to be a part of these specifications, as if completely contained herein in every detail.

B. Each material, device or piece of equipment shall comply with all of the manufacturer's current published specifications for that item.

C. Products shall be made by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products.

D. Provide quantity as shown on Contract Drawings, or as otherwise indicated.

E. Provide all auxiliary and incidental materials and equipment necessary for the operation and protection of the Work of this Section as if specified in full herein.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-11

SAFETY AND SECURITY
F. Unless recycled content is specified, provide new materials.

G. Provide the manufacturer's latest design/model, permanently labeled with the manufacturer's name, model number and serial number.

H. Where products are of similar type or use, provide products of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Components

1. UL or third party certified. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for Electronic Safety and Security systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.

2. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance.
a. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance.
b. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the City’s Representative.
c. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.

J. Enclosures:

1. Provide steel frames and enclosures designed and wired to eliminate all induced currents.

2. Make bolted connections with self-locking devices.

3. All enclosures should be appropriate to environment of installation – refer to the requirements of Section 28 05 28 – Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security.

K. Finishes: Any item or component of the Work of this Section which is visible shall comply with the following.

1. Finishes noted or scheduled on the Contract Drawings take precedence.

2. Where design location requires that products, materials or equipment are visible to the public, no manufacturer's logos larger than 1/2 inch shall be visible. Unless otherwise noted or directed, neatly remove or permanently paint out such logos.

3. Where finishes are not noted or otherwise defined in the Contract Documents, submit manufacturer's standard finish samples for selection by the City’s Representative.

2.2 LABELING
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-12

SAFETY AND SECURITY
B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide black text on a white background.

C. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

D. Manufacturers

1. Brother P-Touch

2. Brady

3. Or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine existing conditions before starting work. Submit conflicts in a timely manner for resolution

3.2 GENERAL
A. Conform to UL 681, UL 1037, and UL 1076, the appropriate installation manual and the requirements of each specification section for each equipment type, whichever is most restrictive . Components within the system shall be configured with appropriate "service points" to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20 minutes.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and sequence the work to minimize disruption to each room environment and any existing Electronic Safety and Security systems.

B. Protection: Cover all computers, electronic equipment, desks, chairs, furniture and other articles when working at ceiling level and/or performing dust producing tasks.

3.4 SWITCH INSTALLATION
A. Work of this project includes installation of door position switches, window switches, hatch switches and gate position switches that need to be incorporated with the work of the project in order to prevent rework of construction installed by the work the Project during subsequent installation of the Electronic Security Systems by the City and its contractors.

B. At each condition, switch to be fully installed concealed and integrated into the work of the project with leads extended from each switch to the nearest pullbox installed for aggregation of pathway from the electronic security system devices. As described in Section in 28 05 28 - Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security.

3.5 LABELING
A. Field devices: Each Electronic Security System initiating device and each annunciating device shall be labeled with the assigned ID matching the device ID used in the City’s Access Control programming and set-up screens.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-13

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1. The ID shall incorporate the device abbreviation, the architectural door number and a sequential number assigned to each device of the same type occurring at the door opening in the form Door Number - Device Abbreviation – Sequential Number - .
a. Example: One LA at door number 101A: 101A-LA-1.
b. Example: Two DO’s at door 121: 121-DO-1, 121-DO-2.

2. Apply label to an unobtrusive spot on the device, cut to minimum practical size before applying.

B. Panels. Attach to the interior of each control a panel clear plastic holder in this holder place a laser printed list of the door and card reader relay points zone numbers and other signals that may be transmitted to the central station, the type of device, exactly what the alarm and restoral signals indicate. This list shall be typed on 8-½" x 11" paper. Provide a copy of these list(s) in Microsoft Word on electronic media format delivered to the City’s Representative.

3.6 REPAIR AND RESTORATION
A. Where working in spaces occupied by the City, return to their original positions any furniture or articles relocated to perform the work.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Where working in spaces occupied by the City:

1. Immediately after completing work within each space, clean up and remove all materials, scrap and dust.

2. All scrap material in work area shall be picked up and removed from the building at the end of each day. See also Division 1 for additional requirements.

3. All dust resulting from work performed shall be vacuumed up daily.

4. All scrap material shall be removed from the site and disposed of in an authorized disposal site. Refer to Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

3.8 SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES A. General Procedures

1. It shall be the responsibility of the Security Contractor to demonstrate to the County’s Representative that the security system is complete and functional as per these specifications. For intrusion detection field devices test shall ensure that the requisite degree of intrusion detection is provided.

2. Acceptance testing shall be scheduled by the Security Contractor thorough established project channels

3. Furnish all necessary instruments and equipment required for conducting tests.

B. Device Level Tests
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-14

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1. Initially, test each sensor and subsystem component individually.

2. Test all wire for shorts, open circuits, or grounding.

3. Immediately correct any defective work
C. Systems Tests.

1. When the function of each component within a particular subsystem such as each sensor within a particular zone is verified, certify that subsystem of the entire Electronic Safety and Security System is satisfactorily meeting required specifications. Test each subsystem similarly until each detection zone has been certified.

2. When subsystem certification is complete, test entire integrated system to ensure that subsystem elements are compatible and function as a complete system.

Integrated system test shall be accomplished in linear fashion, end-to-end, and shall verify that each simulated intrusion performed within each detection zone produces an appropriate alarm or signal.

3. Integrated system test shall also verify that alarm is correctly annunciated at the terminal block associated with the field devices,
D. Contractor Testing

1. Provide for approval, not later than 30 days prior to formal inspection and test, a detailed operational test plan of how each component, subsystem, and entire Electronic Safety and Security System will be tested.

2. Submit a written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer that the system has been 100% tested and approved. Submit prior to request for final payment.

3. Test each individual circuit and device for proper operation in the presence of telecommunications personnel. Correct all failures and retest at contractors expense to verify corrections. Correct as built drawings, O & M manuals, programming sheets and system programming to reflect the City’s final occupancy room numbers.

4. Provide City’s Acceptance Form with a check box associated with each card reader and input point. A check mark in the box will indicate that each point has been correctly installed and that communication between the controller and the server has been established. This form shall be completed prior to City acceptance of the system.

3.9 COMMISSIONING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General:

1. Upon completion of the work, remove excess debris, materials, equipment, apparatus, tools and similar items. Leave the premises clean, neat and orderly.

B. Results Expected:

1. Electronic Security Systems shall be complete and ready for use.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-15

SAFETY AND SECURITY

2. Testing, start-up and cleaning work shall be complete.

3. Maintenance Materials: Special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this Specification shall be delivered to the City.

C. Inspections

1. There shall be three phases of commissioning inspections:
a. Rough-in inspection
b. Above-ceiling inspection (after cables are placed)
c. Final inspection and testing

2. The Contractor shall verify that the installation and materials used have been inspected before they are enclosed within building features, or otherwise hidden from view. The Contractor shall bear costs associated with uncovering or exposing installations or features that have not been inspected and approved.

D. Rough-in inspection. Once electrical rough-in and pathways have been installed, but prior to walls and ceilings being installed, the Contractor shall request of the City’s Representative, in writing, for the official rough-in inspection to take place. The City’s Representative will then schedule a time to be on-site to conduct this inspection.

1. At a minimum, the City’s Representative will evaluate the following items:
a. Accurate location and height above finished floor for all outlet boxes. b. Accurate dimensions (particularly depth) of all outlet boxes and diameter of in-wall conduit serving outlet boxes.
c. Gutter size, location and clearance.
d. Location and size of all other electronic security systems conduits or pathways.
e. Location, spacing and clearance of and around electronic security systems racks and wall-mounted equipment.
f. That electronic security systems hard wired power and power receptacles, where installed under the work of this project, meet the design requirements.

2. The City’s Representative is then to issue a written report to the Contractor identifying all items which currently do not meet the construction document requirements. All items are to be resolved prior to walls and ceilings being closed up. This report is not necessarily all-inclusive; should issues be discovered later in the project, the Contractor is still responsible for corrections/repairs.

E. Above-ceiling inspection

1. Once all electronic security systems cabling has been installed and properly supported and walls have been painted, but prior to the installation of ceiling tiles/material, contractor shall request of the design team, in writing, for the official above-ceiling inspection. The City’s Representative will then schedule a time to be on-site to conduct this inspection
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-16

SAFETY AND SECURITY

2. At a minimum, the City’s Representative will evaluate the following items:
a. That all items from the previous inspection have been corrected. b. That electronic security systems cabling is routed correctly and adequately supported.
c. That electronic security systems cabling is not painted or over-sprayed. d. That the installed electronic security systems cabling matches what was specified/submitted.
e. That there are no kinks, splices, or other damage to the installed electronic security systems cabling.
f. That all field devices are properly supported, oriented and labeled. g. That all penetrations through fire-rated walls are properly firestopped, including fire blocking materials installed in the annular spaces; and that the firestops are properly labeled.

3. The City’s Representative is then to issue a written report to the Contractor identifying all items which currently do not meet the construction document requirements. This report is not necessarily all- inclusive; should issues be discovered later in the project, the appropriate communications subcontractor is still responsible for corrections/repairs.

F. Acceptance Review and Testing Procedures

1. The City’s Representative will witness formal Acceptance Tests after receipt of written certification that all prior Punch List work is complete and that Contractor’sfunctionality tests have been completed and that system is ready for final inspection. This request shall be made 3 weeks before substantial completion. The City’s Representative will then schedule a time to be on-site to conduct this inspection.

2. The Contractor shall provide the following for the acceptance testing. a. Personnel: Provide services of the designated supervisor. Provide quantity of technicians as required to comply with Project Schedule. b. All tools appropriate for performance of adjustment of and corrections to this Work. Include spare wire and connectors and specified tooling for application.
c. Ladders, scaffolding and/or lifts as required to access high devices. d. All test equipment.
e. Complete set of latest stamped, actioned submittals of record for reference.
f. Complete set of Test Reports.
g. Complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item for reference.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-17

SAFETY AND SECURITY

3. The Contractor shall execute the test plan required in Submittals section and as approved and/or modified by the City’s Representative. The testing must demonstrate complete operation of all systems and equipment, including any portable equipment.

4. These procedures may be performed at any hour of the day or night as required by the City’s Representative to comply with the Project Schedule and avoid conflict with City staff activities. Provide all specified personnel and equipment at any time without claim for additional cost or time.

5. At a minimum, the City’s Representative will check the following items:
a. Mechanical/Physical Installation.
1) That all items from the previous inspections have been corrected. 2) That all electronic security systems equipment and cabling terminal rooms is installed per the contract documents, including all required terminal blocks, pull boxes, termination resistors and electronic security systems grounding.
3) All other items necessary to guarantee contract documents are met and complete and functioning communications systems are installed.
4) All cables and electronic security systems field devices and pathway are properly labeled.
5) All penetrations through fire-rated walls are properly fire- stopped, including fire blocking materials installed in the annular spaces; and that the firestops are properly labeled.
b. Functionality Demonstration
1) Demonstrate functionality of each installed device is consistent with the read range, sensitivity and immunity to false alarms as specified by the device manufacturer.
2) Functional demonstration to also include, but not limited to the following active components and all related items installed under the work of the project:
a) Door position sensors

6. Door Position, Window and Hatch Switches
a. Demonstrate functionality of each device. Demonstrate that operation of each monitored door by 1/2" or less from the fully closed position causes the position switch to change state.

G. Adjust: As directed by the City’s Representative.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0500-18

SAFETY AND SECURITY

3.10 POST ACCEPTANCE TEST REMEDIATION
A. Temporary Equipment: Provide and operate, without claim for additional cost or time, temporary equipment and/or systems to provide reasonably equivalent function, as determined by the City’s Representative, in place of the Work of this Section which is incomplete or found not in conformance with the Contract Documents as of seven (7) days prior to the scheduled completion date. Provide such temporary equipment until Acceptance of the Work of this Section. Thereafter, remove such temporary equipment.

B. Correct:

1. In timely manner, correct identified Work of this Section which is incomplete or found not in conformance with the Contract Documents to comply with the Contract Documents, as reasonably determined by the City’s Representative.

2. Conduct additional tests to in the presence of the City’s representative to demonstrate that system conforms to the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-1

SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 28 0513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes wiring standards for work of Electronic Safety and Security Systems.

B. Related Work Under Other Sections

1. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials & Methods a. Defines standards and methods for termination of IP-based cabling used for IP cameras and IP work area outlets necessary to support access control systems installed under the work of Division 28.

2. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling a. Defines materials and execution standards for installation of TIA/ANSI standard category media installed under the work of Division 27 to provide work area outlets for final connection by the work of Division 28 to cameras and IP alarm system panels.

3. Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

4. Section 28 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding For Electronic Safety And Security

5. Section 28 05 28 – Pathways for Electronic Safety And Security

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A228/A228M-02 Steel Wire, Music Spring Quality.

2. ASTM D 709(2001) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
B. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

1. The Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47, Telecommunications, Chapter 1 - FCC Part 68 (1982 issue or latest revision) (47 CFR 68) .

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-2

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1. IEEE 383-2003 Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Electric Cables and Field Splices for Nuclear Power Generating Stations

2. IEEE 100-00 The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

1. ICEA S-56-434 (1983, 5th Ed.) Reaffirmed October 18, 1991 Polyolefin Insulated Communication Cables for Outdoor Use.

2. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596-2011 Indoor Optical Fiber Cables

3. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-2010 Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductor

4. ANSI/ICEA S-86-634-2011 Buried Distribution & Service Wire, Filled Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor.

5. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2011 Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable

6. ICEA S-102-700-2004 – ICEA Standard For Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With Or Without An Overall Shield) For Use In Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements

7. ICEA S-103-701-2011 Riser Cables Technical Requirements E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. NEMA WC 63.1(2000) Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cables
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
G. Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA)

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2009

3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard, published 2009

4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, published 2008, including errata issued in October, 2008.

5. ANSI/TIA 569-C (2012) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

6. ANSI/TIA-606-B (2012) Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure

7. ANSI- J-STD-607-B (2011) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises
H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-3

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1. UL 444(2002; Bul. 2002, 2003) Communications Cables

2. UL 910(1998) Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air

3. UL 1286(1999; R 2004) Office Furnishings

4. UL 1581 Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

Oct. 2001

5. UL 1666(2000; R 2002) Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical- Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts

6. UL 1863(2000; R 2004) Communications Circuit Accessories

7. UL 969 (1995; R 2001) Marking and Labeling Systems

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLING
A. General

1. Where not otherwise specified or indicated, conform to manufacturers most stringent recommendations with respect to pair count, gage, conductor construction and shielding for indicated run length.

2. Conform to Code requirements with respect to acceptable jacket construction for each application and condition. Provide NEC/CEC CMP listed cable construction at plenum at environmental air and underfloor applications.

B. Card Reader Cabling

1. Construction:
a. Conform to Code requirements with respect to acceptable jacket construction for each application and condition
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-4

SAFETY AND SECURITY
b. 4 pair
c. 22 ga. minimum
d. Overall foil shield with drain wire.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) Alpha
3) Commscope/Isotec
4) West Penn
5) or equal.
f. Manufacturers, Alternate Construction:
1) Category 6 cabling as specified in Section 27 15 00.

C. Release Button, Door Switch

1. 2 stranded conductors, 22-18 gauge minimum

2. Manufacturers:
a. Belden 8442, 8461, 5300UE, 5500UE, 6300UE, 6500UE
b. Alpha
c. Commscope/Isotec
d. West Penn
e. or equal.

D. Request to Exit, Motion Detector, Glass Break

1. 4 stranded conductors, 22-18 gauge minimum

2. Manufacturers:
a. Belden 5302UE, 5502UE, 6302UE, 6502UE
b. Alpha
c. Commscope/Isotec
d. West Penn
e. or equal.

E. Combination dual detector

1. 6 stranded conductors, 22-18 gauge minimum

2. Manufacturers:
a. Belden 5304UE, 5504UE, 6304UE, 6504UE
b. Alpha
c. Commscope/Isotec
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-5

SAFETY AND SECURITY
d. West Penn
e. or equal.

F. Lock Power and General Low Voltage Power, Indoor Applications

1. 2 stranded conductors, 16-18 gauge minimum. Size to exceed manufacturers minimum recommendations for voltage drop for required run lengths.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Belden 5300UE, 5200UE, 6300UE, 6200UE
b. Alpha
c. Commscope/Isotec
d. West Penn
e. or equal.

G. RS-232 Cabling

1. At least 2-3 pairs, actual pair count as required by interface.

2. 22 gauge minimum, paired construction.

3. Overall foil shield with drain wire

4. Manufacturers:
a. Belden 9855, 89855
b. Alpha
c. Commscope/Isotec
d. West Penn
e. or equal.

H. RS-485 Cabling

1. At least 2 pairs, or as required by interface.

2. 18 gauge minimum, paired construction.

3. Overall foil and braid shield with drain wire

4. Manufacturers:
a. Belden 9842, 82842
b. Alpha
c. Commscope/Isotec
d. West Penn
e. or equal.

I. Control Cabling, Underground, in ducts
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-6

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1. As specified for the applications above with waterblocking construction consisting of two ply tape designed to swell on exposure to water.

2. Jacket is sunlight and moisture resistant

3. NEC CM or CL3 listed or better. Transition to listed cabling type within 50 feet of entering building.

4. Manufacturer listed for underground application subject to extended exposure to standing water.

5. Manufacturer:
a. West Penn Aquaseal
b. Alpha
c. Belden
d. Commscope/Isotec
e. or equal.

2.2 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS CABLING LABELS, INTERIOR A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.

B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

C. Provide vinyl substrate with a white printing area and black print. If cable jacket is white, provide cable label with printing area that is any other color than white, preferably orange or yellow – so that the labels are easily distinguishable.

D. Shall be flexible vinyl or other substrates to apply easy and flex as cables are bent.

E. Shall use aggressive adhesives that stay attached even to the most difficult to adhere to jacketing.

F. Manufacturers:

1. Brady

2. Brother

3. Panduit

4. Or equal.

2.3 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS CABLE LABELS, OUTSIDE PLANT A. Cable Tags in Manholes, Handholes, and Vaults

1. Provide tags for communications cable or wire located in manholes, handholes, and vaults.
a. The tags shall be polyethylene.
b. Machine printed - Do not provide handwritten letters.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-7

SAFETY AND SECURITY

2. Polyethylene Cable Tags
a. Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 22.4 MPa (3250 pounds per square inch) 3250 pounds per square inch; and that are two millimeter (0.08 inch) 0.08 inch thick (minimum), non- corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 77 degrees C 170 degrees F. b. Provide 1.3 mm (0.05 inch) 0.05 inch (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder.
c. Provide a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. d. Ties shall have a minimum loop tensile strength of 778.75 N (175 pounds) 175 pounds. The cable tags shall have black block letters, numbers, and symbols 25 mm (one inch) one inch high on a yellow background.
e. Letters, numbers, and symbols shall not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Panduit
b. Brady
c. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING CLASSIFICATION AND RELATED
A. Audio Signal Wiring Classification:

1. Type A-l: Microphone level wiring less than -30 dBu, 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

2. Type A-2: Line level wiring -30 dBu to +24 dBu, 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

3. Type A-3: Loudspeaker level or circuit wiring greater than +24 dBu, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

B. Video and Related Signal Wiring Classification:

1. Type V-1: Baseband and composite video wiring 1 volt peak-to-peak into 75 ohms, 0 to 10.0 MHz.

2. Type V-2: Synchronization and switching pulse wiring 4 volts peak-to-peak into 75 ohms, 15.62 to 15.75 kHz.

3. Type V-3: Color subcarrier wiring 0 to 4 volts peak-to-peak into 75 ohms, 3.57 to 4.43 MHz.

4. Type V-4: MATV system wiring 0.1 to 1000 microVolts peak-to-peak into 50 or 75 ohms, 47 to 890 MHz.

C. Control Signal Wiring Classifications:

1. Type C-1: DC control wiring 0 to 50 volts.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-8

SAFETY AND SECURITY

2. Type C-2: Synchronous control or data wiring 0 to 40 volts, peak-to-peak.

3. Type C-3: AC control wiring 0 to 48 volts, 60 Hz.

D. Additional Wiring Classifications:

1. Type M-1: DC power wiring 0 to 48 volts.

2. Type M-2: AC power wiring greater than 50 volts, 60 Hz.

3. Wiring Combinations:

E. Except as indicated herein, conduit, wireways and cable bundles shall contain only wiring of a single classification. The following combinations are acceptable in conduit, or cable harnesses. Additional acceptable combinations may be indicated on the Drawings.

1. Types A-1, C-1, and M-1.

2. Types A-2, C-l, C-2, and M-l, runs less than 20 feet.

3. Types A-2, C-1, and M-1.

4. Types A-3, C-1, C-2, and M-1.

5. Types A-2, V-1, and V-3.

6. Types V-1, V-2, V-3, and C-1.

7. Types M-2 and C-3.

3.2 WIRING PRACTICE
A. All wiring of Division 28 to be installed in raceway except above accessible ceilings.

1. Separate raceway systems, including backboxes and conduit, shall be provided for to electromagnetically isolate electric lock and door motor operators, local door alarms and other similarly powered sources of electro-magnetic noise from door position switches, card reader, door release buttons, duress alarms and similar low power, electromagnetic noise sensitive applications. Refer to Wiring Classification and Related above and comply.

2. Minimum conduit size for multiple conductor runs shall be ¾". In each control panel two empty ¾” conduits shall be installed for future use. These conduits shall be routed to an accessible area above the ceiling or to a location approved by City. Run circuits for AC separate from circuits using DC. Each supervisory/data loop shall be run separately from any other supervisory/data loops they shall not be permitted to share the same conduit. From security alarm control panel provide one ¾" conduit to nearest telephone backboard or panel location for tie-in to City furnished central station. Provide min 1" conduit to each card access or exterior door, unless otherwise shown or scheduled on the plans

3. Conduits including flexible metal and armored cable shall terminate in the sensor or device enclosure.

4. Ends of conduit shall be fitted with insulated bushings. Exposed conductors at ends of conduits external to sensors and devices are not acceptable.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-9

SAFETY AND SECURITY

5. Refer to additional requirements in Section 28 05 28 - Pathways For Electronic Safety And Security.

B. All field wiring shall run continuous from device to device no splices shall be permitted except at specified terminal blocks installed in lockable termination cabinets.

1. The use of wire nuts and crimp type connectors shall not be permitted.

2. Where shielded wire is used it shall be connected to an earth ground at the panel.

Tin terminated shield drain wires and insulate with heat shrinkable tubing.

3. Dress, lace or harness all wire and cable to prevent mechanical stress on electrical connections. No wire or cable shall be supported by a connection point.

4. Provide service loops where harnesses of different classes cross, or where hinged panels are to be interconnected.

5. Security alarm conductor terminations in control panels, termination cabinets, junction boxes and annunciator panels to be made on specified terminal strips with a separate point for each conductor.
a. All such strips to be number identified as shown in wiring diagram attached to inside of door of control panel.
b. Connect wiring neatly to terminals strips.
c. Set up termination of cabling so that section of the system may be isolated or shorted out for servicing.

C. No control panel shall be mounted where is not readily accessible the highest connection point shall not be above 6’-6”' nor shall the bottom of the panel be below 30".

D. All necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system shall be provided. All installation work must be done in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the general requirements of ANSI C2 and NFPA

70. E. Coordinate insulation displacement (quick connect) terminal devices with wire size and type. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Make connections with automatic impact type tooling set to recommended force.

3.3 LABELING
A. Label each end of each cable to indicate its terminal point.

1. For field devices, use the device label assigned per the requirements of Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONICSECTION 28 0513-10

SAFETY AND SECURITY
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0526-1

SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 28 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Work Under Other Sections

1. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems

2. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding For Communications Systems

3. Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security

4. Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

5. Section 28 05 28 – Pathway for Electronic Safety and Security

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes grounding and bonding of Electronic Safety and Security Work, including but not limited to:

1. Electronic Safety and Security Raceways

2. Cable Shields

3. Electronic Safety and Security Cabinets and Enclosures.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Electronic Safety and Security Grounding System as described herein and indicated on drawings.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, the complete Electronic Safety and Security installation including the racks, cabinets, panels, cable tray, runway, lightning protectors cable shields and splice cases provided under the work of this project shall be completely and effectively grounded in accordance with all Code and Standards requirements, whether or not such connections are specifically shown or specified.

C. Resistance:

1. Resistance from the farthest ground bus through the ground electrode to earth shall not exceed 5 Ohms or the requirements of ANSI/TIA/-606-B-2012, whichever is more restrictive.

2. Resistance from Electronic Safety and Security Rack Buss ground to Ufer ground must remain less than or equal to the electrical ground presented at A/C outlet for electronic equipment in the communications rack.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0526-2

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1.4 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI/TIA/-606-B-2012, Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure.

2. ANSI-J-STD-607-B, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises.

B. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

1. ASTM B3 (2013) Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire C. IEEE

1. IEEE C135.30 (1988) Standard for Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for Overhead or Underground Line Construction

2. IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 467 (1993); R 2004 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0526-3

SAFETY AND SECURITY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Equal products by the following manufacturers will be considered providing that all features of the specified product are provided:

1. Ground Bushings, Connectors, Jumpers and Bus:
a. O-Z/Gedney.
b. Thomas & Betts Corp.
c. Or equal.

2. Compression Connector Lug
a. Panduit
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding
c. Or equal.

3. Telecommunications Ground Bus Bar
a. Panduit
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding
c. or equal.

4. Rack and Cabinet Grounding
a. Panduit Structured Ground Kit
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding
c. or equal.

2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. General purpose insulated: UL listed and code sized copper conductor, with dual rated THHN/THWN insulation, color identified green.

B. Cable jacket marking:

1. Must be legible and shall contain the following information:
a. Manufacturer’s name
b. Copper conductor gauge
c. UL listing
d. Cable jacket shall be green with black lettering
C. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone Cable: 3/0 AWG THHN/THWN CU - Must be UL listed.

1. Manufacturer:
a. General Cable
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0526-4

SAFETY AND SECURITY
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding
c. or equal.

D. Bonding pigtails: Insulated copper conductor, identified green, sized per code, and provided with termination screw or lug. Provide solid conductors for #10 AWG or smaller and stranded conductors for #8 AWG or larger.

E. Bonding Conductors sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a size of 3/0 AWG ground wire.

2.3 COMPRESSION CONNECTOR LUG
A. Compression connector lug

1. Description
a. Long-barrel compression lugs shall be used on all ground wire. b. Copper alloy body.
c. Provide lug size to match conductor being terminated. d. Provide 2 hole pattern lugs.
e. Provide each lug with silicon bronze hardware, including 2 bolts, 2 split lock washers and 2 nuts.

2. Manufacturer:
a. Panduit
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding GECLBxxx (xxx depending on Cable Size)
c. or equal.

2.4 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS
A. Plated malleable iron or steel body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating throat and lay-in grounding lug.

2.5 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, GROUND RODS, OR SPLICES A. Where required by the Drawings or Specifications, grounding conductors shall be spliced together, connected to ground rods or connected to structural steel using exothermic welds or high pressure compression type connectors.

1. Exothermic welds shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod and for cable to structural steel surfaces. Exothermic weld kits shall be as manufactured by Harger Lightning & Grounding, Cadweld, Thermoweld or equal. Each particular type of weld shall use a kit unique to that type of weld.

2. High-pressure compression type connectors shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod connections. Connections shall be as manufactured by Thomas & Betts #53000 series, Burndy “Hy-Ground” or equal.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0526-5

SAFETY AND SECURITY

2.6 EXTRA FLEXIBLE, FLAT BONDING JUMPERS
A. Two Hole Tinned Flat Braided Copper Ground Straps, 6 Gauge equivalent, 12” long with crimped lugs on each end and ¼”-20 mounting hardware.

1. Manufacturer:
a. Harger GS12094122C3/8
b. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide Grounding and Bonding according to the most restrictive requirements of:

1. ANSI-J-STD-607-B

2. California Electrical Code Article 250 and references therein.

3. California Electrical Code Article 800.

B. In the event of conflicting requirements, National Electrical Code requirements shall prevail.

C. Point of Connection

1. Under Work of this Section, ground to the building Telecommunications Grounding System as installed under the work of Division 27 at the TMGB D. Ground And Bonding Conductor Installation

1. All lug connections to the ground bars and opposite end shall use Antioxidant Joint Compound.

2. Unless otherwise noted, all bonding and ground wires on telecom cable trays and runways shall be routed on the outer edge of the cable trays and runways.

E. Mechanical Connections

1. Make connections bare metal to bare metal.

2. Where required, remove paint to bare metal, make grounding or bonding connection, and touch up paint.

3. Torque threaded fasteners to manufacturer’s recommended values.

F. Compression Connections

1. Make compression connections with the lug or fitting manufacturer’s recommended tooling, with the tooling set to the recommended force and stroke.

G. Electronic Safety and Security Raceways and Sleeves
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SECTION 28 0526-6

SAFETY AND SECURITY

1. Bond metallic raceway and sleeves to the Telecommunications Ground Busbar at the Telecommunications Room that serves the related Electronic Safety and Security systems.

2. Where a metallic raceway connects 2 or more Telecommunications Rooms, bond to the Telecommunications Ground Busbar at each.

H. Cable Shields

1. Comply with California Electrical Code Article 800.

I. Protector Fields

1. Comply with California Electrical Code Article 800.

J. Electronic Safety and Security cabinets and enclosures

1. Bond to the Communications Ground Busbar at the Communications Room.

3.2 LABELING
A. Provide labeling according to the requirements of:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

2. Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Security and Safety.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-1 SECTION 28 0528 - PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Electronic security systems pathway requirements are shown schematically on the plans.

Work of the Project includes design and provision by the contractor of complete electronic security systems pathways as specified in this Section and as shown diagrammatically on the plans. Design and provide electronic security systems pathways to be in accordance with the California Electric Code, ANSI/TIA-569-C (2012) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, as specified in this Section and as shown on the plans, whichever is most restrictive. Provide system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.

B. Contractor to design complete Electronic Safety and Security pathway system including provision of the following

1. Rigid steel conduit and fittings.

2. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings.

3. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.

4. Non-metallic raceway and fittings.

5. Flexible metallic conduit and fittings.

6. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit and fittings.

7. Miscellaneous conduit fittings and products.

8. Junction Boxes

9. Hinged cover enclosures.

10. Pullboxes and Terminal Cabinets.

11. Wireway

12. Strut supports

13. Beam clamps

14. Concrete Fasteners

15. Touch-Up Materials

16. Conduit supports.

17. Equipment supports.

18. Fastening hardware
C. Provide fire penetration sealant systems at all rated wall and floor/ceiling penetrations as required. Additionally, provide where indicated, which may be in excess of Code but required to meet City’s operational and functional requirements.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-2 D. At Hazardous Occupancies, installation conforms to the requirements of California Electric Code for Class and Division rating of spaces.

E. Fastening System Description

1. Provide devices specified in this Section and related Sections for support of electronic safety equipment specified for this Project.

2. Provide support systems that are adequate for the weight of equipment, conduit and wiring to be supported.

3. Seismic Design Requirements
a. Identify each item requiring seismic restraint installation in accordance with CBC Chapter 16. Include floor mounted items weighing more than 400 pounds and wall mounted or suspended items weighing more than 20 pounds.
b. Supports for such items, including racks, conduit, cable trays and similar shall be provided support, bracing, and anchorage, designed by the Contractor in accordance with the following criteria:
1) Design to resist seismic forces in accordance with CBC Chapter

16. 2) Minimum Design Parameters - As defined for the Building, with respect to Occupancy Category, Site Classification, Seismic Design Category, Importance Factor, Spectral Acceleration and SDI.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Work In Other Sections. Related work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete installation.

1. Section 01 73 00 – Execution Requirements

2. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching

3. Section 27 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems

4. Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security

5. Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

6. Section 28 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electronic Safety and Security

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Usage: In accordance with Section 01 42 00 – References.

1. American Institute Of Steel Construction (AISC)
a. AISC 325 (2005) Steel Construction Manual
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-3

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI C80.1 1994 Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated
b. ANSI C80.3 1991 Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated

3. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM A123/A123M-02 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
b. ASTM A153/A153M-04 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot- Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
c. ASTM B633-98e1 Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
d. ASTM A653/A653M-04a Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA 250-2003 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
b. NEMA FB 1 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1-2003) Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable c. FB 2.10 2000 Selection and Installation Guidelines For Fittings For Use With Non-Flexible Metallic Conduit Or Tubing (Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, And Electrical Metallic Tubing). d. FB 2.20 2000 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for use with Flexible Electrical Conduit and Cable
e. NEMA ICS 6 1988 (Rev. 1) Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
f. NEMA OS 3-2002 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes.
g. NEMA RN 1-1998 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. h. NEMA TC 7 2000 Smooth Wall Coilable Polyethylene Electrical Plastic Duct
i. NEMA TC 13 2000 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT). j. NEMA TC 14 1984(R 1986) Filament-Wound Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings

5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
a. UL 1 2000 Flexible Metal Conduit
b. UL 6 2004 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel
c. UL 50 (1995; R 1999, Bul. 2001) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
d. UL 360 1986 (Bul. 1991) (R 1993) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-4 e. UL 514A 1991 (R 2004) Metallic Outlet Boxes
f. UL 514B 1989 (R 2004) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings g. UL 514C 1996 (R 2000) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.
h. UL 651 1989 (R 1989) (Bul. 1993) Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
i. UL 797 1993 (R 2004) Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel j. UL 1242 1983 (R1993) (Bul. 1993) Intermediate Metal Conduit. k. UL 1286(1999; R 2001, Bul. 2002) Office Furnishings
l. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
m. UL Fire Resistance Directories

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification, Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security and the following:

1. As part of the project submittals, the contractor to provide engineered shop drawings indicating the proposed design for mounting all work of this Division as defined under the Seismic Design Requirements and defined elsewhere in this Section, inclusive of mounting systems, equipment mounted at the exterior, inclusive of its effective wind load under the range of conditions expected. a. Shop drawings to be accompanied by anchorage calculations indicating that it shall remain attached to the mounting surface after experiencing forces in conformance with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, California Building Code.
b. Structural Calculations shall be prepared and signed by a California Registered Structural Engineer. Specify proof loads for drilled-in anchors, if used.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

B. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new and unused, and of current manufacturer.

C. Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the project unless otherwise submitted and approved by the City’s Representative.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-5

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS
A. Products of the manufacturers specified in this section establish the minimum functional, aesthetic and quality standards required for work of this section.

2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide the following types of conduit systems listed by their commonly used generic name.

2.3 RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers:

1. Raceway:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.
b. Triangle PWC, Inc.
c. Western Tube and Conduit Corp.
d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).
f. Alflex Corp.
g. American Flexible Metal Conduit Co.
h. Anaconda.
i. Or equal.

2. Stainless Steel Raceway and Fittings
a. Calbrite
b. Allied Tube and Conduit
c. Or equal.

3. Fittings:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. OZ/Gedney.
c. Thomas & Betts Corp.
d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).
f. Carlon.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-6 g. or equal.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit.

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: RSC.

2. Construction:
a. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
b. Compression type couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only materials of steel or malleable iron are acceptable. Locknuts shall be bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.
c. Three piece couplings: Electroplated, cast malleable iron. d. Insulating bushings: Threaded polypropylene or thermosetting phenolic rated 150 degree C minimum.
e. Insulated grounding bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with insulated throat and steel "lay-in" ground lug with compression screw. f. Insulated metallic bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with plastic insulated throat rated 150 degrees C.
g. All fittings and connectors shall be threaded.

C. Coated Rigid Steel Conduit:

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: CRSC.

2. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN-1 with nominal 40 mil thermoplastic vinyl coating, heat fused and bonded to the exterior of the conduit.

3. Fittings:
a. Conduit couplings and connectors shall be as specified for galvanized rigid steel conduit and shall be factory PVC coated with an insulating jacket equivalent to that of the coated material.
b. Fittings over-sleeve to extend 1 conduit diameter or 1-1/2" beyond fitting, whichever is less.

4. Performance:
a. Tensile Strength: 3500 psi.

5. Approvals:
a. NEMA RN1 (Type 40 - 40 mils thick)
b. CalTrans Type 2

6. Manufacturers:
a. Plastibond by RobRoy Industries.
b. Occal-40 by Occidental Coating Company.
c. KorKap by Plastic Applicators.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-7 d. Ocal-Blue
e. or equal.

D. Intermediate Metal Conduit

1. Drawing Reference: IMC

2. Conduit: Hot dip galvanized steel meeting the requirements of CEC Article 345 and conforming to ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

3. Fittings: Compression type couplings, connector and bushing shall be as specified for galvanized rigid steel conduit. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.

E. Electrical Metallic Tubing.

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: EMT.

2. Conduit: Shall be formed of cold rolled strip steel, electrical resistance welded continuously along the longitudinal seam and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Conduit shall conform to ANSI C80.3 specifications and shall meet UL classifications.

3. Raintight compression couplings: Electroplate steel or cast malleable iron; UL listed raintight and concrete tight, using gland and ring compression type construction.

4. Raintight compression connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed raintight and concrete tight, with insulated throat, using gland and ring compression type construction.

5. Use of set-screw couplings and connectors is not permitted.

F. Flexible Conduit:

1. Drawing Reference: FLEX

2. Construction:
a. Flexible steel, zinc coated on both inside and outside by hot-dipping process.
b. Interlocking spirally wound continuous steel strip.
c. 3/4" minimum size.

3. Fittings: Compression type connectors shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast malleable iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Exception: Pressure cast screw-in connectors shall be acceptable for fixture connection in suspended ceilings and cut-in outlet boxes within existing furred walls.

4. Approvals:
a. UL 1
G. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit

1. Drawing Reference: Liquidtight
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-8

2. Conduit: Shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strips, interlocking spirally wound, covered with extruded liquidtight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and conforming to UL 360. Provide conduit with a continuous copper-bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions.

3. Fittings: Compression type connector body and gland nut shall be of cadmium plated steel or cast malleable iron, with tapered, male, threaded hub; insulated throat and neoprene "O" ring gasket recessed into the face of the stop nut. The clamping gland shall be of molded nylon with an integral brass push-in ferrule.

H. Conduit, Stainless Steel

1. Constructed of Type 316 Stainless Steel with either EMT, IMC type stainless steel fittings.

2. Approvals
a. UL6A
I. PVC Conduit

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: PVC.

2. Construction:
a. 4" trade diameter, unless otherwise noted.
b. Poly-vinyl chloride.
c. Schedule by Application
1) Straight segments, Schedule 40.
2) Flat elbows, Schedule 40.
3) Vertical elbows sweep up to grade, Schedule 80.
4) Above grade, Schedule 80.
d. Elbows.
1) Where innerduct liner is scheduled – CRSC.
2) Elsewhere, Schedule 80.
3) 90° C rated.
4) Solvent welded joints, joints by pipe manufacturer.
e. Application.
1) Soil Backfill/Direct Burial
a) RUS Type II, Type C or Type DB
b) Schedule 40.
2) Concrete Encasement:
c) PVC Type DB-120,
d) RUS Type I, Type B or Type EB
e) Any meeting Soil Backfill/Direct Burial.
3) Boring
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-9 f) HDPE.
g) RUS Type Flexible Plastic.
f. Performance:
1) Tensile Strength: 7,000 psi at 73.4° F.
2) Flexural Strength: 11,000 psi.
3) Compressive Strength: 8,600 psi.
g. Approvals:
1) RUS Listed for Telephone Cable Installation 5-99 Edition, or latest release thereof.
2) NEMA TC-2, PVC Type EPC-40 and EPC-80.
3) NEMA TC-3.
4) NEMA TC14 Fiberglass Conduit.
5) UL 514 fittings.
6) UL 651.
7) ANSI C33.91.
h. Manufacturers:
1) RUS Listed:

Manufacturer RUS Listed for Manufacturer Part Number
Allwire, Inc. Flexible plastic ALLDUCT
American Pipe & Plastics Plastic Type B, C, and D
Plastic Type EB and DB
Plastic PVC Multi-Duct (2,3,4 and 6-way)
Americon International Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Plastic PVC Type C
Apache Plastics, Inc. Plastic Type EB and Type DB
ARMCO Plastic Smooth-Cor Type B and Type C
Arnco Flexible plastic HDPE Conduit
Bay Plastics, Inc. Plastic Type B and Type C
Bristolpipe Plastic Type B, C, and D
Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Can-Tex Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Plastic Type B, C, and D
Carlon Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Plastic Type B, C, and D
Plastic Multi-Gard
Certain-Teed Products Corp. Plastic Type EB and Type DB CIBA-GEIGY Fiberglass T & D Conduit
Condux International, Inc. Concrete Condux
Plastic Type EB and Type DB
CSR Polypipe Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Dura-line Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Eagle Pacific Industries, Inc. Plastic Type EB and Type DB Flexible plastic HDPE Coiled Duct
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-10 Endot Industries Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Freedom Plastics, Inc. Plastic Type C
Hercules, Inc. Flexible plastic Corflo plastic conduit
Hurlbut Plastic Pipe Plastic Type C
Ingomar Plastic Pipe Plastic Type B and Type C
J-M Manufacturing Company Plastic Types C, EB, and DB
Kyova Plastic Type EB and Type DB
LCP National Plastics, Inc. Plastic Type EB and Type DB Plastic Type B and Type C
Northern Pipe Products Plastic Type B, C, and D
OMNI Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Petroflex Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Flexible plastic Corrugated HDPE Duct
Phillips Products Co., Inc. Flexible plastic Driscon 3200 Phone Ducs Plastic Multiple plastic conduit (4, 6, & 9 Way) PLEXCO Flexible plastic PLEXCO Duct
PWPipe Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Pyramid Industries, Inc. Plastic Type EB and Type DM
Flexible plastic HDPE Conduit
Quail Plastics Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Queen City Plastics Plastic Type EB and Type DB
River City Plastics Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Sedco Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Southern Pipe, Inc. Plastic PVC Types EB, DB, and Sch. 40 Tamaqua Cable Products Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Tridyn Industries Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Vassallo Industries Plastic Type B and Type C
Wesflex Flexible plastic Flex-Con
2)
3) or equal
J. Fiberglass Conduit

1. Drawing Reference: Fiberglass

2. Construction:
a. Trade Standard Sizes
b. Meets NEMA TC 14
c. Complete system of joints and threaded steel conduit couplers

3. Manufacturers:
a. TVC Communication/Vikimatic Fiberglass Conduit
b. Champion Fiberglass
c. FRE Composite
d. or equal.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-11

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT FITTINGS AND PRODUCTS
A. General

1. UL 514B.

2. Listed in UL Electrical Construction Materials List.

B. Conduit Fittings, Insulated Throat Grounding Bushings

1. Description
a. Threaded for Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. b. UL Listed for use with copper conductors.
c. Thermoplastic insulated liner for 105 degrees Celsius. d. Body of malleable iron, zinc plated; or die cast zinc.

2. Manufacturer
a. Thomas & Betts (Steel City) BG-801 Series
b. O-Z/Gedney
c. or equal.

C. Watertight conduit entrance seals: Steel or cast malleable iron bodies and pressure clamps with PVC sleeve, neoprene sealing grommets and PVC coated steel pressure rings. Fittings shall be supplied with neoprene sealing rings between the body and PVC sleeve.

D. Watertight cable sealing bushings: One piece, compression molded sealing ring with PVC coated steel pressure disks, stainless steel sealing screws and zinc plated cast malleable iron locking collar.

E. Expansion fittings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a hot dip galvanized malleable iron or steel body and outside pressure bussing designed to allow a maximum of 4" conduit movement (2" in either direction). Furnish with external braid tinned copper bonding jumper. Unit shall be UL listed for wet or dry locations.

F. Expansion/deflection couplings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a neoprene sleeve with internal flexible tinned copper braid attached to bronze end couplings with stainless steel bands. Coupling shall accommodate .75-inch deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30-degree angular deflections. Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. Unit shall comply with UL467 and UL514.

1. Manufacturer:
a. OZ/Gedney Type DX
b. Steel City Type EDF
c. or equal.

G. Fire rated penetration seals:

1. UL classified.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-12

2. Conduit penetrations in fire rated separation shall be sealed with a UL classified assembly consisting of fill, void or cavity materials.

3. The fire rated sealant material shall be the product best suited for each type of penetration, and may be a caulk, putty, composite sheet or wrap/strip.

4. Penetrations of rated floors shall be sealed with an assembly having both F and T ratings at least equal to rating of the floor.

5. Penetrations of rated walls shall be sealed with an assembly having an F rating at least equal to the rating of the wall.

H. Standard products not herein specified:

1. Submit for review a listing of standard electrical conduit hardware and fittings not herein specified prior to use or installation, i.e. locknuts, bushings, etc.

2. Listing shall include manufacturers name, part numbers, and a written description of the item indicating type of material and construction.

3. Miscellaneous components shall be equal in quality, material, and construction to similar items herein specified.

I. Hazardous area fittings: UL listed for the application.

2.5 JUNCTION AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Junction and Device Boxes

1. Drawing References: As shown on Symbol Schedule

2. Construction:
a. Concealed/Flush Mounted:
b. One or two piece welded knockout boxes. Junction boxes with knockouts are not to be used for surface mounted locations or exposed locations. c. UL 514A, cadmium or zinc-coated 1.25 oz/sq. ft., if ferrous metal. d. Pressed sheet steel, for flush indoor locations.
e. UL 514C approved if non-metallic.
f. At hollow masonry, tile walls and plaster walls, provide with device rings as required.
g. Surface mounted:
1) Conform to the Junction and/or PullBox construction scheduled on the Plans. Where construction not otherwise scheduled or noted on the plans, conform to the following.:
h) Cast iron with threaded hubs and mounting lugs.
i) Gasketed cover with spring lid.
2) Concrete floor embedded:
j) Cast iron concrete pour boxes with screwed brass cover, unless otherwise noted. k) Cadmium plated screw cover attachment at least 6" on center.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-13 h. If size not otherwise noted, at least 4S (4" square) by 2-1/8" deep, or Code minimum size, whichever is larger.
1) Wherever 4S is indicated, contractor may at their option substitute 4-11/16" or 5” (5S) square boxes while maintaining the minimum depth required by these specifications and the drawings.
2) At recessed masonry wall installations, provide gangable masonry boxes.
i. Provide complete with approved type of connectors and required accessories, including attachment lugs or hangers. Provide raised device covers as required to accept scheduled device.

3. Approvals.
a. UL 514A

4. Manufacturers:
a. Interior, flush:
1) Steel City.
2) Bowers
3) Randl Industries, Inc. (5S Boxes).
4) or equal.
b. Interior, flush 5S Boxes
1) Randl, Inc. 5 Square Telecommunications Boxes
2) or equal.
c. Surface mount or exterior, exposed with cover of same construction. 1) Appleton
2) Pyle-National
3) or equal.
d. Other conditions:
1) Any meeting approvals and requirements.

1.1 TERMINAL BOXES, PULL CANS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Terminal Cabinets:

1. Drawing Reference: As Scheduled.

2. Construction:
a. General
1) Interior dimensions not less than those scheduled.
2) Door face to be not less than 95% of panel interior dimensions. 3) Provide with 3/4" fire retardant treated ply backboard where device termination scheduled/required within enclosure
b. Interior Application
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-14 c. Zinc Coated Sheet Steel, code gauge with standard concentric knockouts for conduit terminations.
d. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray baked enamel finish. e. Flush mounted enclosure Covers: Trim fitted, continuous hinged steel door, flush catch - lockable and keyed to match. Screw fastened doors not acceptable. f. Surface mount cabinets shall be furnished with screw cover trim, flush hinged door and shall not be less than 6 inches deep.
g. Exterior Applications
1) Door and lock arrangement as required by manufacturer to maintain specified rating.

3. Mounting:
a. Flush mount cabinets shall be furnished with concealed trim clamps and shall be not less than 4 inches deep or as scheduled, whichever is greater

4. Approvals
a. Interior Applications:
1) NEMA 250 Type 1, unless otherwise noted. Refer to plans and schedules. b. Exterior Applications:
1) NEMA 250 Type - As scheduled, not less than NEMA 3R. Provide NEMA 4 and 4X where scheduled or where required to match installation conditions.

5. Manufacturers, Metallic Enclosures:
a. B-Line Electrical Enclosures
b. Circle AW Products.
c. Hammond
d. Henessey.
e. Hoffman.
f. Myers Electric Products
g. Rittal.
h. or equal.

6. Manufacturers, Non-metallic Enclosures
a. Stahlin Enclosures
b. Cabletek
c. RMS Electronics, Inc
d. STI, Inc
e. Vynckier Inc.
f. Or equal.

2.6 WIREWAY
A. Lay-In Wireway

1. Drawing Reference: Gutter
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-15

2. Features/Functions/Construction
a. NEMA Type 1, unless otherwise noted.
b. ANSI 61 Gray polyester powder finish inside and outside. c. Screw fastened cover completely removable to provide complete access to interior.
d. 6"x6" cross-section minimum, size for 30% fill maximum

3. Approvals
a. UL 870
b. NEMA Type 1

4. Manufacturers
a. Hoffman Lay-In Type 1 Wireway
b. Square D
c. Circle AW
d. or equal

2.7 THROUGH PENETRATIONS SEALANT SYSTEMS
A. At a minimum, follow all manufacturer instructions. In case of discrepancy between manufacturer and contractor requirements, the more stringent shall apply. In the case of conflicting instructions, report any discrepancy to the City’s Representative in a timely fashion so as not to impact the construction timeline.

B. Application: Through Penetration Sealant Assemblies, Renenterable

1. Zero-maintenance firestop assemblies shall be used at all penetrations of rated partitions when the pathway on one or both sides of the wall, ceiling or floor is open, such as J-hooks or cable tray.

2. Communications cable tray or ladder rack shall not be continued through a fire- rated wall. Stop the tray or ladder rack, install multiple zero- maintenance firestop assemblies as needed, and continue the tray or ladder rack on the other side. Ensure grounding of the cable tray is continuous through the wall.

3. Electronic security system conduit sleeves through a single fire-rated wall shall not be used. For these applications, a zero-maintenance firestop assembly is required.

C. Application: Firestopping for Conduits and Other Closed Pathways

1. Firestopping is required for all fire-rated penetrations where a electronic security system conduit or other closed pathway penetrates one or more membranes of a fire-rated wall floor or ceiling

2. Required for all electronic security system outlets located on fire-rated walls.

Systems shall be UL CLIV tested
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-16 D. For all penetrations for electronic security system openings through fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings, install the same manufacturer’s product for that type of penetration throughout the project.

E. Coordinate with all other trades prior to installation:

1. To ensure that through penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

2. To ensure that sizing of openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems is appropriate.

F. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls, ceilings and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate firestop system that at least matches the fire rating of the structure. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire-rated structure).

1. Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped.

2. Through penetrations shall be sealed on both sides of the structure.

3. Electronic security system outlet back-boxes installed in fire-rated walls shall be completely enclosed in an appropriate firestopping assembly within the wall.

4. Conduit sleeves shall not be used for penetrating fire-rated floors, ceilings and walls. A zero-maintenance firestop assembly shall be used instead.

G. Verify the locations of all fire-rated walls prior to installation.

H. Firestopping assemblies must make a gas, smoke and water tight seal when activated in a fire.

I. Multiple cable bundles planned to penetrate a fire-rated wall and entering the same space within 10 feet of each other shall be consolidated in to a single penetration, unless one or both penetrations are membrane penetrations.

J. Ambient Conditions:

1. Do not install firestopping products when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside the limitations recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Do not install firestopping products when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

3. Maintain the minimum temperature before, during, and for a minimum 3 days after installation of materials.

K. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of the penetrating item (e.g., conduit) installation but prior to the covering or concealing of openings.

L. Before beginning installation:

1. Examine and clean the affected surfaces, as they shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellants, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-17

2. Provide masking and temporary covering to protect adjacent surfaces.

3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

M. After installation:

1. Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

2. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and soiling as work progresses.

3. Do not cover installed firestopping assemblies until inspected by the City’s Representative.

N. All firestop systems (including the cabling through them) and identification labels shall be installed prior to the City Representative’s above-ceiling inspection.

O. Labeling

1. At all firestop locations, install a permanent label near the firestop on each side of the wall, ceiling or floor. Labels shall be pre-printed and include:
a. Manufacturer of the firestop.
b. Name of product and UL System Number.
c. Name of installer and company name
d. Date of installation.
e. Rating of the wall/system (F and T ratings).

2. One location may have multiple labels (e.g. for a firestop in the annular space around a conduit penetration and a firestop within the conduit around the cables).

3. Labels shall not be painted over or otherwise obscured or defaced.

2.8 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. General

1. Supports to be sized to suit load and selected to match mounting conditions B. Manufacturers

1. Equal products by the following manufacturers will be considered providing that all features of the specified product are provided:
a. Concrete fasteners:
1) Phillips "Red-Head".
2) Remington.
3) Ramset.
4) Hilti
5) Simpson Strong-Tie
6) or equal.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-18 b. Concrete inserts and construction channel:
1) Unistrut Corp.
2) GS Metals "Globe Strut."
3) Thomas & Betts "Kindorf" Corp.
4) Or equal.
c. Conduit straps:
1) O-Z/Gedney.
2) Erico "Caddy" Fastening Products.
3) Thomas & Betts "Kindorf" Corp.
4) Or equal.
d. Beam Clamps
1) Cooper B-Line
2) SuperStrut
3) Unistrut
4) or equal
e. Aircraft Cable Sway Braces
1) Mason Industries
2) M.W. Sausse/Vibrex
3) Loos & Company, Inc.
4) or equal.

C. Concrete Fasteners

1. Provide expansion-shield type concrete anchors.

2. Provide powder driven concrete fasteners with washers. Obtain approval by City’s Representative prior to use.

D. Concrete Inserts

1. Provide pressed galvanized steel, concrete spot insert, with oval slot capable of accepting square or rectangular support nuts of ¼ inch to ½ inch diameter thread for rod support.

E. Aircraft cable sway braces

1. Steel rope sized to meet load.

F. Construction Channel:

1. Construction:
a. 1-5/8" square galvanized channel formed from U.S.S.G No. 12 or 0.109 inch cold formed steel with 17/32-inch diameter bolt holes, and 1-1/2 inch on center in the base of the channel.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-19 b. 10 foot sections.

2. All supporting materials by same manufacturer.

G. Beam Clamps

1. Malleable iron electro-galvanized steel beam clamps selected to match building structural steel members.

H. Conduit Straps

1. One hole strap, steel or malleable iron, with malleable iron clamp-back spacer for surface mounted wall and ceiling applications.
a. Use malleable strap with spacers for exterior and wet locations. b. Use steel strap without spacers for interior locations.

2. Steel channel conduit strap for support from construction channel.

3. Steel conduit hanger for pendant support with threaded rod

4. Steel wire conduit support strap for support from independent #12 gauge hanger wires.

I. Threaded rods, couplings, screws and nuts:

1. Electrolytically coated with zinc, 2 oz. zinc per square foot of surface, ASTM A123 or A153.

J. Miscellaneous Parts

1. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication; after cutting, de-burring and hole drilling. Coated with zinc, 2 oz. zinc per square foot of surface, ASTM A123 or A153.

K. Paint/Tape for Touch-up:

1. Zinc: CRC "Zinc-It", Glyptal, Enterprise Galvanizing “Galambra”, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. The City’s Representative reserves the right to request additional supports where in their sole opinion said supports are required. Any additional supports shall be installed at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of supporting device installation to verify conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-20

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads required for equipment installation with the work of the other trades
B. Lay out support devices to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance and to support the equipment loads.

C. Where shown on the Drawings or Specifications, install freestanding Electronic Safety and Security equipment on concrete pads.

3.4 CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. General: Install the following types of conduits and fittings in the locations listed, unless otherwise noted in the drawings:

1. Exterior, Exposed:
g. Type RSC for applications up to 8 feet AFF or to first pull box, whichever is first, applications subject to physical abuse or for applications greater than 4" diameter. h. EMT acceptable in all other applications not noted above up to 4" diameter, where used in conjunction with specified Raintight (compression) couplers.

2. Interior, Exposed, Wet and Damp Locations:
a. Type CRSC.

3. Interior, Hazardous Locations
a. Type RSC
b. Type IMC, where permitted by the CEC.

4. Interior, exposed or concealed, dry locations:
a. RSC, if subject to physical abuse.
b. EMT, if not subject to physical abuse.

5. Interior, concealed, damp locations, including in masonry walls. a. RSC

6. Embedded in Concrete
a. RSC or rigid non-metallic conduit.
b. PVC Type Schedule 40.

7. Transition from walls, floor boxes and monuments to open plan furniture systems:
a. Liquidtight

3.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions and conform thereto.

B. Distribution Pathway via EMT Raceway:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-21

1. EMT conduit is to be installed meeting the NEC handbook Article 348 Installation Specifications.

2. Provide escutcheon plates for all through wall conduit stubs.

3. All ends of conduits shall be cut square, reamed and fitted with insulated bushing.

4. All conduit which passes through fire walls shall be sealed with fire stop putty after all station wire has been installed.

3.6 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION – DEVICE BOXES
A. Conform to the more restrictive of NEMA OS 3-2002 and the following.

B. Provide backboxes at all Electronic Safety and Security systems devices. Installation of device plates directly to wall surface without use of a backbox, unless specifically directed on plans, is unacceptable.

C. The distance between pull boxes shall not exceed 150 feet or more than two 90 degree bends.

D. Align boxes plumb with floor and surrounding construction. At door frames, locate 4" from frame. Verify placement with City’s Representative details to ensure that box clears all trim, etc.

E. Support and fasten boxes securely. At stud walls use rigid bar hangers, attached to hanger with stud and nut.

F. At existing locations, provide cutting, patching and finishing as required to maintain or restore finishes so that resulting installation is integrated into the Architectural decor of the particular location.

G. Mounting Height: the mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box is defined as the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate.

H. Mount outlet boxes with the long axis vertical. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal.

I. Install wiring jacks and outlet devices only in boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris.

J. Install wiring jacks and outlet devices after wiring work is complete.

3.7 TERMINAL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES
A. General

1. Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of cabinets and enclosures installation to verify conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-22 B. Set cabinets and enclosures plumb and symmetrical with building lines. Furnish and install all construction channel bolts, angles, etc. required to mount all equipment furnished under this Section of the Specifications.

C. Cabinets and enclosures shall be anchored and braced to withstand seismic forces calculated in accordance with standards referenced in Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electronic Safety and Security Systems.

D. "Train" interior wiring, bundle and clamp using specified plastic wire wraps. Separate power and signal wiring.

E. Replace doors or trim exhibiting dents, bends, warps or poor fit that may impede ready access, security or integrity.

F. Terminate conduit in cabinet with lock nut and grounding bushing.

G. Cleaning

1. Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.

2. Vacuum clean cabinet on completion of installation.

3.8 SUPPORT
A. Provide supports for raceways as specified in this Section.

B. All raceways installed in exposed dry locations shall be grouped in a like arrangement and supported by means of conduit straps, wall brackets or trapeze hangers in accordance with Code and the requirements of this Section. Fasten all hangers from the building structural system.

C. Provide supports and mounting attachments per the most restrictive of Code and the following Install no more than one coupling or device between supports.

Raceway Size
(inches)
No of
cables in
run
Location Support Spacing (feet)

RSC EMT
Horizontal Runs
½, 3/4 1-2 Flat Ceiling Wall Runs 5 5
½, 3/4 1-2 Where Access Limited To Building Structure 7 7 ½, 3/4 3≥ Any Location 7 7
1≥ 1-2 Flat Ceiling Or Wall 6 6
1≥ 1-2 Where Access Limited To Building Structure 10 10 1≥ 3≥ Any Locations 10 10
ANY ANY Concealed 10 10
Vertical Runs
½, 3/4 ANY Exposed 7 7
1, 1-1/4 ANY Exposed 8 8
1-1/2≥ ANY Exposed 10 10
D. The City’s Representative reserves the right to request additional supports where in their sole opinion said supports are required. Any additional supports shall be installed at no additional cost to the City.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-23

3.9 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. General

1. Raceway runs are shown schematically – Contractor to provide design and implementation of complete pathway system. Install concealed unless specifically shown otherwise. Supports, pull boxes, junction boxes and similar generally not indicated. Provide where designated in addition to those required by the Contractor’s design.
a. All raceway in new construction shall be run concealed, unless exposed construction is called for on the plans. Bring to the City Representatives any field conditions requiring exposed electronic security systems pathway and receive direction prior to proceeding.
1) Conduit entries to device backboxes shall be made from the rear or side where concealed by architectural finish materials and shall not be exposed to public view and/or tampering.
b. Install exposed conduit and raceway parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow the surface contours.

Level and square conduit and raceway runs.
c. Raceway runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous between all each equipment rack and utility demarcation point, receptacle and/or surface raceway strip, as applies.
d. Each conduit shall enter and be securely connected to a cabinet, junction box, pull box, or outlet by means of a locknut on the outside and a bushing on the inside or by means of a liquid-tight, threaded, self- locking, cold-weld type wedge adapter.
e. Conduit connections to enclosures will not interfere with components inside enclosure such as batteries, circuit boards, locking mechanisms etc.
f. Conduit to be connected to enclosures via knockouts from factory.

Additional penetrations are not permitted.
g. Bends
1) All bends or elbows shall have a minimum radius as follows:

Conduit Size (Inches) Min. Radius (Inches)
3/4 8
1 12
1-1/4 18
2 24
2-1/2 24
3 30
3-1/2 30
4 30
5 36
6 42
2) Use factory elbows or machine bends for conduit bends 1-1/4" and larger.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-24 h. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced.

Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel.
i. Install at least one (1) 3/8", 200 pound strength nylon pull cord in all empty raceways.
j. Raceways crossing building expansion joints or in straight runs exceeding 100 feet shall be provided with UL listed expansion fittings. k. Install conduit seals and drains to prevent accumulated moisture in conduits from entering Electronic Safety and Security Systems enclosures.

2. Do not install conduit in concrete slabs unless specifically directed by City’s Representative. Embedded conduits in concrete slab walls, and columns shall be installed in center third between upper and lower layers of reinforcing steel as directed by the City’s Representative. Space conduits 8" on center except at cabinet locations where slab thickness shall be increased as directed by the City’s Representative.

3. All conduits to be kept 12" away from steam or hot water lines. Install horizontal conduit and raceway runs below water and steam piping.

4. Conduit dropping down to equipment shall be as straight as possible without any offsets, parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings and other building features.

5. Conduit installed on any equipment shall be run symmetrical with the equipment and in such a manner as to:
a. not to be exposed to damage;
b. not interfere with access to components of the equipment that will interfere with maintenance operation or;
c. not to be in a manner that the City’s Representative deems detrimental to its operation.

6. Whenever an installation such as that listed occurs, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes at no additional cost to the City.

7. All cut ends of conduit, scratches, tool marks, etc. on any metallic raceway installed in the ground or on the exterior of the building shall be treated with two coats of specified Touch Up Paint/Tape.

8. Exposed conduit and metallic surface raceway installed in finished spaces shall be painted to match surrounding surfaces using paint and methods directed by the City’s Representative.

9. All raceways stubbing up into equipment or racks shall be sealed. Raceways with conductors shall be plugged with duct-seal. Spare raceways shall be capped. Prevent foreign matter from entering conduit and raceway; use temporary closure protection. Replace conduits containing concrete, varnish or other foreign material.

10. Complete installation of conduit and raceway runs before starting installation of cables/wires within conduit and raceway.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-25

11. Use specified conduit and raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated conduit and raceway and suitable for the use and location. Join and terminate conduit and raceway with fittings designed and approved for the purpose of the conduit and raceway system and make up tight.

12. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway and coupling square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

13. Horizontal conduit or EMT runs, where required and permitted, shall be installed as close to ceiling or ceiling beams as practical.

14. Conduit and EMT connected to wall outlets shall be run in such a manner that they will not cross water, steam or waste pipes or radiator branches.

15. Conduit and EMT shall not be run through beams, purlins or columns except where permission is granted by City’s Representative in writing.

16. Bond installed metallic raceway in accordance with the requirements of the CEC.

3.10 RACEWAY FOR ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS A. Refer to general requirements herein above.

B. Below accessible ceiling line, access control and intrusion detection systems shall be installed in entirely in raceway. Size pathway for 30% fill maximum, including:

1. Rough-in for the field devices as detailed and scheduled on the plans.

2. Surface mounted device boxes, where called for in retrofit conditions, including those intended to mount card readers, local alarm sounders and cameras, to be penetrated from the rear (through the backing construction assembly) to prevent exposing the device to tampering. Surface mount device boxes should be free of knockouts at the sides of the box exposed to public access/view.

3. Pull cabinets located at regular intervals in the building, sized to accommodate the access control and intrusion detection cabling. Locate pull cans outside of public view.
a. Size raceway between pull cabinets to accommodate fill of field devices. b. Coordinate backbox size to ensure that pathway connections to enclosures shall not interfere with components installed inside enclosure including batteries, circuit boards, locking mechanisms, etc. Undersized enclosures exhibiting interference with installed components to be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the City.
c. Pathway including flexible metal and armored cable shall terminate in the sensor or device enclosure.
d. Ends of conduit shall be fitted with insulated bushings. Provide continuous complete non-flexible pathways, from device, including pull boxes for all field devices. Leaving exposed conductors at ends of conduits external to sensors and devices not acceptable except above accessible ceiling line.

4. Gutter at backboard indicated security electronics termination points sized for 30% fill maximum, to terminate the raceway arriving from the pull cabinets and directly from the field devices pathway systems.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-26

5. Mounting field devices to the cover of surface mounted junction boxes is unacceptable and will be replaced at no cost to the City.

C. Steel wireway/gutter and terminal cabinets to be provided at backboards of indicated termination rooms to full enclose the electronic security systems access control and alarm systems wiring, terminal devices, TB15's and terminal blocks used to terminate the field wiring installed under the work of this contract as described elsewhere herein.

3.11 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
A. Use rigid steel conduit only.

B. Install UL listed sealing fittings that prevent passage of explosive vapors in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank coverplate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

C. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations.

3.12 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUIT
A. General

1. Existing conduit is to be used as a pathway only where so shown on the drawings.

2. Prior to beginning work involving the use of an existing conduit, the Contractor shall consult with the City’s Representative in order to establish whether or not the conduit contains active service.

3. If no active service exists within the conduit, all cable is to be removed, and work is to proceed.

4. If active service does exist within the conduit and it has been determined that service needs to be disrupted, then work on that conduit shall not proceed until a schedule of service outage has been established by City’s Representative. Once given direction to proceed, the Contractor shall within the time period of one (1) working day; remove the old cable, install, terminate and test the new cables, and notify the City’s Representative the work using the specific conduit has been completed. The City’s Representative shall be responsible for the disconnection and reconnecting of the active service cross-connects within the terminal closet(s).

B. Conduit preparation procedure:

1. Remove existing wires and cables (if any).

2. Run a mandrel ½" smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit receiving new wires and cables.

3. If the specified size mandrel will not pass through the existing conduit, start with a smaller size mandrel and increase mandrel size until the specified sized mandrel will pass.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-27

4. Run a wire brush and clean rag with an outside diameter 1/8" larger than the inside of the conduit through the conduit receiving new wires and cables.

5. Repeat above until conduit is clean and materials detrimental to the wire and cables to be installed no longer exit conduit with the clean rag.

3.13 WIREWAY INSTALLATION
A. Install complete wireway system at electronic security systems backboards, including track, cover plate, device boxes, inside and outside elbows, splice plates, T’s, transitions and extension rings and end caps as required.

B. Any existing surface raceway and/or exposed cabling along the indicated pathway of the raceway to be installed shall be removed prior to the installation of the new raceway. If the existing cabling contains active service, then Contractor shall consult with the City’s Representative as to how best maintain the existing service before proceeding with the work.

C. Provide and install the proper factory fabricated corners, support clips, end connectors, etc. as required.

D. Corners and joints are to be cut neatly and finished using connector components of specified system. Where components are not available using specified system, to meet requirements of drawings, provide cleanly mitered joints, EMT and/or surface backboxes specified elsewhere herein.

E. All installed surface raceway shall be inspected for marks, scratches, gaps between sections or improper fitting of connector parts. All such damage shall be repaired to the City’s Representatives satisfaction, or the raceway shall be removed and replaced.

F. Remove sharp corners and edges prior to installation of cable.

G. Attachment of raceway to walls, floors, and partitions:

1. Attach raceway to the supporting surface with mechanical fasteners applied to building structure per the most restrictive of manufacturer's directions, Code, or these provisions.

2. All surface raceway shall be installed so that its edges are parallel to the vertical or horizontal edge of the surface on which they are mounted. All surface raceway, found not to be installed in this manner, shall be removed and re- installed correctly.

3. Surface raceway shall be secured at 2’-0” intervals (2 spaced screws for 2" and wider raceways) with wood screws into wooden framing or self drilling wall anchors (ITWBildex “Heavy Duty E-Z Toggle”, no known equal) into sheetrock or plastic inserts with pre-assembled drive screw for concrete (ITT-HOLUB “HI- DRIVE” nail anchors, no known equal) Powder (explosive charge) driven anchors are not acceptable. The use of adhesives as the sole means for fastening to any surface is not allowed.

4. Screws used in fastening surface raceway shall be no less than 3/4" in length.

5. The proper support clips, as called for by the manufacturer, for securing surface raceway to walls or floors are to be used per the manufacturer's instructions.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-28

3.14 PENETRATIONS
A. Gypsum Wall Board Penetrations: Provide circular penetrations maximum 1/8" inch larger than outer diameter of conduit being used. On both sides of the wall fill space between conduit and wall with joint compound, depth to match gypsum board thickness.

B. As specified elsewhere herein, install UL listed fire-stop system whenever a raceway penetrates a firewall in conformance with the manufacturer’s directions, the published systems assembly requirements, CBC Section 709 and 710 and CEC 300-21, whichever is the most restrictive. At cable tray penetrations, provide pillow type removable fire stop per CBC Section 709 and 710, the published systems assembly requirements and the manufacturer’s directions, whichever is the most restrictive.

C. All Electronic Safety and Security systems conduit openings in walls and floors are the responsibility of the Contractor. Install sleeves shown on the drawings when the concrete is poured. Any openings required after the concrete has set maybe core drilled.

3.15 THROUGH PENETRATIONS SEALANT SYSTEMS
A. At a minimum, follow all manufacturer instructions. In case of discrepancy between manufacturer and contractor requirements, the more stringent shall apply. In the case of conflicting instructions, report any discrepancy to the City’s Representative in a timely fashion so as not to impact the construction timeline.

B. Application: Through Penetration Sealant Assemblies, Renenterable

1. Zero-maintenance firestop assemblies shall be used when the pathway on one or both sides of the wall, ceiling or floor is open, such as J-hooks or cable tray.

2. Communications cable tray or ladder rack shall not be continued through a fire- rated wall. Stop the tray or ladder rack, install multiple zero- maintenance firestop assemblies as needed, and continue the tray or ladder rack on the other side. Ensure grounding of the cable tray is continuous through the wall.

3. Electronic security system conduit sleeves through a single fire-rated wall shall not be used. For these applications, a zero-maintenance firestop assembly is required.

C. Application: Firestopping for Conduits and Other Closed Pathways

1. Firestopping is required for all fire-rated penetrations where a electronic security system conduit or other closed pathway penetrates one or more membranes of a fire-rated wall floor or ceiling

2. Required for all teleelectronic security system outlets located on fire-rated walls.

Systems shall be UL CLIV tested
D. For all penetrations for electronic security system openings through fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings, install the same manufacturer’s product for that type of penetration throughout the project.

E. Coordinate with all other trades prior to installation:

1. To ensure that through penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-29

2. To ensure that sizing of openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems is appropriate.

F. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls, ceilings and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate firestop system that at least matches the fire rating of the structure. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire-rated structure).

1. Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped.

2. Through penetrations shall be sealed on both sides of the structure.

3. Electronic security system outlet back-boxes installed in fire-rated walls shall be completely enclosed in an appropriate firestopping assembly within the wall.

4. Conduit sleeves shall not be used for penetrating fire-rated floors, ceilings and walls. A zero-maintenance firestop assembly shall be used instead.

G. Verify the locations of all fire-rated walls prior to installation.

H. Firestopping assemblies must make a gas, smoke and water tight seal when activated in a fire.

I. Multiple cable bundles planned to penetrate a fire-rated wall and entering the same space within 10 feet of each other shall be consolidated in to a single penetration, unless one or both penetrations are membrane penetrations.

J. Ambient Conditions:

1. Do not install firestopping products when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside the limitations recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Do not install firestopping products when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

3. Maintain the minimum temperature before, during, and for a minimum 3 days after installation of materials.

K. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of the penetrating item (e.g., conduit) installation but prior to the covering or concealing of openings.

L. Before beginning installation:

1. Examine and clean the affected surfaces, as they shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellants, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion.

2. Provide masking and temporary covering to protect adjacent surfaces.

3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

M. After installation:

1. Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-30

2. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and soiling as work progresses.

3. Do not cover installed firestopping assemblies until inspected by the City’s Representative.

N. All firestop systems (including the cabling through them) and identification labels shall be installed prior to the City Representative’s above-ceiling inspection.

O. Labeling

1. At all firestop locations, install a permanent label near the firestop on each side of the wall, ceiling or floor. Labels shall be pre-printed and include:
a. Manufacturer of the firestop.
b. Name of product and UL System Number.
c. Name of installer and company name
d. Date of installation.
e. Rating of the wall/system (F and T ratings).

2. One location may have multiple labels (e.g. for a firestop in the annular space around a conduit penetration and a firestop within the conduit around the cables).

3. Labels shall not be painted over or otherwise obscured or defaced.

3.16 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install supporting devices as noted throughout the Electronic Safety and Security Systems work.

B. Electronic Safety and Security device and conduit supports shall be independent of all other system supports that are not structural elements of the building, unless otherwise noted.

C. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using powder actuated tools, precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.

D. Use powder actuated tools, self-drilling anchors, expansion anchor, or preset inserts on concrete surfaces.

E. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction.

F. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, conduit, or acoustical ceiling suspension wires.

G. Do not drill structural steel members unless first approved in writing by the City’s Representative.

H. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-31 I. Install surface-mounted cabinets with minimum of four anchors. Provide additional support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to adequately support cabinets and panels.

J. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.

3.17 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.18 WOOD SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 0528-32 Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 1
SECTION 28 1300 - ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. Section includes (but is not necessarily limited to) provision of a complete access control system, including but not limited to:

1. Access Control and Alarm System.
a. Work of this Project provides a new access control system for the Project using Sacramento Public Library standard Software House C-Cure field panels and associates the installed system with the existing Sacramento Public Library’sSoftware House C-Cure access control database to permit access to the site to staff enrolled in the database and authorized to enter.
b. The Access Control and Alarm System (ACAS) shall include all intelligent field advanced processing controller, communication devices, card readers, combination card readers/keypads, access cards, I/O boards, power supplies, conduit, raceways, enclosures, mounting hardware, and all other equipment as specified herein. All material shall be the manufacturer’s standard catalog products.
c. Scope of work includes provision of ACAS panels, readers and field devices.
d. Input and output points.
1) As described in the narrative, work of this project installs new Card Readers at selected locations.
2) Work of this project interfaces the ACAS to field devices installed under the work of this Section:
a) Door position switches.
b) Local door alarms
c) Electric locks and electric strikes
d) Request to exit devices, including:
(1) PIR based REX devices
(2) Door hardware with integral REX button
functionality.
e) Gate position switches
3) Work of this project interfaces to devices installed under the work of other Sections:
a) Power Door Operators and their controls
b) Intelligent gate controllers
c) Elevator controls

2. Intrusion Detection System
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 2
a. Provide a separate commercial burglar alarm system consisting of intrusion detection panel and field devices, connected to the City / Sacramento Public Library selected Central Station Alarm provider using IP or dialup connection as selected by the City / Sacramento Public Library for escalation if required.

B. Related Work in Other Sections:

1. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

2. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware

3. Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security

4. Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

5. Section 28 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding For Electronic Safety And Security

6. Section 28 05 28 – Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security C. Related Work by Others

1. By Sacramento Public Library
a. Ethernet Network switches connected to structured cabling installed at the Telecommunications Rooms.
b. Existing Microsoft Windows ActiveDirectory directory services for use in assign access groups and users by the Contractor. Refer to the minimum functional directory services capabilities provided by the access control system provided under the work of this Section. c. IBM PC type workstations running Windows 10 or later to be used in monitoring and configuring the system installed by the work of this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the requirements of Section 01 33 23 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples and Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:

1. Conform to Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electronic Safety and Security.

2. The manufacturers of all hardware and software components employed in the system shall be established vendors to the access control/security monitoring industry for no less than five (5) years.

3. The security system integrator shall have been regularly engaged in the installation and maintenance of integrated access control systems similar in size and scope to that outlined herein for a period of no less than five (5) years.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 3

4. The security system integrator shall supply information attesting to the fact that their firm is an authorized product dealer for the system proposed.

5. The security system integrator shall supply information attesting to the fact that their installation and service technicians are competent factory trained personnel capable of maintaining the system and providing reasonable service time.

6. The security system integrator shall provide a minimum of three (3) references whose systems are of similar complexity and have been installed and maintained by the security system integrator in the last five (5) years.

7. There shall be a local representative and factory authorized local service organization that shall carry a complete stock of parts and provide maintenance for these systems. Local shall be defined as an area in a 50 mile radius of installed location
B. Standards Agencies. Additionally, conform to the applicable portions of the following standards defined in 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of Terms: The following definitions and conditions apply to each of the respective parameters and the measurements of those parameters, unless specifically stated otherwise:

1. ACAS. Access Control and Alarm Systems. The integrated system installed by the work of this Contract comprising the access control system, intrusion detection system and panic/duress alarms, including both central processing hardware and the remote field devices.

2. Access Group: A logical group of card readers (terminals) which may be connected to one or more controllers and that represent a collection of readers for which a particular cardholder may have access privileges.

3. Access Mode: The mode of operation in which the ACAS shall only annunciate tamper and trouble conditions at a monitored point. Alarm conditions shall not be annunciated in this mode. This is referred to as “alarm shunting.”

4. Acknowledge: The action taken by an ACAS operator to indicate that he/she is aware of a specific alarm or tamper state.

5. Advisory: A message provided by the ACAS to the operator to inform him/her of a condition as reported by the ACAS.

6. Active mode: That in which some type of signal is continuously sent across the link, resulting in simple link breaks being readily detected.

7. Alarm: A change of state as detected by the ACAS indicating that it has detected a condition that its sensors were designed to identify.

8. Armed. State of operating in a secure mode. For a given device, when in armed condition the failure of the device to operate in a prescribed manner associated with secure state operations causes an alarm state to be generated at the central alarm monitoring panel or screen, and if a local sounder/door alarm is shown, causes sounder to activate.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 4

9. Audit Trail: A sequential record of system activity used to reconstruct and review a series of system events.

10. Badge: The physical card, carried by the cardholder used to gain access through a portal by presentation to a card reader.

11. Boolean: An expression that results in a value of either TRUE or FALSE.

12. Cardholder: A person who is a member of the cardholder database who may have been issued a valid badge.

13. Card Reader: A device usually located at access points, designed to decode the information contained on or within a badge for the purposes of making an access decision or for identity verification.

14. Clear: The action taken by an ACAS operator to remove an alarm from the alarms queue after it has been acknowledged and, if required, responded to.

15. Disable: A system command that intentionally places a device or system out of service, typically for maintenance.

16. Download: Refers to the transfer of system configuration information from the server to the memory of the controllers. This includes information such as badge records and access rights.

17. Dry Contact: A voltage free electrical contact.

18. DGP. Data Gathering Panel. Intelligent access control and alarm systems panel connected to the ACAS network and to card readers, access control and intrusion detection field devices as specified elsewhere in this Section.

19. Element: As used in this section means a constituent part of a complex signal such as an AC or DC voltage or current, AC phase, or frequency duration.

20. Elevator/Cabinet Control: Elevators and cabinets are readers associated with a set of output points and an optional set of input points. The field controller interfaces with elevators and cabinets using output points to enable car-call buttons or unlock cabinet doors and input points to monitor their status. The controller may grant access to a floor or cabinet door when a badge is presented at a reader installed in the elevator cab. The elevator/cabinet access control allows the operator to assign cardholder access to various elevators, floors, cabinets, and doors in a facility using access group definition.

21. Events: Events are sequences of system commands or actions that may be activated at a pre-defined time or on an as-needed basis. Events can be activated and deactivated either manually or automatically.

22. Facility Code: A coded number, in addition to the individual card number stored within each card key, which uniquely identifies the facility at which the card is valid. This feature prevents cards from one facility being used at another facility with a similar access control system.

23. Fail-safe: For system electronics, the capability to monitor system functions and report an alarm when a failure is detected in a critical system function. For door hardware, hardware which on loss of electrical power ceases to restrict movement through the affected door opening. Contrast with fail-secure.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 5

24. Fail-secure: For door hardware, hardware which on loss of electrical power continues to restrict movement through the affected door opening from the unsecure side to the secure side. Contrast with fail-safe.

25. Guard Tour: A sequence of transactions that, when performed within a specified time frame, ensures that your facility is being properly monitored by security personnel. The main purpose of a tour is to confirm and record that an area has been physically visited. It provides real time monitoring of guard activities - reporting if a guard arrives early or late to designated tour stations. Guard Tour stations can either be readers or input points. Tours can be selected randomly or may be specified at regular time intervals.

26. Input Point: Electrical contacts that open or close to inform the system of a change of state.

27. Intruder: An animate object at least 1220 mm 48 inches in height, 34 kg 75 pounds in weight and 4 cubic feet in volume, moving through the protected zones or portals at a velocity of 30 to 3000 mm 0.1 to 10 feet per second.

28. Line Supervision: The process of monitoring an electrical circuit via electrical and software systems to verify the electrical integrity of the supervised circuit.

29. Loop: A number of terminals connected in series in a continuous circuit that starts and ends at the controller.

30. Monitoring: The process of maintaining a vigilant watch over a system element or point and taking appropriate action in response to system activity.

31. Offline: A condition in which a controller is not in communication with the server. In the offline mode, the controller continues to make access decisions and process alarms according to the information stored at its local database.

32. Output Point: Control external devices such as signals, relays, LEDs, control modules, etc.

33. Panel: See Controller.

34. Password: A combination of numbers and/or letters unique to each ACAS operator.

35. Polling: Terminals are interrogated at regular intervals by the controller to establish and verify communications with other equipment and exchange data if necessary.

36. Port: A connection that provides a means of communication between devices.

37. Priority: The relative importance of system events.

38. Reset: A command or feedback signal that indicates that a monitored point has returned to its normal state having previously been at the alarm or trouble state.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 6

39. REX. Request to Exit. With a magnetic lock, a photo-optical device that breaks the current to the lock on detecting a person approaching from the secure side as required by Code and NFPA 101 while signaling the ACAS panel that the exit detected by the door switch was preceded by an approach to the door from the secure side. With non-magnetic locks, a REX performs the same signaling function for the ACAS panel, but no alteration of the lock power is required as the electric lock is intrinsically safe. This functionality is provided by either a infrared photo-optical REX devices or, for small spaces, door hardware with integral micro-switches triggered by mechanical motion to provide equivalent notification to the ACAS panel that the door position switch signal was preceded by an action by a person operating the door hardware located on the secure side of the opening.

40. Secure Mode: The normal state of an alarm input point. A change of state in this mode shall indicate an alarm, or that it has transferred to the trouble or tamper state.

41. Secured Area: A physical location within the facility to which one or more card readers control access.

42. Secure Side. With respect to a door, the side on which the assets to be protected lie. At exterior doors, this is generally the interior face. Provide to match Contractor’s architectural plans, including the exiting plan, the door hardware schedules and specifications to confirm which face is the Secure Side.

43. Sensor zone: A geographic position for which an intrusion must be identified and displayed and may be the combination of multiple detection devices.

44. Server: The main computer in the system. The server runs the ACAS software, stores database information, and communicates with the field controllers and operator workstation terminals.

45. Service: The process that performs specific system functions and operates in the background without user intervention.

46. Soft Alarm: Soft alarms and their addresses are created by the system during installation rather than hardwired to an actual input point.

47. Tamper: A condition within the circuitry of a monitored point, which indicates that the electrical integrity of that sensing circuit has been compromised.

48. Terminal: Terminals provide additional reader interfaces, input points or output points to the ACAS.

49. Time Zone: A user-defined period made up of days of the week and hours of the day during which events such as Valid Card Grants and Input/Output linking events may occur.

50. Transaction: Indicate some form of system activity. It may include items such as access requests and general system messages.

51. Trouble: A condition within the circuitry of a monitored point, which indicates that an equipment malfunction, single break, single fault and/or a wire-to-wire short exists.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 7

52. Unsecure Side. With respect to a door, the exposed side opposite the side on which the assets to be protected lie. At exterior doors, this is generally the exterior face.

53. User-Definable: An attribute of an ACAS function, which may be easily tailored by an operator without extensive computer programming knowledge or experience.

54. Workstation: A personal computer connected to the main Access Control and Alarm System (ACAS) server computer via local area network connections for the purpose of operating the system and responding to alarms.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ACAS Quality Assurance

1. The ACAS shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for UL 294 for Access Control System Units.

B. Intrusion Detection Quality Assurance

1. The ACAS shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for UL 1076 for Proprietary Alarm Units
C. Installing Contractor Qualifications

1. Conform with the requirements of Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security and Part 1 of this Section.

1.6 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER
A. System Power and Functionality during Loss of Power

1. Power supply for door locks shall be provided by the work of this Section.

2. Power supply shall be 120-volts, 60 Hz supplied from the building’s emergency power system. DC power for all system supervisory and control functions shall be provided by the control panel’s power supply.

3. The system shall be electrically supervised against power loss, short and open wiring faults in the detection and alarm circuits. A malfunction shall cause the system to function as follows:
a. Common trouble will be annunciated at the local panel as well as the alarm receiver the Sacramento Public Library’s designated central station receiver

4. Provide UPS and supplemental battery subsystems sufficient to sustain system operations of the components indicated:
a. 4 hours for DGP.
b. 4 hours for field devices, including operation of electric door hardware and monitoring functions.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 8

1.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. General Description - Access Control and Alarms Processing System

1. The manufacturer of the proposed system shall have produced access control products for at least 20 years and shall be ISO 9001 certified.

2. The manufacturer shall be ISO 140001 certified indicating their commitment to conserve energy and reduce waste.

3. The Security Management System shall operate using a Microsoft SQL Server database and shall support Microsft SQLServer 2012 and SQLServer 2014

4. The Security Management System shall be developed using the Microsoft Visual Studio development environment

5. The System shall support virtualization using VMWare

6. The System shall support both Microsoft Clustering and NEC Clustering software for resilience

7. The manufacturer shall be a Microsoft Certified Gold Partner and the system shall meet Microsoft requirements for “Designed for Windows 8”.

8. The system shall carry FIPS-140-2 certification of appropriate parts of its communication encryption infrastructure, and the manufacturer shall provide the NIST certificate number confirming certification. Systems that do not carry FIPS-140-2 certification shall not be acceptable.

9. The manufacturer shall supply, immediately upon request, a VPAT statement showing support for Section 508.

10. The manufacturer of the proposed system shall require resellers to pass a formal training program prior to being certified as authorized to sell and install the system. Such certification shall require annual re-qualification. The system integrator proposing the system shall be in possession of such a certification.

11. The Security Management System client and server software shall be used in conjunction with intelligent controllers to provide a distributed access control and alarms monitoring system. In the event of a communications failure between the host server and the field controllers, the controllers shall continue to make local access control decisions and save all transactions in memory until communications are restored. At that time the controller shall upload all stored transactions to the server.

B. Access Control and Alarm System - General Requirements:

1. UL Listed 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Unit.
a. Designed by manufacturer to function as an Intrusion Detection System in addition to as an Access Control System.
b. Where ACAS system is not listed per UL 1076, and intrusion detection functionality is required by the program, Contractor to provide an independent listed 1076 alarm panel configured to report tampers, motion, glassbreaks, faults and similar events to the existing campus intrusion detection headend.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 9

2. Provide for a separate supervised circuit to each monitored device.

3. Monitor circuits at local ACAS Data Gathering Panels. Indicate at least:
a. Alarm on contact state change.
b. Trouble on short or open.

C. Door Opening Operations. Assumes doors are in armed condition.

1. Doors with Card Reader on One Side
a. Presentation of valid card at unsecure side:
1) Performs real-time lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to door opening, day of week and time of day.
2) Provides positive success visual feedback - green light or similar - to card holder
3) Permits cardholder to operate door.
4) Logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number, door number and timestamp
5) Shunts alarm generation for door open status for Sacramento Public Library selected variable period (adjustable over a range of at least 10 seconds to 1 minute adjustable through ACAS software).
6) If double door opening, permits operation of second leaf during the Sacramento Public Library selected variable period without generating alarm.
b. Presentation of invalid or unreadable card at unsecure side of door:
1) performs real-time lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to door opening, day of week and time of day.
2) provides positive failed visual feedback - red light or similar - to card holder and denies operation of door.
3) logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number (if readable), door number and timestamp
c. Approach to door opening from secure side
1) Doors equipped with Request to Exit: If occupant breaks approach beam from side farthest from door first, followed by beams closer to door, shunts generation of alarm on door operation for Construction Administrator selected variable period as for Card Readers above.
2) Doors equipped with Request to Exit equivalent in handle/crash bar: If occupant signals intent to exit from secure side by mechanically operating door hardware, shunts generation of alarm on door operation for Sacramento Public Library selected variable period as for Card Readers above.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 10
3) Doors equipped with Release Button: On operating Release Button, shunts generation of alarm on door operation for Sacramento Public Library selected variable period as for Card Readers above.
4) If double door opening, permits operation of second leaf during the Sacramento Public Library selected variable period without generating alarm.

2. Doors with Card Readers on both sides, one side is secure, one side is unsecure. a. Operation, General
1) Unless otherwise indicated, doors with dual card readers have an unsecure and secure side. A CR symbol appears on the unsecure side; a CRS symbol appears on the secure side. Neither magnetic locks nor delayed egress systems are to be installed. A valid card is necessary to operate the door from the unsecure side as for doors with single card readers
2) A valid card is necessary to shunt the door alarm when operating the door from the secure side. Failure to present a valid card does not prevent door from operating.
b. Presentation of valid card at unsecure side:
1) performs realtime lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to door opening, day of week and time of day.
2) provides positive success visual feedback - green light or similar - to card holder
3) permits cardholder to operate door.
4) logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number, door number and timestamp
5) shunts alarm generation for door open status for Sacramento Public Library selected variable period (adjustable over a range of at least 10 seconds to 1 minute).
6) If double door opening, permits operation of second leaf during the Sacramento Public Library selected variable period without generating alarm.
c. Presentation of invalid or unreadable card at either side of door:
1) performs real-time lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to door opening, day of week and time of day.
2) provides positive failed visual feedback - red light or similar - to card holder and, at unsecure side, denies operation of door 3) logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number (if readable), door number and timestamp
d. Presentation of valid card at secure side.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 11
1) performs realtime lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to door opening, day of week and time of day.
2) provides positive success visual feedback - green light or similar - to card holder
3) logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number, door number and timestamp
4) shunts alarm generation for door open status for Sacramento Public Library selected variable period (adjustable over a range of at least 10 seconds to 1 minute).
5) If double door opening, permits operation of second leaf during the Sacramento Public Library selected variable period without generating alarm.

3. Doors with Card Readers on both sides, both sides unsecure. a. Operation, General
1) Where indicated by CR symbols on both sides of the door, the door opening to require a valid card to operate the door from either side.
2) Such door configurations shall not be installed where the door is part of an emergency egress path of travel.
b. Presentation of a valid card at either side:
1) performs realtime lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to door opening, day of week and time of day.
2) provides positive success visual feedback - green light or similar - to card holder
3) permits cardholder to operate door.
4) logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number, door number and timestamp
5) shunts alarm generation for door open status for Sacramento Public Library selected variable period (adjustable over a range of at least 10 seconds to 1 minute).
6) If double door opening, permits operation of second leaf during the Sacramento Public Library selected variable period without generating alarm.
c. Presentation of invalid or unreadable card at either side of door:
1) performs real-time lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to door opening, day of week and time of day.
2) provides positive failed visual feedback - red light or similar - to card holder and denies operation of door
3) logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number (if readable), door number and timestamp
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 12

4. Doors left open ("propped open") beyond the designated period generate an alarm at the central control panel indicating door and condition. If a local door alarm is shown in the vicinity of the door, causes the local door alarm to sound.

Local alarms for door prop should provide an intermittent tone 30 seconds before going into alarm and triggering a solid tone upon alarm. Local door alarm can be cleared either from the access control system control screen or locally using designated key. Use of a key to silence the LA sounding, but shall not interrupt processing of other ACAS events associated with event.

5. Doors operated while armed without presentation of a valid card, valid operation of a Request to Exit Device, operation of a release button or release by central control panel to generate an alarm at the central control panel indicating door and condition. If a local door alarm is shown in the vicinity of the door, causes the local door alarm to sound, Local door alarm can be cleared either from the access control system control screen or locally using designated key.

6. Doors provided with powered door operators to be configured to operate as follows:
a. Unsecure side
1) Depressing the door operator button without first presenting a valid card results and no action.
2) Depressing door operator button after presenting a valid card causes the DGP to signal the door operator to initiate door opening after the associated electric lock mechanism has been released.
a) In a double door, where the handle in an electric latch cannot be retracted remotely, this may include releasing an electric strike in the normally passive leaf of the
opening.
b) City’s Representative to provide direction as to the length of time for which the door operator button to
remain operational following receipt of a valid card.
b. Secure side
1) Depressing door operator button causes the DGP to signal the door operator to initiate door opening after the associated electric lock mechanism has been released.
a) In a double door, where the handle in an electric latch cannot be retracted remotely, this may include releasing an electric strike in the normally passive leaf of the
opening.

D. Gate Operation

1. Presentation of valid card or vehicle emitter at unsecure side:
a. performs real-time lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to gate, day of week and time of day. b. provides positive success visual feedback - green light or similar - to card holder.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 13
c. signals gate controller to operate gate.
d. logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number, door number and timestamp
e. shunts alarm generation for gate open status for City's Representative selected variable period (adjustable over a range of at least 30 seconds to 2 minutes).

2. Presentation of invalid or unreadable card at unsecure side of gate:
a. performs real-time lookup of card against current database to validate card status relative to gate, day of week and time of day. b. provides positive failed visual feedback - red light or similar - to card holder and denies operation of gate logs entry in access database, including at minimum card number (if readable), door number and timestamp

3. Approach to gate from secure side
a. detector loop or similar device detects presence of vehicle at exit point. b. receives signal from gate operator on action to operate Gate. c. shunts alarm generation for gate open status for City's Representative selected variable period (adjustable over a range of at least 30 seconds to 2 minutes).

4. Detects forced operation of gate/operation of gate without use of valid card, remote release by Controller or in response to inductive loop detector or its functional equivalent.
a. generates an alarm at the central control panel indicating gate location and condition
E. Tamper Monitoring

1. Tampering with the DGP (removing its cover panel) or of other monitored electronic security system pullbox covers to be reported to the central ACAS monitoring station. Restoral events (replacement of cover) to similarly be reported to the central ACAS monitoring station.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this contract with the related work of at least the following parties:

1. Sacramento Public Library IT staff
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS CONTROL ALARM PROCESSING:

A. Access Control and Alarm Processing System (ACAS).

1. Drawing References:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 14
a. DGP* (Data Gathering Panel), where * represents the numbers of readers supported by the panel.
b. DGP*-RM (Data Gathering Panel, EIA 310D Rack Mount), where * represents the numbers of readers supported by the panel. c. DGR – Card reader communications bus extender.

2. Minimum Features/Functions/Performance
a. DGP
1) Processor and Memory
a) The DGP’s microprocessor shall be of sufficient speed and power to provide on-board AES 256-bit encryption
without use of an external encryption device, while
providing access decisions within 500 ms on a fully
loaded system. The DGP shall have at least 2GB of on-
board memory for cardholder and event storage. There
shall be at least 16GB of on-board FLASH memory that
shall be used for boot code and operating system code,
and for memory backup.
b) The DGP shall be able to locally store at least 500,000 card holders, using five cards/person and with 10
clearances/person, while also providing room for a
transaction buffer of 10,000 alarms and events
(minimum) in case communications to the host is lost.
2) Memory Retention and Real Time Clock Backup
a) The DGP must include automatic means to back up the
system memory, including card holder records,
configuration information, and alarm/event information, to onboard non-volatile flash memory in the event of AC power loss or Battery Low alarm. During the power
interruption, the system’s real time clock shall be backed up using a lithium coin cell battery such that the time is current when power is restored.
3) Dual Ethernet Network Ports
a) The DGP shall have two on-board 10/100/1Gb Ethernet
ports, using standard RJ-45 connectors. The network
ports must support full duplex communications. The
DGP must provide visual LED indication of transmit and
receive activity for the Ethernet communications port.

DGPs that do not offer full duplex 1Gb connectivity will not be accepted.
b) Secondary Communications
(1) Using the dual network ports, the DGP must
support a primary network communications path
and secondary communications path to the
system server. Failover operation is described
herein below.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 15
4) Field I/O Wiring Modules (Access Control Module)
a) The DGP shall provide terminations for field wiring
through the use of modular boards (Access Control
Modules). Each module shall support up to 8 readers and 8 doors, and a DGP may utilize either one or two Access Control Module, for a total of 16 readers. Refer to the drawings, scheduled reader count and the drawing
references to establish the capacity required for the
Project.
b) Upgrades
(1) An eight-reader DGP shall be able to easily
upgraded in the field to a 16-reader DGP,
through the addition of a second Access Control
Module board.
c) USB Communications
(1) Communications from each Access Control
Modules to the DGP’s GCM (General Control
Module) shall be made using a standard USB
connection.
5) Wireless Locksets
a) The DGP shall provide monitoring and control of up to 32 wireless locksets, using a local RS485 bus to
interface to the wireless lockset hub network. The DGP
shall support either the Schlage AD300 and AD400
series of locksets, or the ASSA ABLOY Aperio series of
locksets. When Access Control Module I/O modules are
used, the number of wireless locksets supported shall be reduced such that the overall reader count remains at 32 per DGP.
6) Power Requirements. The DGP shall be powered from a low voltage 12VDC power source, within a range of +/- 15%.
12VDC power is used to power the DGP electronics, plus, reader power and RS485 bus power.
a) Lock Power Management. In addition to system power,
each Access Control Module I/O module shall be
capable of managing and controlling lock power, such
that separate individual fused relay boards or lock
isolation relays shall not be required. Each Access
Control Module shall provide two lock power inputs in
addition to system power; each output relay on the
Access Control Module shall be configurable via jumper
to use lock power feed 1, lock power feed 2, or dry
contact. Lock power feeds may be either 12VDC or
24VDC. All power feeds to outputs shall be power
limited via resettable PTC devices.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 16
b) Power Requirements Design. The Contractor shall be
responsible for calculating the overall power
requirements for the DGP, including locking devices,
readers, annunciators, and PIR exit devices. A power
calculation spreadsheet shall be used to verify system
power requirements, and a safety factor of 50% shall be used when sizing power supplies.
7) Wall Mount System Enclosure. The DGP shall be housed in a locking 18 gauge steel enclosure, suitable for wall mounting in accordance with UL 294. All cabinet locks shall be keyed alike.

The cabinet shall be suitably sized to allow installation of the DGP and associated field wiring. The cabinet shall measure 25” in height by 22” in width and 5” in depth. There shall be a power indicator on the door which shall be visible when power is applied to the DGP. A single, Normally Closed (NC) tamper switch shall be incorporated into the door. There shall be at least 12 knockouts on the enclosure of various sizes to facilitate conduit and wire routing.
a) Expansion. The wall mount enclosure shall be sized to accommodate up to two Access Control Module I/O
boards.
8) Rack Mount System Enclosure. Alternatively, the DGP shall be able to be mounted in a standard 19” rack, using standard rack mounting hardware. A modular rack mounting arrangement shall be provided such that the General Control Module module is housed in a separate rack enclosure that is 2U high (3.5”), while each Access Control Module is housed in a 4U enclosure (7” in height). Each rack enclosure will be made of 18 gauge
galvanized steel, painted black. The enclosures shall be suitably sized to allow installation of the DGP and associated field wiring. A single, Normally Closed (NC) tamper switch shall be incorporated into the door.
a) Tamper Switches. Each rack mount enclosure shall have its own NC tamper switch, incorporated into the body of the enclosure and activated whenever the cover is
removed or partially removed.
9) Environmental Requirements
a) The DGP shall be capable of operation in temperatures between 0º and 50º C (32º - 122º F), and within humidity levels between 5% and 95%, non-condensing.
10) Reader Inputs
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 17
a) The DGP shall provide for direct connection of up to 16 Wiegand read heads. The read heads connected to these
ports shall conform to the industry standard Wiegand
Output format and shall support multiple card
technologies including contactless smart card, Wiegand, proximity, barium ferrite, bar code and biometrics.

Wiegand readers directly connected to the DGP may
reside up to 500 ft. from the DGP with the proper 18
AWG wiring. Wiegand reader inputs must be capable of
receiving and decoding a bit stream of at least 256 bits. b) LED Control. In addition to accepting card data from the read heads, the DGP shall control the LEDs at the
reader, supporting industry standard 2-wire or 1-wire
control. The DGP shall also provide a signal line to
control an external beeper at the reader with an active low going signal. The LED control shall support three
LEDs - red, amber and green. The System Server shall
support the configuration of these LEDs such that certain LEDs shall illuminate or not illuminate or pulse to
indicate various System status conditions. These LEDs
shall indicate the following status conditions as a
default:
(1) On-line Indication: Amber LED on steady
(2) Off-line Indication: Red LED on steady
(3) Card Accepted: Green LED pulses for door open
time
(4) Card/PIN: Amber LED pulses to enter PIN.

Subsequent red/green LEDs mimic card input
(5) Alarm Condition All LEDs pulse in
alternating pattern
c) Wiegand Keypad Support. The direct Wiegand reader
ports shall support Wiegand readers with integrated
Wiegand output keypads. The supported data format
shall conform to industry standard 4 bit or 8 bit (4 bits plus 4 bits complemented) Wiegand keypad data.
d) Power for Readers. The DGP shall provide +12VDC
power for each reader, up to 1.5A each, on separate
wiring terminals.
e) Support for RS485 Readers, with Display/Keypad. The
DGP shall support RS485 readers, to accommodate door
control at distances greater than the 500 foot Wiegand
distance limit. The DGP shall support up to 16 card
readers, and can also be configured to use a mix of
Wiegand readers, such that the overall reader count does not exceed 16.
11) Supervised Inputs
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 18
a) Twenty four (24) Class A Supervised inputs shall be
provided on each Access Control Module, providing
three inputs per reader. All supervised inputs in the
system shall be field-configurable to accept either 1K, 5K or 10K ohm terminating resistor networks which
may be configured to accept Normally Open (NO) or
Normally Closed (NC) switches or contacts. Each EOL
resistor network shall be configured such that the circuit reports unique messages for a secure circuit, alarm
condition, and an open or shorted input (supervision
alarm). Each input must also be capable of reading a
non-supervised circuit.
b) Each two-wire input must be able to be configured
individually for its supervisory circuit type.
c) Each two-wire input must be terminated on its own
connector, and must not share a connector with another
input.
d) The Monitoring Application Interface shall provide the current status of the inputs and shall log changes in input status. Supervised inputs shall be able to be taken
offline for diagnostic purposes and each input shall
support being linked directly to an output or to a system event. All input activations shall be reported to the
Monitoring Application and stored in the Historical
Journal on the System Server.
12) General Inputs. The DGP shall provide dedicated, normally- closed inputs for:
a) Enclosure Tamper. In a wall-mount cabinet, the tamper input on the GCM shall be pre-wired to the enclosure
door to report opening of the door as a tamper event. In a rack-mount enclosure system, each enclosure’s tamper
switch shall be pre-wired to either the General Control Module or Access Control Module tamper input.
b) Power Fail. A dedicated input shall be provided for a power failure alarm. When using an external DC power
supply to power the unit, this input shall be wired to the power supply’s alarm output
c) Low Battery. A dedicated input shall be provided for a low battery alarm. When using external DC power
supply to power the unit, this input shall be wired power supply’s low battery alarm output
13) Outputs. The DGP shall provide 16 separate outputs on each Access Control Module module, configurable through on-board jumpers as either “wet-lock1” (power sourcing), “wet-lock2” (power sourcing) or as dry contact form C relays. The outputs shall be used to control door locks, local annunciators, and other output devices as required.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 19
a) Output Protection and Power Ratings. Each output shall be individually protected with a PTC resettable fuse,
transzorbs and snubbers so that power can be directly
provided to locking devices without damage to the DGP.
b) When sourcing power to the outputs, one or both lock power inputs may be used. Outputs shall be able to
provide at least 0.75A at 12VDC or 24VDC.
c) Eight of the output relays shall be socketed, designed to control lock circuits, and shall be rated for 5.0A,
30VAC/DC when used as a dry contact control relay.
d) The other eight relays shall be non-socketed, designed to control local door annunciator devices, and shall be rated for at least 1.0A at 30 VAC/30 VDC when used as a dry
contact control relay.
e) The DGP shall provide a LED for visual indication of each output’s status.
f) Each output must be terminated on its own connector, and must not share a connector with another output.
g) The Monitoring Application Interface shall provide the current status of each output and shall allow the manual activation of each output individually or in user-defined groups for diagnostic purposes. All output activations shall be reported to the Monitoring Application and
stored in the Historical Journal on the System Server.
h) Fire Alarm Interlock. Each lock output shall be capable of being controlled directly from a fire alarm input on the DGP board, based on a local dip switch setting for
each output. When the fire alarm input is activated, the lock output shall be controlled to the door open state, if its fire alarm dip switch was enabled for that lock. Fire alarm control shall be hard-wired and not dependent on
any software or firmware function to operate. Fire alarm functionality shall be tested and listed per UL.
(1) A separate fire alarm key switch latch input shall
be provided. This input shall be used if manual
intervention is required after a fire alarm before
the locks are able to return to their normal
(locked) condition. The Access Control Module
module shall have a key switch enable switch to
enable this feature.
14) Local Display
a) The DGP shall include a local, on-board two line LCD for status and field diagnostic messages. Provide local switches on the DGP to set the LCD messaging and
diagnostic modes.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 20
b) For normal operations, the LCD shall be configured to display status messages. For troubleshooting operations, the LCD shall be configured to display diagnostic
messages for readers and card data, inputs, outputs,
network ports and other connected devices.
c) As a minimum, status messages shall include:
(1) boot information
(2) Date and time
(3) Firmware version
(4) DGP status information.
(5) Configured power and measured power
(6) IP address and MAC address of DGP
(7) Host connectivity status
d) The LCD shall also provide diagnostic information for:
(1) Cards/Readers – display raw card data, number
of bits, reader number
(2) Inputs – display changes in input state
(3) Outputs – test each output in sequence
(4) Ethernet ports – test operation of the port
15) I/O Expansion. The DGP shall support input and output expansion, through the use of RS485-based input/output
modules. Each Access Control Module module shall support up to 16 I8 modules, each providing eight supervised inputs, and up to 16 R8 eight-output form C relay modules. Form C relays shall be rated at 2A resistive and 1A inductive at 30VAC/DC.
a) The DGP’s wall mount enclosure shall be able to
accommodate up to four modules mounted internally,
without need for an external enclosure of any kind.
b) The DGP must provide, at least, eight RS-485 expansion ports. Each port must have LED indication of transmit
and receive communications activity. End-of-line (EOL)
termination resistors shall be provided for each port to satisfy RS-485 multi-drop requirements. The termination resistors must be selectable, by switch, to provide the possibility of a “Y” wiring arrangement.
c) Each reader expansion bus must provide +12VDC power
to its associated devices, through on-board power
terminals. Each RM device may be powered from the
DGP, or through a local +12VDC source.
16) Wiring Connectors. All connectors shall be screw down type and pluggable, to facilitate field replacements and simplify testing.

Connector spacing shall be such that connectors cannot be placed on the wrong wiring terminals.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 21
17) DGP Software
a) Firmware and OS. The DGP shall utilize a standard off the shelf Linux operating system, including kernel and
base OS image. Firmware updates to the DGP shall
include updates to the OS if applicable, including
security patches. It shall not be necessary to
independently manage updates to the OS outside of the
access control application.
18) Communications. The DGP shall utilize standard Ethernet network connectivity for communications, to the host server or to other network DGP’s. DGP’s shall be wired at any point on a Local Area Network (LAN)/Wide Area Network (WAN) via
industry standard Ethernet utilizing the TCP/IP protocol. The DGPs shall be able to communicate back to the System database server through industry standard network switches and routers and shall not be required to reside on the same subnet as the System Server. Any activity or event within the DGP network shall be routed to any client workstation(s) on the network, regardless of the DGP that handles the activity. The System Server shall manage any message routing issues, thus isolating the subsystem applications from network-specific
communication details.
a) The DGP to System Server communication, and DGP to
DGP communication within the same cluster, shall
include authentication and a minimum of 256 bit AES
encryption.
b) Upon losing and then restoring communications between the DGP and the System Server, database
synchronization between the System Server database and
the local database in each DGP shall be fast and
efficient. When communications are restored, database
synchronization shall occur immediately and without
System Operator intervention. Any changes made to the
System Server database while the DGP was off-line shall also be simultaneously downloaded to all required DGP
databases.
c) Protocols. Communication between the System Server
and the DGP, and from DGP to DGP, is via TCP/IP
only.
d) The DGP shall support DHCP. Each DGP may be
configured to accept an IP address and device name from local DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol),
WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) or DNS
(Domain Name System) servers.
e) The DGP shall have two 10/100/1000bT Ethernet (RJ-
45) ports on-board and shall not require external devices to connect to the network.
f) Clustering
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 22
(1) The DGPs shall support peer-to-peer
communications, without the need for host
intervention. A cluster is a user-defined
grouping of DGPs used to define peer-to-peer
communications.
(2) Peer-to-peer communications within a cluster
shall be used for input/output linking between
DGP’s, and for anti-passback control within a
cluster.
(3) Each cluster has a master DGP. The master is
the primary connection between the cluster and
the System Server. Communication from the
System Server to the master shall be through a
TCP/IP supported physical medium.
(4) The other cluster DGP’s are referred to as
members. Member DGP’s do not communicate
directly to the System Server or to each other;
rather their communication path to the System
Server and to each other shall be through the
master. Communication within a cluster is
always through a TCP/IP supported physical
medium.
(5) Each master DGP shall support an alternate
Ethernet communications path to the System
Server. In the event of a primary
communications path failure, the master shall
immediately attempt to utilize the secondary or
alternate communications path. The alternate
Ethernet path can be configured to use a
different host IP address and subnet.
g) Polling. The DGPs shall support peer-to-peer
communications, without the need for host intervention.

Communication between the System Server and the
DGP shall be asynchronous. The DGP shall not require
any poll messages between the System Server and the
DGP. Messages shall only be transmitted when required
and messages can be initiated by any DGP or by the
System Server. The DGP shall transmit a network
heartbeat to the System Server to satisfy UL
requirements.
h) AES Encryption and Key Management
(1) The DGP to System Server communication, and
DGP to DGP communication within the same
cluster, shall include authentication and a
minimum of 256-bit AES encryption. The DGP
shall offer both default key management and
custom key management.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 23
(2) For a secure environment, the DGP must be able
to accept and use a customer-supplied custom
encryption key, supplied either from the host or
from the DGP. The DGP must use a public key
infrastructure (PKI) arrangement and certificates
to authenticate keys between the host and the
DGP. The DGP shall provide an on-board USB
port to load a local encryption key.
i) Common System Services
(1) System Watchdog. The System Watchdog shall
constantly monitor all internal processes and if it
detects a problem, it shall reboot the DGP. A
hardware watchdog shall also run and reboot the
DGP if the system software fails to strobe it. The
DGP’s internal clock shall be updated by the
DGP’s real-time clock upon restart.
(2) Software Update Service. The system shall
provide the ability to update the DGP firmware
stored in FLASH remotely from the host,
directly within the ACAS user interface. If the
update image becomes corrupted, the DGP can
fall back to an original boot image. The boot
image shall restart the DGP and inform the host
to re-send the update image. This feature allows
the DGP firmware to be easily upgraded to add
new features.
j) Event Handling Services. The DGP system firmware
shall provide a service that will serve as a clearinghouse for all activities generated on a DGP. The System
Server shall download a list of action definitions and a list of events to each DGP. The system software shall
provide an interface for reporting activities or events in real time as they occur.
k) Event Linking. Event linking shall tie an activity on one DGP to the triggering of an action on the same or
different DGP. The Server DGP shall support three
types of event linking:
(1) Local Event Linking. When the source device
and the target device are linked through an
activity on the same DGP, local event linking
shall occur.
(2) Cluster Event Linking. When the source device
and the target device being linked are on
different DGP’s in the same cluster, cluster
event linking shall occur. The transmission of
the action request from one DGP to another shall
occur (routed through the master DGP) with no
System Server intervention.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 24
(3) Global Event Linking. When the source device
and the target device being linked are on
different clusters, global event linking shall
occur. This cross-cluster linking will require
that the action request be routed through the
System Server. The event link definitions shall
be created on the System Server and shall be
downloaded to the appropriate DGP’s. The
System Server shall also insure that the event
link definitions are valid and that there are no
recursive links.
l) Action Scheduling. The system software shall provide an action scheduling service that will execute actions on
devices residing on the same or other DGP’s at a
predefined time, frequency and time interval. The action definitions shall be the same System Server-defined
actions utilized by event linking. The actions and the action schedule shall be defined by the System Server
software and shall be downloaded to the appropriate
DGP’s.
m) Offline / Online Reporting. The system shall provide a mechanism to report activities to the System Server for display, reporting and archiving. If a System Server is not currently connected to the cluster of DGP’s, the
activity reports will be buffered until the System Server reconnects to the cluster. Should the user-configured, activity buffer limit be exceeded before the System
Server reconnects, the first in first out rule shall apply.

Provide a minimum of 10,000 events in the offline
buffer.
n) Time Management Services. The system shall provide a service to manage user-defined time periods. These time periods shall be defined on the System Server and
downloaded to all DGP’s. The time management
services shall also ensure that all DGP’s have a
synchronized time clock.
o) Access Control Functionality. The DGP shall perform
basic access control operations with or without
communications to a host server, including unlocking a
door based on a valid credential, unlock based on a valid PIN, unlock based on card plus PIN, unlock based on
schedule, unlock based on a pre-defined sequence or
event, and unlock based on a manual action initiated by a system operator. In addition, the DGP shall be capable of the following:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 25
p) Custom Defined Card Formats. The user shall be able to define custom card formats, up to 10 per DGP, and each
format shall be able to be at least 256 bits in length. The user shall be able to define and use government card
formats such as the 200-bit GSA format with HMAC.
q) Elevator Control. The DGP shall be able to perform
elevator control, using either inputs and outputs hard- wired to the elevator control system, or, using a network interface through the host server. Card readers may be
located in the elevator lobbies or elevator cabs. Upon a valid card read, the DGP shall decide which floors the
person is authorized for.
r) Intrusion Zones. Doors on the DGP shall be able to be defined as intrusion zones that are armed and disarmed
by various methods through a keypad/display reader.
s) Inputs on the DGP shall be able to be defined as
included in intrusion zones, and may be defined as 24-
hour inputs, such as glass-break sensors, or as inputs that may be shunted during a time period, such as motion
sensors.
t) Double Swipe Custom Event. The DGP shall be capable
of performing a pre-defined sequence of events if two
duplicate card reads are seen within a certain period of time. It must be possible to select which personnel will activate the double swipe feature on each door.
19) Diagnostic Web Server. The Diagnostic Web Server shall generate real-time operational and diagnostic information on a DGP to be viewed by system installers, troubleshooters and tech support personnel from a standard web browser, such as Internet Explorer. This web server, residing on each DGP, shall answer requests from a standard web browser and shall generate and serve up HTML pages that indicate DGP status and diagnostic information.
a) Compatibility. The Diagnostic Server shall be
compatible with standard browsers, such as Internet
Explorer, Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox.
b) Functional Requirements. The Diagnostic Web Server
shall query the appropriate DGP’s to determine the
following information and shall display it in an
organized fashion to the user via a web browser.
c) Total and Available Memory (RAM). The Diagnostic
Web Server shall display the total amount of memory (in bytes) on the DGP and the amount of memory (in bytes)
that is currently free.
d) Current Time Information. The Diagnostic Web Server
shall display the DGP’s current time and time zone.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 26
e) Boot Time. The Diagnostic Web Server shall display the time at which the DGP was last rebooted.
f) Firmware and Operating System Versions. The
Diagnostic Web Server shall display the Firmware
Version and build number and the operating system
Version Number.
g) MAC and IP Address Information. The Diagnostic Web
Server shall display the DGP’s unique MAC Address as
well as its IP Address.
h) DGP Type (Cluster). The Diagnostic Web Server shall
display the DGP type within the cluster – Master or
Member.
i) Connection Status. The Diagnostic Web Server shall
display the DGP’s current connection status with its
parent (System Server or Master DGP).
j) Parent Information. The Diagnostic Web Server shall
display the hardware MAC and IP Addresses of its
parent (System Server or Master DGP).
k) Security. The Diagnostic Web Server shall support
multiple simultaneous users and should have minimal
impact on the normal operation of the DGP. The
Diagnostic Web Server shall utilize a standard security scheme that requires a user to log in using a password
that shall be set via the System Server or the iSTAR
Configuration Utility (ICU).
l) It shall be possible to disable the diagnostic web server if desired.
m) Database Information
(1) The Diagnostic Web Server shall display all
DGP database information, along with the
number of records contained, the amount of
memory (in bytes) utilized and the percentage of
memory that each one consumes.
(2) Run-Time Diagnostics/Debug Information
n) The user shall have the ability, via the web browser, to enable the output of real-time debugging information.

This information shall be displayed on the browser. The information may also be output via the serial Debug Port of the DGP and can be viewed (and captured) by
standard tools such as HyperTerminal.
20) Reader signal range extender.
a) Allows Weigand signaling to be extended to DGP at
distances of up to 4000 feet.
b) Provide in quantities as required to suit application.

3. Manufacturers
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 27
a. ACAS Manufacturer
1) JCI/Software House (Selected Item to match Sacramento Public Library existing inventory).
a) DGP2 or DGP4, Edge with daughter cards and
accessories as required to provide the functionality
described in these specifications and shown on the plans:
iSTAR Edge. Provide with standard low-voltage power
supply (not POE). Use integral door lock power supply
in lieu of external supply. Provide with manufacturer’s internal back-up battery.
b) DGP8, with daughter cards and accessories as required to provide the functionality described in these
specifications and shown on the plans. Provide with
external power supply: USTAR008
c) DGP8-RM, rack mount version of DGP8, with daughter
cards and accessories as required to provide the
functionality described in these specifications and shown on the plans: Provide USTAR-ACM-4U
d) DGP16, with daughter cards and accessories as required to provide the functionality described in these
specifications and shown on the plans. Provide with
external power supply: USTAR016
e) DGR. Card reader range extender: RM-4E.
b. External Power Supply Manufacturer:
1) For eight and 16 door iStar panels, specified above without internal power supplies
a) Altronix with battery extenders as required to provide indicated Power Loss functionality.
b) Or equal

2.2 CARD READERS
A. Card Readers

1. Spec References:
a. CR: Card Reader, Wall Mount
b. CN: Card Reader, Mullion Mount
c. CKP: Card Reader, Wall Mount with Integral Keypad

2. Triple Technology Card Readers:
a. Simultaneously support of BLE Mobile Devices, NFC Mobile Devices,

13.56MHz and 125Khz contactless credentials. The contactless smart card reader shall read Mobile IDs powered by the SEOS standard based software application or applet technology.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 28
b. The Contractor should anticipate that the Sacramento Public Library will register with the card reader manufacturer such that the readers shall be shipped factory “mobile enabled” with theSacramento Public Library assigned key.

3. The contactless smart card reader must support the following 2 modes of interaction with BLE credentials:
a. Tap Mode: The mobile device must be brought very close to or touching the reader (a similar user experience to that observed using Prox cards) b. Twist and Go: The mobile device holder must initiate the read by twisting the mobile device in using a sharp 90° rotation in either direction.

4. Provide range of color options for selection by the Sacramento Public Library Representative.

5. Minimum Features/Functions:
a. Typical Maximum Read Range
1) HID Prox ISO Card: 2.5 – 3.5” (6.5 - 9.0 cm)
2) HID Prox Keyfob/Tag: 1.0 – 2.25” (2.5 - 5.5 cm)
3) Microprox® Tag: 1.0 – 1.25" (2.5-3.2 cm)
4) iCLASS SE Card: 4.0 - 4.5” (10.2 - 11.4 cm)
5) iCLASS SE Key/Tag: 1.0 - 2.0” (2.5 - 5.0 cm)
6) Mobile IDs using Bluetooth & Seos:
a) Twist and Go: 6.6 ft.
b) Tap: 5.9”
b. Dimensions
1) CN: 1.9" x 6.0" x 0.9"
2) CR: 3.3” x 4.8” x 0.95”
3) CKP: 3.3” x 4.8” x 1.1”
c. Operating Temperature
1) -40º to 150º F
d. Operating Humidity
1) 5% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing
e. Transmit Frequencies
1) 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz
f. Cable Distance
1) Wiegand Interface 500ft (150 m) 22 AWg
g. Card Compatibility
1) 125 kHz Proximity
a) HID proximity cards, key fobs, and tags
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 29
b) AWID Credentials
c) EM4102 Credentials
2) 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards
a) Secure Identity Object™ (SIO®) on iCLASS Seos,
iCLASS SE/SR, MIFARE DESFire EV1 and MIFARE
Classic (On by Default)
b) standard iCLASS Access Control Application (order
with Standard interpreter)
c) ISO14443A (MIFARE) CSN, ISO14443B CSN,
ISO15693 CSN
d) Mifare and Mifare DESFire EV1 custom data models
e) FeliCa CSN, CEPAS4 CSN or CAN Manufacturer:
h. CKP: Integral keypad permits transmission of supplemental instructions to ACS DGP in combination with use of an authenticated access control card.

6. Manufacturers:
a. HID. All readers to be supplied HID Mobile Enabled with the City’s HID key factory programmed.
1) CKP: HID multiCLASS SE RPK40 Reader with Keypad and
BLE for Mobile Access.
2) CR: HID multiCLASS SE RP40 Reader with BLE for Mobile Access.
3) CN: HID multiCLASS SE RP15 Reader with BLE for Mobile Access.
b. Software House
c. WaveLynx
d. Or equal.

2.3 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Intrusion Detection Panel and Keypad

1. Drawing Reference(s): Intrusion Detection Panel, IDS, KP

2. Minimum Features, Functions, Performance, Construction:
a. General:
1) The IDS shall include a Control Panel with built-in, supervised telephone line interface and/or IP interface as required. 2) The IDS shall include recording and retention of event information in a dedicated event log.
3) The IDS shall incorporate an integral real-time clock, calendar, and a test timer.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 30
4) The IDS shall incorporate battery charging capabilities with supervision of battery voltage and battery leads.
5) The IDS shall accommodate a time / event-based scheduling system.
6) The IDS shall be capable of supervision of peripheral devices and communications interfaces.
7) The IDS shall support the connection and reporting of intrusion, devices to a remote Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver (DACR).
8) The IDS shall accommodate configuration and operation of separate, independent areas.
9) The IDS shall accommodate hard-wired via expansion point interface modules.
10) The DACS shall have electrically supervised detection loops and power supplies with battery(s) maintenance. This supervision shall be programmable for the purposes of reporting this information to the DACR.
11) The DACS shall be capable of monitoring and switching to active telephone/IP lines when trying to establish
communications with the DACR and transmitting a report. 12) The DACS shall be capable of sending (manually or
automatically) test and status reports to remote DACRs. 13) The DACS shall be able to accommodate test, diagnostics, and configuration programming functions locally or remotely via a portable programmer or a computer running the Remote
Programming Software (RPS).
14) The DACS shall annunciate alarm, trouble, service reminders, and other relevant system status messages in custom English text at the ACC.
15) IP-based communication options provide high-speed, secure alarm transport and control through connection of wired and/or wireless cellular network interfaces. Provide IP and/or dial interface as required to match Sacramento Public Library’a selected Central Alarm monitoring company requirement.
16) Capacity:
a) Up to 32 programmable areas each supporting both with perimeter and interior points with choice of touch screen, ATM style, or LED keypads. Homerun wire each point
to IDS and create areas in software – bussed wiring not permitted.
b) 75 points with flexible configuration options to meet multiple installation requirements.
c) Credentials (Tokens): At least 399
d) Custom Functions: At least 4
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 31
e) Events: Up to 1000
f) Passcode Users: At least 399, plus 1 service passcode g) Points: At least 75
h) Programmable Relay Outputs: At least 67.
b. Keypad
1) Color graphic touch screen display uses a combination of simple icons and text for easy operation
2) Built-in presence detector lights the display when user approaches keypad
3) Built-in credential reader allows use of a token or card as replacement for a passcode, or for use with dual authentication for high security areas
4) Four inputs and one output provide cost effective expansion 5) Slim, modern design blends with any décor
6) User icons and keys The keypad greets the user with a home screen that shows the system status at one glance using a large icon. The user can change the system status by simply touching this home screen icon. The touch screen display also offers icons on the ribbon bar. These visually pleasing graphical icons are easy to use for accessing menus and other options. The keypad has a variety of keyboards for entering alphanumeric characters.

The keypad screen has numeric keys and one function key.

When pressed, keys emit a muted beep. Use the keyboards for entering passcodes, activating commands, and entering
alphanumeric characters.
7) Audible tones The keypad has a built-in speaker that produces several distinct warning tones. The tones are differentiated so that the user can recognize an event simply by hearing its associated tone. The keypad backlight illuminates when it emits an audible tone. Users can use a passcode or credential to silence the tone.
8) Status Indicators
a) Group LED Indicators
b) Armed Status Perimeter, Interior, and Instant
c) Point Status Point Fault, Point Alarm Memory, and
d) Bypassed Point
9) Color as selected by City’s Representative from manufacturer’s standard options.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Intrusion Detection Panel & Keypad
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 32
1) Bosch G series control panel (based on B8512g or B9512g control panel with daughtercards as required) and B942 Touch Screen LCD keypad.
2) Or equal – No known equal.
b. External Power Supply Manufacturer:
1) Altronix with battery extenders as required to provide 2 hour Power Loss functionality.
2) Equal by IDS panel manufacturer
3) Or equal.

2.4 POWER PROTECTION
A. Backboard mounted equipment

1. Function:
a. Power supply with backup battery
b. Class 1 (115VAC Input)
c. Individually fused, Power Limited, Class 2 outputs - sized to meet worst case load and runtime while maintaining system operations. d. Unless otherwise indicated support operation of ACAS system for specified operational period following loss of power.
e. Battery is lead acid type of common commercial manufacture. f. UL Listings: UL 294, UL603, UL 1069, UL1481 for application g. Provide timer modules as required to supplement DGP control h. Supervised fire alarm disconnect
i. Power supply and battery fully enclosed in steel NEMA enclosure with cam lock cover and conduit knockouts.
j. Thermal and short circuit protection with auto reset.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Altronix AL Series (Design Basis)
b. Security Door Controls
c. Or equal.

2.5 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SENSORS & FIELD DEVICES
A. General

1. Field devices to be selected to match condition of opening and/or space to be protected. The following specifications are minimum standards; Contractor to consult with listed manufacturers and select appropriate device and mounting means for unusual construction conditions.

B. Door Tamper Alarm Switch
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 33

1. Spec Reference: DS

2. Construction and Features
a. UL Listed
b. Hermetically sealed magnetic reed switch. Dual biased high security switch assembly deters tampering. Reed shall be potted in the contact housing with a polyurethane based compound.
c. Magnet shall be made of Alnico V.
d. Steel Door Switches
1) Contact and magnet housing shall snap-lock into a 1" dia. hole.

Snap-lock insulation bushing for tight fit and maximum gap in steel.
2) Housings shall be molded of flame retardant ABS plastic. Both contact and magnet plastic housings are constructed of one piece of thick-walled ABS plastic for maximum strength.
3) Color of housings shall be off-white, grey or mahogany brown.

Color to be selected by City’s Representative.
4) Designed for Use in Steel Doors
5) Operates in steel door and frame at gap up to:
a) 3/8" min. - 3/4" Doors
b) ½" min. - 1" Doors
e. Under Door Threshold switches. At all glass door assemblies with base lock plate, mount DS under door threshold. Provide necessary blocking and shimming and/or secondary magnets at recessed doors to bring magnet within specified gap.

3. Manufacturer:
a. Steel Doors, 1"
1) Interlogix 1076W.
2) George Risk Industries, Inc.
3) Or equal
b. Under threshold:
1) Interlogix 1921 magnet and 1055 or 1075W Switch
2) Honeywell Ademco.
3) George Risk Industries, Inc.
4) Or equal
C. Door Switch, Roll-Up Doors and Coiling Grills

1. Drawing Reference: DU

2. Minimum Function/Features/Construction:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 34
a. Monitors status of openings where door, grill or gate travels in vertical direction.
b. Place door switches on slab at side of track or at top of frame at each end of rollup door or grill.
c. Fasten magnet to traveling door.
d. Switch connects to structure with armored cable connection.

3. Manufacturer:
a. Interlogix 1982 Magnet and 2202A or 2205 switch with Manufacturer’s Supplemental Mounting Brackets and Spacers as required. At panel/sectional doors Interlogix 2300 series.
b. Honeywell Ademco
c. George Risk Industries, Inc.
d. or equal.

D. Gate Switch

1. Spec Reference: GS

2. Minimum Function/Features/Construction:
a. Monitors status of gate protected openings.
b. Fasten magnet to traveling/moving gate with tamperproof fasteners. c. Switch connects to conduit and backbox infrastructure with armored cable connection.

3. Manufacturer:
a. Interlogix 1982 Magnet and 2202A or 2205 switch with Manufacturer’s Supplemental Mounting Brackets and Spacers as required. At panel/sectional gates, provide Interlogix 2300 series.
b. Honeywell Ademco
c. George Risk Industries, Inc.
d. or equal.

E. Hatch Switch

1. Spec Reference: HS

2. Minimum Function/Features/Construction:
a. Monitors state of roof hatches - Magnet fastened to hatch door detects operation of hatch.
b. Switch connects to structure at hatch opening with armored cable connection to serving junction box

3. Manufacturer:
a. Interlogix 2500 series
b. George Risk Industries, Inc.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 35
c. Honeywell Ademco.
d. or equal.

F. Local Door Alarm, Interior

1. Spec Reference: LA

2. Minimum Function/Features/Construction:
a. Provide door management alarms for local and remote monitoring and annunciation of the status of the doors (door prop/door held, door intrusion/door forced or secure)
b. The LA shall be capable of operating in a stand-alone configuration or with access control systems.
c. Local sounder (field selectable 96 or 103 dBA @ 3 feet) shall be used to indicate both door prop/door held and intrusion/door forced conditions after a user selectable quiet, or access, time (0 seconds - 90 minutes) has expired. Sounder shall be incorporated into the faceplate of the LA. d. Form C (N/O or N/C) contacts shall be available for the following outputs:
1) Door Contact Status.
2) Door Prop Alarm.
3) Intrusion & Tamper Alarm.
4) Bypass/ Key Switch Status.
5) Dry Contact Remote Alarm Reset.
6) The alarm (intrusion) contact shall change state upon the recognition of an alarm or tamper condition to alert remote monitoring equipment.
7) The unit shall remain in alarm until reset by integral key switch, remotely through a dry contact or automatically through an onboard timer (settable from 0 seconds to 5 minutes or manual). 8) An integral key switch shall be available for alarm shunt or alarm reset and be incorporated into the faceplate of the LA. 9) A Bi-Color status L.E.D. shall be incorporated into the faceplate of the LA. A remote L.E.D. output shall be provided to control a Bi-Color L.E.D. that follows the actions of the faceplate mounted L.E.D.
10) Inputs shall include a N/C Dry Contact for the door, Voltage Sense (12-24 VAC/DC) to monitor electric lock voltages and a N/O or N/C passive Shunt Input.
e. The following timers shall be user settable:
1) Auto-reset,
2) Alarm delay
3) Silent time
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 36
4) Shunt Delay.
f. The LA shall be mounted in the wall adjacent to the monitored door at PSSH.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Designed Security, Inc. Model ES4200-K4-T1 w/ Rim Cylinder Keylock K option and a tamper circuit, keyed as directed by the City. 1) At exterior locations, provide with manufacturer’s-007 component weatherization option.
b. Or equal.

G. Door Release Button, Door Operator button, Non-Hazardous Opening, General Purpose Dry Contact Signaling

1. Drawing Reference(s): RB, DO

2. Minimum Features/Function/Construction:
a. 1 Gang Stainless Steel plate with 2" min. diameter wall mount button labeled “Push to Exit”, or substantially similar language meeting CBC1008.1.3.4.
b. Alternatively, Crash Bar Button, (CBB) is integrated into exit hardware installed by Division 8.
c. Button initiates a DPDT form C momentary contact closure. d. Button label fill is contrast color to button.
e. Provide ADA compliant supplemental labeling as required.

3. Manufacturer:
a. Allegion Schlage 620/631 Series.
b. Designed Security, Inc. ES440.
c. Hanchett Entry Systems F6 Series
d. Or equal.

H. Door Release Button, Hazardous Area

1. Spec Reference: RBE
a. UL Classified Class 1, Division 1

2. Manufacturers:
a. Alarm Controls Corporation EXP-1.
b. or equal (no known equal).

2.6 INTRUSION DETECTION FIELD DEVICES
A. General
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 37

1. Field devices to be selected to match condition of opening and/or space to be protected. The following specifications are minimum standards; Contractor to consult with listed manufacturers and select appropriate device and mounting means for unusual construction conditions.

B. Duress Alarms, Casework

1. Drawing Reference: DC

2. Minimum Features/Function/Construction:
a. Casework mounted corded hold-up alarm/duress contact switch provides for initiation of alarm at alarm panel.
b. Form C contact
c. Metal housing
d. Key required to reset
e. Silent operation
f. Status window indicator (armed, alarmed)
g. Mechanical operation

3. Manufacturer:
a. Potter (Amseco) HUSK-10.
b. Honeywell 269R.
c. Interlogix
d. Or equal
C. Glassbreak Detectors

1. Drawing Reference: GB

2. Minimum Features/Function/Construction:
a. Selectable Sensitivity - at least four levels.
b. Ceiling mountable, the GB can be mounted on the ceiling, opposite wall, adjoining wall, or the same wall as the glass being monitored. c. 25' working range minimum
d. Works on all glass types, including plate, tempered, laminated, wired, film-coated, sealed insulating glass.
e. Multiple Domain Signal Analysis. Multiple Domain Signal Analysis in which time, frequency and amplitude characteristics are evaluated for signal qualification. This enables the detector to accurately discriminate false alarms from true glassbreak events.
f. Physical Dimensions: Not larger than 5" D x 1"

3. Manufacturers:
a. Rokonet ViTRON Plus
b. Honeywell Ademco FG-1525R
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 38
c. Interlogix
d. or equal.

D. Motion Detectors

1. Drawing Reference(s): MD, MDC, MDE

2. Minimum Features/Function/Construction:
a. Dual detection device detects change in background heat levels associated with passage of an intruder through passive infrared technology (PIR) and microwave reflection. Both detectors need to activate to signal an alarm conditions.
b. Immune to rodent motion.
c. Pulse Count: Installer-selectable, 1- or 2-event
d. Detectable Walk Rate: 2-4 steps within field-of-view e. Indicators: Red LED with enable/disable feature
f. Alarm Relay: Form C
g. Operating Temp: At least 32º to 120ºF
h. Operating Humidity: At least up to 95% RH (max.), non-condensing i. Dimensions: Not larger than 5"x5"
j. K-Band Microwave
k. Where exterior device installation shown, devices to suitable for outdoor use under Project conditions
l. Corridor and Aisles Conditions, MDC
1) Select device and configure device lens(es) and masks to monitor area nominally 20 degrees wide from point that device is installed to architectural barrier opposite or cross-aisle opposite of the device, unless otherwise indicated.
m. Ceiling Mount Applications
1) Ceiling Mount Design. 360° field-of-view, mounting height from 8' to 16', install as recessed mount, unless otherwise noted. n. Exterior
1) Manufacturer listed for outdoor applications
2) IP65 minimum dust and moisture protection
o. Coverage - At least 25' diameter
1) Listings/Approvals
2) UL Listed
3) FCC Certified

3. Manufacturers - coordinate selected device with ceiling height and manufacturer’s instructions:
a. MD, Ceiling Interior
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 39
1) Honeywell Ademco DT 7360
2) Rokonet Lunar DT
3) Bosch
4) Interlogix
5) or equal
b. MDC, select and submit for each condition.
1) Rokonet iWISE DT with ACT
2) Honeywell Ademco
3) Bosch
4) Interlogix
5) or equal
c. MDE, Exterior Conditions
1) Rokonet iWiseDT QUAD with ACT and optional ceiling swivel 2) Interlogix DDI602U-F1
3) Honeywell Ademco
4) Bosch
5) or equal
E. Duress Alarm, Wall Mount

1. Drawing Reference: DW

2. Minimum Features/Function/Construction:
a. As for RB button specified elsewhere herein.
b. Labeled “Push for Help” in white letters on red background or red letters on contrasting background.

3. Manufacturer:
a. As for RB specified elsewhere in this Section
F. Tamper Alarm Switch

1. Select to suit application.

2. Manufacturer:
a. Interlogix.
b. Honeywell Ademco.
c. George Risk Industries, Inc.
d. Or equal.

G. Window Switch

1. Drawing Reference: WS
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 40

2. Features/Functions/Construction
a. Protects openings where window pivot to open.
b. Contractor to select and submit based on WS manufacturers' recommendation to match each type of operable window frame supplied under Division 8 where WS type protection is indicated on the plans. c. Operating window more than ½ " from closed position at its widest point to trigger alarm.

3. Mounting
a. Switch is mechanically fastened to window frame - adhesive attachment is not acceptable.
b. Magnetic is fastened to moving portion of frame mechanically or by adhesive.

4. Manufacturer:
a. Interlogix
b. George Risk Industries, Inc.
c. Honeywell Ademco
d. or equal.

2.7 ACCESS CONTROL WIRING
A. As specified in Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall install all system components, including City / Sacramento Public Library furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, IEEE C2 and as shown and necessary to provide a fully functional system.

The contractor shall furnish necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system as specified and shown. Control signal, communications, and data transmission line grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation.

B. Provide mounting hardware as necessary to securely fasten ACAS hardware to the supporting structure or racks.

C. Device Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection

1. All inputs shall be protected against surges induced on device wiring. Outputs shall be protected against surges induced on control and device wiring installed outdoors and as shown. All communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications circuit. All cables and conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits from security console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 41
D. Installation

1. The contractor shall install the system in accordance with the standards for safety, NFPA 70, UL 681, UL 1037 and UL 1076, and the appropriate installation manual for each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with appropriate service points to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20 minutes.

2. Flexible cords or cord connections shall not be used to supply power to any components of the system, except where specifically noted. All other electrical work shall be as specified in Division 26 and as shown.

3. All circuit boards are to be mounted on "Stand-Offs". Circuit boards may not be affixed with double sided tape.

4. No components of the security system are to be mounted on the interior door of the DGP enclosure. Where additional space is required, Contractor to place a supplemental NEMA enclosure adjacent to the DGP sized as required to accommodate the additional components.

5. Perimeter Wireway: Refer to the requirements of Section 28 05 28 - Pathway for Electronic safety and Security regarding the requirement to wrap the backboard at electronic security system installation locations with steel wireway/gutter and terminal cabinets as necessary to fully enclose wiring and components associated with electronic security systems installation.

6. Enclosure Penetrations

7. Enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer, and in a manner that does not damage the cable. Locate penetrations to enclosures to ensure they will not interfere with components inside enclosure such as batteries, circuit boards, locking mechanisms etc.

8. Cold Galvanizing

9. Field welds and/or brazing on factory galvanized boxes, enclosures, conduits, etc., shall be coated with a cold galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.

E. Card Readers

1. Contractor to coordinate detail construction work in vicinity of card readers with work of other trades to ensure that specified read range of card readers is not compromised by the presence of large metal objects in the immediate vicinity of reader

2. Securely fasten card reader to structure to prevent its movement during repeated usage.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 42

3. Unless otherwise indicated, card readers to be mounted to the nearest side of the door housing the door handle.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, card readers should be mounted to flush mount backboxes. Mounting card readers on surface mounted boxes is unacceptable except where such installations are specifically called for in the plans.

5. Contractor to further ensure that power supplies used with the readers meet or exceed card reader manufacturer minimum requirements for current and voltage stability.

6. Exterior card reader installations must be equipped with the appropriate weather protection.

3.2 PROGRAMMING
A. Initial Systems Programming

1. Contractor to meet with City's Representative to confirm functional requirements for surveillance systems defined in Part 1 of this Section, including but not limited to the following:
a. Access Classification Tiers
1) In accordance with the Schedule of Programmatic Outcomes by Door Opening Schedule elsewhere in this Section below identify users and user groups having access to selected:
a) Door(s).
2) Monitoring to be provided at each Alarm point.
3) Always on (24 hour response).
4) On when the system is Master Armed.
5) Only on when the system is Perimeter Armed.
6) Displays / Does Not Display at the Access Control Panel when the point is activated.
7) Provides / Does Not Provide entry warning tone.
8) Sounds / Does Not Sound audible alarm indication.
9) Point is bypassable / not bypassable.
10) Alarm Verification with programmable verification time. 11) Summary Relay activation by Point.
12) Provides / Does Not Provide "watch point" capability. b. Calendar. System Operations as a function of day-of-the-week and hour- of-the-day and differential access permitted based on these changes. 1) Access limitations and device functions that are dependent on the time or access or the event.
c. Alarm System response to events
1) Normal access (validated).

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 43
2) System fault
3) Unauthorized access
4) Unauthorized access detected by multiple monitoring points. d. Pass codes according to the authorities and functions defined by the City's Representative.
e. In addition to standard door operation arming and alarming as described in Part 1 of this Specification Section, initial system programming to include the following features and functions:
1) Arming Zones – at least the following:
a) Perimeter
b) Staff Offices
c) Maintenance Openings and Hatches
f. Document the Initial Programming Requirements and Submit in accordance with Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electronic Safety and Security.

2. At minimum, include allowance of post-opening programming time in the following quantities.
a. In addition to providing the programming necessary to meet the functional requirements defined in Part 1 of this Section, Contractor to provide systems customization programming time as defined below in the following quantities:
b. 10 hours.
c. Programming time is time spent by a trained systems programming developing the specific sequence of alarm events and response for this Project.
d. Programming time does not include installation of or correcting deficient installation of system components, coordination with the contractors, training the programmer in the programming of the system software or meeting with the City's Representative(s) to establish the functional requirements of the security system.
e. Programming time not used in initial systems configuration shall be available to the City for supplemental post-opening programming.

Contractor to provide such post opening programming in a minimum of 4 hour blocks.
f. Contractor to provide City's Representative with daily timesheets of programming time spent in support of this Project on request" g. Implement System Programming as defined above.

3. Schedule of Programmatic Outcomes by Door Opening. For the indicated door openings, the Contractor should anticipate programming at least the minimum number of features associated with the Standard Door Class as scheduled below.

Standard Door
Class
Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 44
Standard Door
Class
Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5
Doors Opening
Class Assignment
Perimeter &
Interior Doors;
Secure
Emergency Exit
Only Doors
Exit Only
Doors
Card and PIN
Reader
Secure Storage
Rooms
No No
Card Reader Office
Perimeter
Yes No No
Latch Bolt
Monitoring
Strike Position
Monitoring
Door Position
Monitoring
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Local Sounder Yes Yes Yes Yes
Always Locked Yes Yes Yes
Locked/Unlocked
on
Schedule/Action
Yes
Min. [TBD]
Programming to be
performed by
Contractor
Door Forced
Open
Door Forced
Open
Emergency Exit
Open
Door Forced
Open
Door Forced
Open Audio
Door Forced
Open Audio
Emergency Exit
Open Audio
Door Forced
Open Audio
Door Forced
Display Map
Door Forced
Display Map
Emergency Exit
Open Display
Map
Door Forced
Display Map
Door Held
Open
Door Held
Open
Emergency Exit
Secured Audio
Door Held
Open
Door Held
Audio
Door Held
Audio
DCP Key
Disarmed
Door Held
Audio
Door Held
Display Map
Door Held
Display Map
DCP Key
Disarmed Audio
Door Held
Display Map
Door Secured
Audio
Door Secured
Audio
DCP Key
Disarmed Display
Map
Door Secured
Audio
DJP Tamper DJP Tamper DCP Key Armed
Audio
DCP Key
Disarmed
DJP Tamper
Audio
DJP Tamper
Audio
DCP Tamper DCP Key
Disarmed
Audio
DJP Tamper
Display Map
DJP Tamper
Display Map
DCP Tamper
Audio
DCP Key
Disarmed
Display Map
DJP Tamper
Secure Audio
DJP Tamper
Secure Audio
DCP Tamper
Display Map
DCP Key
Armed Audio
DCP Key
Disarmed
DCP Key
Disarmed
DCP Tamper
Secure Audio
DCP Tamper
DCP Key
Disarmed
DCP Key
Disarmed
DCP Tamper
Audio
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 45
Standard Door
Class
Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5
Audio Audio
DCP Key
Disarmed
Display Map
DCP Key
Disarmed
Display Map
DCP Tamper
Display Map
DCP Key
Armed Audio
DCP Key
Armed Audio
DCP Tamper
Secure Audio
DCP Tamper DCP Tamper
DCP Tamper
Audio
DCP Tamper
Audio
DCP Tamper
Display Map
DCP Tamper
Display Map
DCP Tamper
Secure Audio
DCP Tamper
Secure Audio
a. For doors indicated to receive access control/IDS hardware, Contractor to request present written request of City’s Representative for assignment to the appropriate Access Class.

3.3 WIRING PRACTICE
A. Comply with requirements of Sections 27 11 16 - Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures and Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security
B. At electric strikes and electric locks and all other monitored lines requiring same, provide end-of-line resistors, diodes or MOV’s where device does not already include such components. Document where such devices have been added.

3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Satisfaction of the requirements below does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installations, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment. The Contractor shall not apply power to the system until after:

1. System equipment items have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. A visual inspection of the system has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.

3. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected.

4. System grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly installed.

5. Power supplies to be connected to the system have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 46

3.5 IDS TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Test shall ensure that the requisite degree of intrusion detection is provided. Initially, test each sensor and subsystem component individually. When the function of each component within a particular subsystem such as each sensor within a particular zone is verified, certify that subsystem of the entire IDS as satisfactorily meeting required specifications. Test each subsystem similarly until each detection zone has been certified. When subsystem certification is complete, test entire integrated system to ensure that subsystem elements are compatible and function as a complete system.

Integrated system test shall be accomplished in linear fashion, end-to-end, and shall verify that each simulated intrusion performed within each detection zone produces an appropriate alarm or signal. Integrated system test shall also verify that alarm is correctly annunciated at the local annunciator unit (where a local annunciator is shown on the plans) and the central alarm reporting and display unit. Provide for approval, not later than 30 days prior to formal inspection and test, a detailed operational test plan of how each component, subsystem, and entire ACAS will be tested. When tests are complete and corrections made, submit a signed and dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests

3.6 SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES A. Demonstrate functionality of each installed device. Refer to the requirements of Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

3.7 LABELING
A. Conform with the requirements of Section 27 05 53 – Identification for Communications Systems.

3.8 WARRANTY PERIOD SERVICE & ADJUSTMENT
A. Warranty

1. The ACAS shall be warranted by the contractor for one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion.

3.9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
A. The contractor shall provide all services required and equipment necessary to maintain the entire ACAS in an operational state as specified for a period of one (1) year after formal written acceptance of the system, and shall provide all necessary material required for performing scheduled adjustments or other nonscheduled work.

1. Description of Work
a. The adjustment and repair of ACAS includes computer equipment, contractor provided programming, software updates, signal transmission equipment, access control equipment, facility interfaces, and support equipment. Responsibility shall be limited to contractor installed equipment and programming. Provide the manufacturers required adjustments, re-programming of deficient contractor programmed functions and other work as necessary.

2. Personnel
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS SECTION 28 1300- 47
a. Service personnel shall be qualified to accomplish all work promptly and satisfactorily. Provide proof that Service personnel have successfully completed the appropriate level of both hardware and software training offered by the system manufacturer. The City's Representative shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative and of any change in personnel.

3. Inspections
a. The contractor shall perform two inspections at six (6) month intervals or more often if required by the manufacturers. This work shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday, excluding Federal holidays. These inspections shall include:
b. Visual checks and operational tests of the central processor, local processors, monitors, keyboards, system printers, peripheral equipment, ACAS equipment, power supplies, and electrical and mechanical controls.
c. Clean system equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces. d. Perform diagnostics on all equipment.
e. Check and calibrate each ACAS device.
f. Run system software and correct diagnosed problems.
g. Resolve previous outstanding problems.

3.10 WARRANTY SERVICE

1. The City's Representative shall initiate service calls when the ACAS is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete ACAS.

2. The City's Representative shall be furnished with the telephone number where the contractor’s service supervisor can be reached at all times.

3. Service personnel shall be at the site within four (4) hours after receiving a request for service.

4. The ACAS shall be restored to proper operating condition after one (1) calendar day.

5. Materials installed during warranty service to match or exceed specification of products originally installed for the specified function.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-1
SECTION 28 2300 - VISUAL SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. Section Includes (but is not necessarily limited to):

1. Video Surveillance System.
a. Miniature fixed view indoor and self-illuminated TCP/IP outdoor dome cameras, including 180 and 360 degree view Multiview indoor and outdoor cameras.
b. Class 2 Powering of Cameras where required.

2. Network Video Recorder (NVR) based Video Management System (VMS). a. Network video recording system mounted in R28 cabinet installed in IT Room 116 under the work of the Project
b. NVR licensing to enable recording of cameras installed under the work of this Project on the VMS provided under the work of this Project plus 15%.

B. Related Work in Other Sections:

1. Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security a. Submittals required of the work of this section.
b. Miscellaneous parts and execution standards for the work of this Section.

2. Section 28 05 13 - Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security a. Cabling products and execution standards for the work of this Section.

3. Section 28 05 28
a. Provides raceway and backboxes for the work of this Section.

4. Section 28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm
a. Provides access control and alarm system that work of this Section integrates with.

1.2 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A. The Sacramento Public Library supplies the POE enabled Ethernet Switches and related building Ethernet networking hardware used to transmit the packets generated by the cameras installed under the work of this Project.

B. The Sacramento Public Library provides the desktop workstations running Microsoft Windows 10 used to monitor the images captured by the work of this Section.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-2

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the requirements of Section 01 33 23 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples and Section 28 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Video Surveillance Systems:

1. Technical Performance:
a. TCP/IP: System demonstrates full conformance with 3rd party alarming and motion detection at remote monitoring headend using ONVIF Software (Open Network Video Interface Forum) Protocol. b. IP Cameras: Meet Manufacturers performance specification.

2. Functional Performance:
a. Monitor and Display
1) Remote monitoring and reviewing of recorded images by persons using:
a) Sacramento Public Library’sLocal and Wide Area
Network.
b) Local Area Network using Sacramento Public Library
furnished network switching, and cabling provided by
the work of this Project.
2) Provide images suitable for making identification of persons under lighting conditions resulting from the work of this Project. 3) For indicated cameras, provide “people counter” functionality. b. Record
1) Record video streams using network video recorder provided under the work of this Project
c. Monitoring points
1) To be determined in conjunction with City’s Representative.

3. Uninterrupted Power System: For systems deriving camera power from power supplies installed under the work of this Project, sustain system operation for 2 hours following loss of power.

1.5 COORDINATE

1. Coordinate intended camera locations with the work of the Other Trades and the work of Section 28 05 28 – Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security to ensure field conditions do not result in obscuring the intended camera view(s).

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-3

1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer additionally to Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

B. Abbreviations used in this Section

1. ACS – Access Control System

2. AES: Advanced Encryption Standard

3. AGC: Automatic gain control

4. ALPR – License Plate Recognition

5. API: Application Programming Interface

6. Aspect ratio: A ratio of width to height in images

7. Bit Rate: The number of bits/time unit sent over a network

8. Bonjour: Enables automatic discovery of computers, devices, and services on IP networks.

9. CSA – Client Software Application

10. DGM – Dynamic Graphical Maps

11. DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

12. DNS: Domain Name System

13. DVS – Digital Video Server

14. EIS: Electronic Image Stabilization

15. FPS: Frames per Second

16. FTP: File Transfer Protocol

17. H.264 (Video Compression Format)

18. IEEE 802.1x: Authentication framework for network devices

19. IP: Internet Protocol

20. IR light: Infrared light

21. ISO: International Standards Organization

22. JPEG: Joint Photographic Experts Group (image format)

23. LAN: Local Area Network

24. LED: Light Emitting Diode

25. LPR: License Plate Recognition

26. Lux: A standard unit of illumination measurement

27. MBR: Maximum Bit Rate
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-4

28. MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group

29. Multicast: Communication between a single sender and multiple receivers on a network

30. NTP: Network Time Protocol

31. NTSC: National Television System Committee – a color encoding system based on 60Hz

32. ONVIF: Global standard for the interface of IP-based physical security products

33. PACS: Physical Access Control System

34. PAL: Phase Alternating Line – a color encoding system based on 50Hz

35. PTZ: Pan/Tilt/Zoom

36. PoE: Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af/at) standard for providing power over network cable

37. Progressive scan: An image scanning technology which scans the entire picture

38. QoS: Quality of Service

39. RAID: Redundant Array of Independent Disks

40. SDK – Software Development Kit

41. SIP: Session Initiation Protocol

42. SMA – Software Maintenance Agreement

43. SMPTE: Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

44. SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

45. SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol

46. SSL: Secure Sockets Layer

47. SSM – Server Software Module

48. SaaS: Software as a Service

49. TCP: Transmission Control Protocol

50. TLS: Transport Layer Security

51. UI – User Interface

52. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply

53. UPnP: Universal Plug and Play

54. USP – Unified Security Platform

55. USW – Unified Web Client

56. Unicast: Communication between a single sender and single receiver on a network
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-5

57. VBR: Variable Bit Rate

58. VMS – Video Management System

59. VMS: Video Management System

60. WDR: Wide dynamic range

1.7 LABELING AND DOCUMENTATION
A. Label the finished installation. Label each cable at each end uniquely using a Brady or similar cable labeling system.

B. Document the camera locations on a floor plan using CAD. Assign each camera a unique ID identical with those applied at the NVR and use this identification on the floor plans.

Indicate the head end rack location and the major wiring runs. Provide a single-line diagram of the installed system. Submit PDF copies of the as built drawing documentation. In addition, submit electronic copies of the CAD files for the City's use.

Submit electronic files on a media type determined by the City.

C. Prepare and provide a hard copy and an electronic copy of an O&M manual for for the completed installation. Hard copy to be provided in a three ring binder. The electronic copy to be submitted on a PDF on a media determined by the City's Representative.

1.8 TRAINING
A. Train the City's Representatives in operation of the installed video management system provide at least two hours classroom type training in the theory and operation of the VMS system and provide up to four hours support for the initial systems operator during first use. Document the training using a camera and video recorder and provide a copy of the recorded training to the City for future reference and use in training new staff.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test Equipment - provide for the purposes of quality assurance as described in Section 28 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security.

1. Network Packet Analyzer: (Fluke, Wireshark)

2. Waveform/Vector Monitor.

3. Portable High Resolution Color Picture Monitor (Marshall Electronics, ToteVision or equal).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE EQUIPMENT
A. General:

1. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components that are regularly manufactured and used in the manufacturer’s CCTV system.

2. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in production use for at least 60 days prior to the installation of this system.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-6

3. All CCTV active systems components shall be provided with the availability of a toll free, 24-hour technical assistance program from the manufacturer, which provides immediate technical assistance to the end user at no charge. Where supplied systems are only supported through dealer liaison with manufacturer, and the City’s Representative needs to speak with the VMS manufacturer during Contractor troubleshooting of integration, Contractor to initiate call under VMS SMA expanded through work of Project on City's behalf.

2.2 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Video Management System

1. Spec Reference(s): VMS, Storage Server

2. Minimum Features/Function/Construction:
a. Description: Video surveillance management software (referred to as “system” or “VMS”) supporting an unrestricted number of users, devices, servers and sites, with options for central surveillance operations and mobile devices.
b. System Architecture: The VMS shall consist of:
1) Servers: One or more VMS servers.
2) Physical or virtualized Windows servers.
3) Virtualized Windows servers, using:
a) Microsoft Hyper-V.
b) VMWare.
c. UPS provided to physical servers, network infrastructure and devices such as cameras.
d. Server Software Components: One or more Milestone XProtect software components, or software components made by others as noted, per VMS server.
1) Management Server: Central service component of the VMS responsible for handling system configuration, distributing the configuration to other system components, such as Recording Server services, and for facilitating user authentication. 2) Management Server Failover: A second server shall take over the Management Server function if the first server fails. a) Failover Management Server: Installation of the
Management Server service in a Microsoft Windows
Failover Cluster, or similar compatible third-party
software.
3) Recording Server: Service responsible for communications, recording and event handling for all devices (cameras, video and audio encoders, I/O modules, metadata sources, etc.), including:
a) Retrieving video, audio, metadata and I/O event streams from devices.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-7
b) Recording video, audio and metadata.
c) Providing access to live and recorded video, audio and metadata.
d) Transmit live audio from operator’s microphone to one or more camera speakers or supported IP speakers.
e) Providing access to device status.
f) Triggering system and video events on device failures, events, etc.
g) Writes video streams, audio streams and their metadata to a high-performance media database.
h) Performing motion detection and generate smart search metadata.
4) Event Server: Service that handles various tasks related to events, alarms, maps and third-party integrations via the Milestone Integration Platform Software Development Kit (MIP SDK).
5) Log Server: Service that writes all system, audit and rule- triggered log messages to database.
6) Service Channel: Service responsible for communicating the following:
a) Service and configuration messages to XProtect Smart Client.
7) XProtect Mobile Server: Service responsible for hosting the XProtect Web Client and for providing access to the VMS for XProtect Web Client and XProtect Mobile client users.
8) Milestone Open Network Bridge: Optional server, including Milestone Open Network Bridge service, Milestone RTSP
Bridge service, and the Milestone Open Network Bridge
Manager, plus 64-bit plug-in for Management Client. This is to enable private-to-public video integration.
9) DLNA Server: Service to enable display of live video on any DLNA compliant TV or displays without the need for additional equipment.
10) Microsoft SQL Server: Microsoft database server service for the Management Server, Event Server and Log Server services. 11) API Gateway: Service that provides a front-end and common entry point for RESTful API services on other VMS server components. Microsoft Active Directory: Active Directory is not required for single-site systems but is recommended for cyber security purposes.
e. PC or Laptop Workstations: One or more PCs or laptops for Milestone XProtect client software applications intended to run on Windows-based PCs and laptops.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-8
1) Management Client: The administration interface for all parts of the VMS, designed to be run remotely from, for example, an administrator’s computer.
2) XProtect Smart Client: Designed for day-to-day use by dedicated operators, to be run remotely on the operator’s computer.

XProtect Smart Client provides dedicated task-oriented tabs for Live Video, Video Playback, Search, plus dockable tabs for Alarm Monitor. XProtect Smart Client supports definable keyboard and joystick button shortcuts for frequently used actions, including window or camera selection.
3) XProtect Web Client: Browser-based application for the occasional or remote user that needs easy access to live video monitoring and audio listening with PTZ control including use of presets, and video and audio playback and export, with defined exports available for later usage or download.
f. Tablets or Smartphones: One or more tablets or smartphones using XProtect Web Client (see above) or XProtect Mobile client. 1) XProtect Mobile Client: Native mobile app for smartphone or tablet users, for easy access to live and playback of cameras, and to activate system events and outputs. Additionally, for use as a remote recording device by using the mobile device’s built-in camera, whereby video from the device’s camera is streamed back to the VMS and recorded like a standard camera.
g. Networks:
1) Multiple Network Segments: The VMS must support network segmentation into separate device, server and internet-connected networks.
2) Device Network: Local network whose capacity and
configuration are suitable for the level of video, audio and metadata data transmission established by the system design and its intended usage.
3) Server Network: Local network whose capacity and
configuration are suitable for the level of video data
transmission, systems integration, and user operations
established by the system design and its intended usage. 4) Internet-Connected Network: Internet-connected network providing connection to remote VMS sites and private-to-public connection via Milestone Open Network Bridge. This network is also used for remote user access via the XProtect Mobile Server. 5) Network Traversal:
a) Enable software clients to access Recording Server
services from outside a NAT firewall, by the use of
public addresses and port forwarding.
b) Provide Remote Connect Services that enable secure
remote connections to devices across different types of private and public networks.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-9
h. Multi-System Architectures: Provide the following architecture option for multi-site deployments:
1) Distributed Recording Server Services: Intended for sites with stable network connections between the central site and any number of remote sites.
a) Management Server at central site is providing user
authentication and authorization for all distributed
Recording Server services.
b) Each site has at least one Recording Server.
i. System Design Criteria
1) Scalability: Provide component-based system architecture to support scaling of VMS from small systems (up to 100 devices) to very large systems (several thousand devices) for single-site or multi-site deployment, whereby:
a) For Small Systems: All software components can be
installed on the same server if the server is able to handle the combined load.
b) For Large Systems: Software components can be
installed on separate dedicated servers to scale and
distribute the load.
2) Availability and High Performance: Provide the following capabilities to ensure high VMS availability and performance. a) Failover Recording Server: Provide hot and cold
Failover Recording Server capabilities.
b) Management Server, Event Server, Log Server, API
Gateway: Support Windows Server Failover Clustering,
or similar.
c) Storage solution shall be configured with RAID10 for Live database and RAID5 or RAID6 for archive
database.
3) Operating Systems: Provide server and client software applications that are native 64-bit Microsoft Windows
applications.
4) Network Addressing: Support both IPv4 and IPv6 addressing. 5) Video Standards: Provide simultaneous live streaming and recording of video from IP cameras and IP video encoders without any software limitations on the number of cameras per Recording Server, with support for the following codecs and options:
a) Codecs:
(1) H.264 and H.265
(2) MPEG-4 and MPEG-4 ASP
(3) MJPEG
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-10
(4) MxPEG
b) Options:
(1) Toggling between recording key frames only or
full video stream for MPEG-4, H.264 and H.265
video.
(2) Adjustable GOP length for MPEG-4, H.264 and
H.265 video.
(3) Toggle between recording full framerate from
the camera and any lower FPS for MJPEG
video.
6) Video De-Interlacing: Provide live video views with an adaptive de-interlacing option, to improve the quality of interlaced video, based on the actual video content received, for example, to smooth area of an image where object lines would otherwise appear as jagged lines.
7) Multi-Live Video Streaming: Provide multiple streams for live viewing using any combination of supported standards, video resolutions and frame rates.
8) Adaptive Streaming: Depending on the requested resolution, provide automatic selection between the video streams
configured for multi-live video streaming to these clients:
a) XProtect Smart Client: Live video streams from the
Recording Server to the XProtect Smart Client or
XProtect Smart Wall.
b) XProtect Web Client: Live video streams from the
XProtect Mobile Server to the XProtect Web Client.
c) XProtect Mobile Client: Live video streams from the
XProtect Mobile Server to the XProtect Mobile Client.
d) Direct Streaming: Provide live video streams in these codecs directly from the Mobile Server to clients without transcoding:
e) XProtect Web Client: Provide MJPEG and H.264 live
video streams.
f) XProtect Mobile Client: Provide H.264 and H.265 live video streams.
9) Audio Standards: Provide simultaneous digital two-way audio streaming and recording of audio from IP speaker and IP microphone devices without any software limitations on the number of devices per Recording Server, with support for the following codecs and options:
a) Codecs:
(1) AAC
(2) G711
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-11
(3) G726
b) Options:
(1) Playback of audio files on rule.
10) DLNA Support: Provide the ability to easily display live video from the installed cameras directly onto any modern consumer- grade TV supporting DLNA functionality.
11) Hardware Acceleration XProtect Smart Client: Provide the following hardware acceleration capabilities to offload Smart Client video processing from the computer CPU to dedicated hardware video processing capabilities:
a) NVIDIA GPU: Automatically detect and use all
available NVIDIA GPUs, for hardware accelerated
decoding, color correction, and scaling.
b) Intel Quick Sync: Automatically detect and use Intel Quick Sync Video GPU integrated into select Intel
processors for hardware accelerated decoding, color
correction, and scaling.
c) Provide the ability to use both NVIDIA and Intel GPUs at the same time and automatically load balance the
requests for optimal performance.
d) Provide the ability to show which GPU is used to decode which stream.
12) Hardware Acceleration Recording Server: Provide the following hardware acceleration capabilities to offload Recording Server video processing from the computer CPU to dedicated hardware video processing capabilities:
a) Intel Quick Sync: Automatically detect and use Intel Quick Sync Video GPU integrated into select Intel
processors for hardware accelerated decoding to enable
server-side motion detection.
13) Hardware Acceleration Mobile Server: Provide the following hardware acceleration capabilities to offload Mobile Server video processing from the computer CPU to dedicated hardware video processing capabilities:
a) NVIDIA GPU: Automatically detect and use all
available NVIDIA GPUs, for hardware accelerated
decoding to enable adaptive transcoding.
b) Intel Quick Sync: Automatically detect and use Intel Quick Sync Video GPU integrated into select Intel
processors for hardware accelerated decoding to enable
adaptive transcoding.
c) Provide the ability to use both NVIDIA and Intel GPUs at the same time and automatically load balance the
requests for optimal performance.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-12
14) Open Network Bridge Functionality: Provide access to live and recorded video, and the ability to control pan-tilt-zoom cameras in compliance with the relevant ONVIF Profile G and Profiles S standards.
15) Camera-Independent Motion Detection: Provide real-time, camera-independent motion detection with:
a) Configurable Sensitivity: Configurable and automatic motion-detection sensitivity per camera
b) Searchable Metadata: Searchable motion detection
metadata created during motion detection.
c) Exclusion Zones: Multiple motion exclusion zones
definable per camera to keep irrelevant motion from
triggering recording.
16) PTZ Control Priorities:
a) Provide 3 PTZ priority levels for control of rights
between different operators and automatic scanning and
patrolling schemes.
b) PTZ Scans and Patrols shall pause for higher-priority manual or event-based camera control, and resume after
manual session timeout and completion of event camera
control period.
17) Configurable Pre-Buffering: Provide pre-buffering with variable buffer length, with the ability to place buffer on disk or in memory.
18) Device Video Quality Optimization: Provide video quality optimized per available bandwidth, device screen resolution, and camera view window sizes in these clients:
a) XProtect Smart Client Optimization:
(1) Switch between all configured live video
streams from the cameras to optimize bandwidth
consumption and workstation performance.
(2) Optimize viewing performance for remote
viewing according to the available bandwidth
and view layouts, maximizing video stream
quality per display capabilities of defined views.
b) XProtect Web Client and XProtect Mobile Client
Optimization: Optimize transcoding by capping video
stream resolution and frame rate for transmission to
XProtect Web Client and XProtect Mobile client.
19) Multiple Language Support: Provide support for multiple languages in these XProtect clients:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-13
a) Management Client User Interface: American English,
Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Danish,
French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese
(Brazilian), Russian, Spanish, Swedish and Turkish.
b) Management Client Built-In Help: American English,
Chinese (Simplified), French, German, Japanese, Korean
and Portuguese (Brazil).
c) XProtect Smart Client, XProtect Web Client and
XProtect Mobile Client User Interface: American
English, Arabic, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified),
Chinese (Traditional), Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch,
Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Hebrew, Hindi,
Hungarian, Icelandic, Italian, Japanese, Korean,
Norwegian (Bokmål), Polish, Portuguese (Brazilian),
Russian, Serbian, Slovak, Spanish, Swedish, Thai,
Turkish and Ukranian.
d) XProtect Smart Client Built-In Help: American English, Arabic, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional),
Czech, Danish, Dutch, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese (Brazilian),
Russian, Spanish, Swedish and Turkish.
e) XProtect Web Client and XProtect Mobile Client Built- In Help: American English, Danish and Japanese.
20) True Multi-Window Support: Provide true multi-window support in XProtect Smart Client whereby secondary windows have full functionality and can be operated in independent mode or synchronized mode where they follow the control of the main window.
21) System Capacities: Provide the following maximum capacities, constrained only by the physical performance capabilities of installed server hardware and network infrastructure:
a) Unrestricted devices.
b) Unrestricted client software users.
c) Unrestricted mobile devices.
d) Unrestricted client PCs or laptops.
e) Unrestricted servers.
f) Unrestricted sites.
g) Unrestricted system rules.
h) Unrestricted time profiles.
i) Three software client profiles.
j) Unrestricted media storage.
k) Recording rates of at least 30 FPS per camera, limited only by hardware capabilities.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-14
j. System Security
1) Control and Information Security: Provide the following data protection measures and user rights management capabilities in support of system confidentiality, integrity and availability:
a) Data in Transit: Encrypted communication between
servers and clients using secure communication CA
digital certificates.
b) HTTPS connections from Recording Server to devices
that support HTTPS connections.
c) Encrypted communication between the Recording Server and services that retrieve streaming data using customer- provided CA digital certificates for connections to the Recording Server.
d) Encrypted communication between the Management
Server and the Recording Server using customer-
provided CA digital certificates.
e) HTTPS connections from VMS clients, SDK clients and
services that support HTTPS connections to Recording
Server.
2) System Configuration Data: Provide password protection of the system configuration backup.
3) Off-Premises Live and Recorded Video in Transit: HTTPS connections must use trusted CA certificates and support HTTPS connections from:
a) Mobile Server to browser-based XProtect Web Client
and XProtect Mobile client app.
b) Open Network Bridge to remote public systems.
4) Data Integrity of Exported Video:
a) Export video in XProtect format that can only be viewed in the XProtect Smart Client — Player.
b) Per-export password protection for playback.
c) 256-bit AES encryption.
d) Digitally signed media exports with SHA-2 algorithm to establish a means of detecting modification of exported video.
e) XProtect Smart Client — Player’s Verify Signatures
function to validate authenticity of exported video
recording.
f) Option to prevent re-export of exported video.
5) Digital Certificates: Use of customer-provided CA digital certificates for connections to the Mobile Server.
6) Data Access Control: Provide:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-15
a) User profiles restricting device access and video
viewing, playback and export, including by day and
time-of-day.
b) Timestamped audit log of who logged in, viewed live or recorded video, or exported video.
7) User Authentication:
a) Log-in Options: Log-in authentication via:
(1) Microsoft Active Directory.
(2) Local Windows user accounts.
(3) External IDP using Open ID Connect to
facilitate single sign-on.
(4) Basic user system account (username and
password credentials).
(5) Ability for basic user to change password during
login.
(6) Ability for system administrator to enforce
password change during login.
(7) Ability to enforce password complexity.
(8) Dual authentication, a.k.a. two-person rule,
requiring two verified persons to gain access.
b) Auto-Log-In: Use of last used credentials for
authentication, with Auto-log-in and auto-restore of
camera views.
c) Kerberos Authentication: Provide strong authentication via Kerberos support.
d) User Rights Management: Provide common and central
detailed management of user rights across all user and
programmatic (SDK) interfaces, using roles, users, and
user groups:
(1) User Rights: Define roles, add and delete users,
manage permissions for roles, user groups and
users, generate user rights management reports.
(2) Roles: Defining roles establishes permissions
(also called “rights”) that determine which
system features may be accessed by users and
groups. Provide the following security settings
for roles:
(3) Role Info:
(4) General: Smart Client profiles, dual
authorization rights.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-16
(5) Applications: Login to XProtect Smart Client,
XProtect Web Client and XProtect Mobile
client.
(6) Anonymous PTZ Sessions: Enabling anonymous
user information for PTZ sessions.
(7) Users and Groups: Users and groups can be
assigned to multiple roles.
(8) Overall System Permissions: Globally allow or
deny permissions for servers, devices and
functions (such as manage, read, edit and
delete).
(9) Specific System Permissions: Allow permissions
for specific individual devices and functions:
(10) Cameras: Visibility, live view (within time
profile), playback (within time profile), search
sequences, smart search, export, manual
recording, bookmark functions, AUX
commands.
(11) Microphones and Speakers: Visibility, listen to
live audio (within time profile), playback audio
(within time profile), search sequences, export,
manual recording, bookmark functions.
(12) Inputs and Outputs: Visibility, activation.
(13) PTZ Control: Manual control, activate PTZ
presets, PTZ priority, manage PTZ presets and
patrolling.
(14) Speech: Speak to speakers, speak priority.
(15) Remote Recordings: Retrieve remote recordings.
(16) External Events: Visibility, edit, delete, trigger. (17) View Groups: Visibility, edit, delete, operate.
(18) Servers: Professional server access and
authentication details.
(19) Matrix: Visibility.
(20) Alarms: Manage, view, disable alarms, receive
notifications.
(21) MIP: Milestone Integration Platform plug-in
permissions.
8) Client Authentication: Provide Management Server
authentication and authorization of connecting clients (XProtect Smart Client, Management Client and MIP SDK clients) and use a session-limited access token for controlling access to the Recording Server.
9) System Hardening: System hardening guide that:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-17
a) Describes data security, network security and physical security measures and best practices for securing the
installed VMS against cyber-attacks. This includes
security considerations for the hardware and software of servers, clients and network device components of a
video surveillance system.
b) Incorporates standards-based and best-practice-based security and privacy controls and maps them to each
hardening recommendation.
(1) GDPR: The system must facilitate compliance to
GDPR:
(2) GDPR-Ready Certification: The VMS must
have a European Privacy Seal from GDPR ready
certificate.
(3) The vendor shall provide comprehensive guides
and templates to aid in configuring a GDPR
compliant system.
(4) The vendor shall have a clear and concise
privacy policy.
(5) The system shall provide warnings when use of
the system is at risk of going outside GDPR
compliance.
(6) Privacy by default: The VMS must have privacy
settings set by default.
(7) The system shall have audio data processing
disabled by default.
(8) The system shall have metadata, recording,
transmission, and other processing disabled by
default.
(9) The system shall have online map services
disabled by default.
(10) FIPS 140-2 compliant mode: The VMS has the
ability to operate in a FIPS 140-2 compliant
mode.
k. Logging
1) Provide logging of errors, warnings, system information, user activity, and logs about rules to a centralized database with time, date, and other related information. Logs provide multi-system support and configurable logging limits.
a) System Logs: Log all system related errors, warnings and system information, to be used for troubleshooting. b) Audit Logs: Log user activity in client applications including, but not limited to, user system access,
configuration changes and operator actions.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-18
c) Rule-Triggered Logs: Log rules in which the system
administrator has specified the “Make new log entry”
action.
d) Log Exporting: Logs can be exported as comma-
separated-values (.csv) files.
e) Log Filtering: Logs can be filtered based on time frame, source name, source type, user, user location, rule name, etc.
f) Log-Related Options: Settings can be changed about:
(1) Log retention time.
(2) Which levels (error, warning, and system
information) are logged.
(3) Log security.
l. System Functionality
1) Configuration Management:
a) Real-Time Configuration Change Application:

Immediately apply authorized changes of system
configuration data for all sites, including, but not limited to licenses, devices, rules, schedules, users, maps,
alarms, recording, client views, including while
recording is in operation.
b) Configuration Data Caching for Continued Operation:

Cached Recording Server configuration data shall ensure continuous operation of Recording Server during periods where the Management Server is inaccessible.
c) Backup and Restore: Built-in backup and restore support for manual system backup of all configuration data,
including but not limited to:
(1) All system configuration data.
(2) Full device configuration data.
(3) Maps.
(4) Alarm settings and definitions.
(5) Software client views.
(6) User-defined rules and events. Defined video
bookmarks.
d) Configuration Reporting: Provide complete or partial documentation of system configuration, including
custom and site-specific free-text information,
contractor’s notes and option for logo inclusion.
2) Application Workspace Optimization:
a) Options for optimizing application workspaces in the Management Client software:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-19
(1) Application Layout: Rearranging layout via
drag-and-drop.
b) Options for optimizing application workspaces in the XProtect Smart Client software:
(1) General: Control general look and feel and
navigation properties, such as color mode,
camera title bar, grid sizes.
(2) Personal or Centrally Enforced: Optimization
can either be made as individual personalization
managed by each operator, or centrally enforced
using Smart Client profiles.
(3) View Layouts: Availability of specific view
layouts enforced using Smart Client profiles.
(4) Themes: User interface color schemes enabling
user choice of dark or light themes.
(5) Control Panes Availability: Control availability
of control panes and functions in live and
playback tabs, and in setup mode.
(6) Timeline Information: Control information
included in timeline in playback tab.
(7) Export Behavior: Control behavior and
availability of export function.
(8) Keyboard and Joystick Setup: Setup of keyboard
short cuts and joystick controls.
(9) Alarm and Access Control Notifications:

Control behavior of alarms and access control
notifications.
(10) Application Language: Control application
language.
(11) Advanced Application Settings: Control
advanced application settings such as use of
hardware acceleration, videos diagnostics
overlay and time zone settings.
3) Device Discovery and Management:
a) Add Hardware wizard to automatically discover and
upon approval add devices to system using Universal
Plug and Play (UPnP) discovery, IP network range
scanning, or manual device detection. User ability to
perform initial setup of credentials on devices without factory default credentials detected. Must be supported for Axis, Bosch, Hanwha Techwin, and for ONVIF
profile Q conformant devices.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-20
b) Replace Hardware wizard for swift replacement of
malfunctioning devices with preservation of
configuration settings and recordings, including those
for attached cameras, microphones, speakers, inputs,
outputs and metadata devices.
c) Move Hardware wizard for moving devices and related
devices from one Recording Server to another during
runtime with no loss of settings, recordings, rules,
permissions etc.
d) User ability to enable and disable devices for purposes of maintenance or temporary deactivation.
e) User ability to change the password of one or multiple devices based on a pre-configured time interval. Must be supported for Axis, Bosch, Canon, Hanwha Techwin,
Hikvision, Panasonic, Sony and ONVIF-compliant
devices.
f) User ability to see the firmware version of each device. g) User ability to update information about the firmware and features available for a device.
h) User ability to upgrade the firmware of single devices.

Must be supported for Axis, Bosh, Hanwha, Techwin
and ONVIF.
i) For ONVIF Profile T & Q compliant devices. User
ability to manage a VMS user account that
communicates with a device. Add a user, list an existing user, and delete a user.
j) For ONVIF Profile T & Q compliant devices. User
ability to manage network configuration. Change IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
4) Camera Image and Video Stream Management: Adjustment of per-camera and per-video stream settings, with each camera allowed one or more streams for live viewing and one stream for recording, including an optional per-camera or per-camera-group preview window:
a) Per Camera:
(1) General Settings: Change all camera specific
general settings such as brightness, color level,
compression, maximum bit rate, resolution and
image rotation.
(2) Camera Video Stream Settings: Define as many
different streams as specific camera support.

Change individual stream settings such as FPS,
resolution, image quality, video encoding format
and resolution.
b) Per Camera Group:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-21
(1) General Settings: Change all common camera
specific general settings for the camera group
such as brightness, color level, compression,
maximum bit rate, resolution and image rotation.
(2) Camera Video Stream Settings: Define as many
different streams as specific camera support for
the camera group. Change individual stream
settings such as FPS, resolution, image quality,
video encoding format and resolution.
(3) One camera can be associated to multiple
camera groups.
c) Video Streams: Define one camera video stream used for recording and one camera video stream to be used for
live viewing.
d) Recording: Manage recording functionality including:
(1) Related device recording.
(2) Manual recording timer.
(3) Pre-buffer use.
(4) Recording framerate.
(5) Media storage assignment.
(6) Automatic retrieval of edge recordings.
e) Fisheye Lens Viewing: Capability for fisheye lens
camera views provided through utilization of the
ImmerVision Enables panomorph lens technology. Other
lenses than ImmerVision can be supported by using a
generic dewarping lens profile or a third-party plug-in. f) Motion Detection: Manage motion detection
functionality including:
(1) Motion sensitivity.
(2) Processing all frames or keyframes only.
(3) Generation of motion metadata for smart search.
(4) Exclusion zones.
g) Camera Events: Define which camera events will be
forwarded to the VMS.
h) Client Settings: Define client related functionality including:
(1) Related devices.
(2) Keyboard shortcut.
i) Privacy Masks: Permanent and liftable system-defined camera image privacy masks hide certain areas in the
camera image for live view, recording, and video export.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-22
(1) Permanent Masks: Allow a system admin to
mask areas in cameras at all times and for all
users. Permanently masked areas cannot be
revealed once recorded.
(2) Liftable Masks: Allows a system admin to
establish default mask areas in cameras at all
times and for all users, but with the option to
sufficiently privileged operators to temporarily
remove the masks for authorized users if needed
– such as during investigation.
(3) Masking Level: When establishing a privacy
mask, system admins may select a mask level on
a scale between ‘light blur’ to ‘solid grey’.
m. PTZ Camera Control: Camera-based and system-based PTZ camera control including the following capabilities.
1) Camera PTZ preset positions: Camera-based PTZ presets may be imported from the camera and renamed for use in system-based manual and automatic PTZ control.
2) Automated Use of PTZ Presets: Scheduled and event-based rules capability to move PTZ cameras to pre-set positions.
3) System-Based PTZ Preset Positions: System-based PTZ presets are definable for use in system-based manual and automatic PTZ control.
4) PTZ Patrolling: Multiple per-camera PTZ patrolling schemes may be defined with the following options:
a) Adjustable wait times between preset position changes. b) Disabling of motion detection to avoid false detection alarms.
c) Multiple patrolling schedules per camera per day, with different schedule for days, nights and weekends.
n. Event and Alarm Management
1) Rules Engine: Provide rules for automating of different aspects of the system, including camera control, system behavior and external devices, based on events or time profiles, or a combination of events and time profiles.
a) Trigger Events: Provide a Microsoft-Outlook-style
configuration dialog where pre-defined and custom-
defined events are used in rules to trigger actions.
(1) Event Categories: Organize events into the
following categories:
(2) Hardware: Physical hardware devices connected
to the system.
(3) Devices: Certain functions and states of devices
available via connected hardware devices.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-23
(4) External: Relating to VMS integrations.
(5) Recording Server: Archiving and database
functions.
(6) Analytics: From integrated analytics
applications and systems.
(7) User-Defined: Custom-configured events
enabling users to manually trigger actions and
events in the system.
b) Start Actions: Triggering events may initiate a wide set of system actions, including, but not limited to:
(1) Control start and stop of recording, including
scheduled and event-based recording.
(2) Change camera stream properties.
(3) PTZ camera preset positions and patrols.
(4) Event-based notifications, including email
notifications to single or multiple recipients with
optional attachment of a camera still image or
AVI video clip.
(5) External system interactions.
(6) Play pre-recorded audio.
(7) Retrieve video and audio from edge storage
devices.
(8) Single rule allows for executing multiple system
actions.
(9) Rule actions shall be triggered by event, time
interval or a combination of event and time.
(10) Rules shall be optionally stopped by event or
after a specified time.
(11) Unrestricted number of rules.
2) Time Profiles: Provide the following time profile functionality for use with profiles, rules and triggers:
a) Time profiles contain one, or more, single or recurring periods of time.
b) A single time period may span one or more days,
defined by a starting date and time and an ending date
and time.
c) A recurring period of time is defined as a time range with recurrence pattern and range:
(1) Time range is a starting and ending time within a
day.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-24
(2) Recurrence pattern may be Daily, Weekly,
Monthly or Yearly.
(3) Recurrent range is a starting and ending date, or
a starting date with a duration in days.
d) Unrestricted number of time profiles.
3) Single-Point Event/Alarm Management: Provide central management of all internal system alarms and external security alarms. Events are pre-defined or user-specified incidents on the VMS that can be set up to trigger an alarm, including analytics events and manual control actions. Event and alarm management capabilities shall include but not be limited to:
a) Alarm Data Settings:
(1) Customizable alarm priorities, statuses and
categories to enable alignment of the alarm
handling workflow with existing workflows and
security systems.
(2) Optional sound notifications for different alarm
priorities for notification of new incoming
alarms.
(3) Manage which alarm priorities trigger desktop
notifications for alarms.
(4) Manage which alarm data are shown in the
Alarm Manager, including but not limited to:
(5) ID.
(6) Image.
(7) Location.
(8) Message.
(9) Owner.
(10) Priority Level.
(11) Source.
(12) State Level.
(13) State Name.
(14) Time.
b) Optional Reasons for Closing to be chosen when an
alarm is closed.
c) Add audio files in wav-format to be used as alarm
notification sounds.
d) Manage how long alarms instances are kept in the
system before being automatically deleted.
e) Alarm Configuration:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-25
(1) User-definable alarm descriptions and work
instructions.
(2) Select triggering event and source.
(3) Alarm time profiles specifying that response
actions must take place within the specified time
profile.
(4) Select start and stop events specifying that
response actions must take place within the
specified event window.
(5) Select a user defined event to be triggered if an
alarm is not acknowledged within a defined time
limit.
(6) Association of alarms with one or more cameras,
with automatic display of camera video in the
alarm preview window, with a minimum of 15
cameras showing simultaneously in the alarm
preview window.
(7) Association of alarms to maps.
(8) Association of initial alarm owner (individual
user or group) and priority.
(9) Association of alarm category.
(10) Select user defined event to be triggered by the
alarm.
(11) Enable or disable desktop notifications for
alarms.
f) Alarm Manager:
(1) Alarm list with extensive sorting and filtering
capabilities.
(2) Instant preview of recorded video from primary
and related cameras, at the time of the incident.
(3) Thumbnail image from primary camera, at the
time of the incident.
(4) Alarm disabling option shall enable users to
suppress alarms from a given device for a
specified time period.
(5) Alarm handling reports providing information
about alarm inflow and alarm handling
performance.
g) Alarm Handling:
(1) Instant preview live video of primary camera.
(2) Instant preview of recorded video from primary
and related cameras, at the time of the incident.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-26
(3) Option to select any related cameras to be
displayed in the live and playback view items.
(4) Present the alarm work instructions.
(5) Change priority and status of the alarm.
(6) Alarm escalation with option to forward alarms
to operators with appropriate skills to handle
specific types of alarms.
(7) Present time logged alarm activities.
(8) Add time logged comments to the alarm
incident.
(9) Desktop notifications shall allow immediate
access to alarm handling.
4) Map Integration:
a) Present incident location automatically on the map
allowing operators to view and acknowledge active
alarms.
5) All other map functionality must be available when viewing maps in the Alarm Manager. XProtect Web Client: Provide the following alarm list, alarm handling and investigation
functionality:
a) Alarm List:
(1) Alarm list with filtering capabilities:
(2) All or personal alarms.
(3) All or specific alarm states.
(4) All or specific alarm priorities.
b) Thumbnail image from primary camera, at the time of
the incident.
c) Click to handle alarm.
6) Alarm Handling:
a) Instant preview of recorded video from primary and
related cameras, at the time of the incident. Available incoming audio for cameras that have related
microphones.
b) Present the alarm work instructions.
c) Change priority and status of the alarm.
d) Alarm escalation with option to forward alarms to
operators with appropriate skills to handle specific types of alarms.
7) XProtect Mobile Client: Provide the following alarm
notification, alarm list, alarm handling and investigation functionality:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-27
a) Alarm Notification: Receive alarm notifications using Push Notifications. Notifications include access to:
(1) Video.
(2) Alarm information.
(3) Work instructions.
b) Alarm List:
(1) Alarm list with filtering capabilities:
(2) All or personal alarms.
(3) All or specific alarm states.
(4) All or specific alarm priorities.
(5) Thumbnail image from primary camera, at the
time of the incident.
(6) Click to handle alarm.
c) Alarm Handling:
(1) Instant preview of recorded video from primary
and related cameras, at the time of the incident.
(2) Present the alarm work instructions.
(3) Change priority and status of the alarm.
(4) Alarm escalation with option to forward alarms
to operators with appropriate skills to handle
specific types of alarms.
o. Video Processing and Viewing
1) Multiple Monitor Support: Support multiple monitors where each monitor shall show multiple floating or full-screen windows for display of views or individual view items.
2) View Window Aspect Ratios: Support multiple views optimized for 4:3 and 16:9 display settings in both landscape and portrait orientations.
3) Private or Shared Views: Private views can only be access by the user who created them. Views may be shared generally and available to all roles or restricted to specific roles. Viewing of a content item in a shared view is subject to the viewer’s permissions relating to the content item.
4) View Groups: View groups facilitate view navigation and simplify searching across multiple views by narrowing search scope.
5) View Layout Persistence: Same view layout in both live and playback modes.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-28
6) View Arrange and Restore: Support simple drag-and-drop re- arrangement of cameras in views for optimized monitoring of incidents, including replacement of individual cameras with different cameras, with single-click restore of original view layout.
7) View Creation: Views that display up to 100 view items including cameras, web pages, still images, text and interactive items. View capabilities include, but are not limited to:
a) Camera View Item: Live and recorded camera video
displayed in resizable view windows, utilized in several workspaces within the application. Each camera view
item contains the following:
(1) Video Status Indicator: A round dot indicating
one of four states:
(2) Green: A connection to the camera is
established.
(3) Red: Video from the camera is being recorded.
(4) Yellow: Playing back recorded video.
(5) Gray: The video has not changed for more than
two seconds.
b) Motion Indicator: An icon of a moving person that
appears only when motion is detected since it was last
cleared.
c) Bounding-Box Display: Display of metadata bounding
boxes as provided by supported cameras and integrated
analytics in live and playback views.
d) Update on motion only: Optimizes CPU use by allowing motion detection to control whether the image should be decoded and displayed.
e) PTZ Camera View Item: PTZ camera view item can be
configured to provide virtual joystick camera control and PTZ navigation overlay buttons on the video image.
f) Overlay Buttons: Used to add manually controlled
speakers, events, outputs, PTZ cameras and to start/stop recording.
8) Carousel: Allow a specific view item to automatically sequence rotate through pre-defined set of cameras that are not necessarily present in the view at the same time. Operators may select default or custom display times for each camera, and they are able to manually switch to the next or previous camera in the carousel list.
9) Hotspot: Global hotspot function shall allow users to work in detail with any camera selected from any view. Local hotspot function shall allow users to work in detail with a camera selected from the same view.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-29
10) HTML Page: Show interactive HTML page.
a) Image: Show a still image.
b) Matrix: Shows live video from multiple cameras in any view layout with customizable rotation paths, remotely
controlled by the computers sending matrix remote
commands.
c) Navigable Map Pages: Static or active map pages may
be used to provide a good overview of premises, and for switching between different views, such as map page
displaying a floor plan.
d) Text: Add text.
e) 3rd party plug-ins: Add 3rd party plug-ins to extend the behavior of XProtect Smart Client.
11) Live Video: Views provide camera live viewing capabilities including, but not limited to:
a) Live Viewing: View live video of camera view items on the Live tab.
b) Manual PTZ Control: Manual PTZ control options:
(1) Video overlaid PTZ control.
(2) Joystick.
(3) Virtual joystick function.
(4) PTZ point-and-click control.
(5) PTZ preset positions.
(6) Overlay buttons to activate PTZ preset positions.
(7) PTZ zoom to a defined rectangle.
(8) Start, stop, and pause patrolling.
(9) View who have PTZ control and time to
automatic release, including anonymous users.
c) Send Video to Destination: Option to send current
camera to the following destinations:
(1) View item in an existing window.
(2) New floating window.
d) Digital Zoom: Magnification of video to facilitate detail viewing.
e) Bookmarks: Create quick or detailed bookmarks, to
facilitate incident review and documentation.
(1) System generated headline for quick bookmark.
(2) Optional headline and description information
for detailed bookmark.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-30
f) Independent Video Playback:
(1) Playback of video in multiple camera view
items, each on its own independent timeline.
(2) Option to initiate playback mode and
synchronizing playback timeline with current
time in independent playback.
g) Instant Change of Camera: Drag-and-drop placement of a different camera in a camera view item, instantly
changes the content to video from the new camera,
according to the camera view item’s current timeline
position.
h) Centralized Search: Initiate Centralized Search for the camera in a new window.
i) Manual Recording: Start and stop manual recording with automatic stop of recording after a configurable number of minutes.
12) Video Playback: Views provide additional camera playback capabilities including, but not limited to:
a) Playback: Time synchronized play back video of camera view items on the Playback tab.
b) Navigation: Advanced video navigation includes:
(1) Forward and backwards playback at different
speeds:
(2) Playback Speeds: ¼x, ½x, 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.
(3) Instant Realtime Speed: Toggle 1x playback
speed or selected playback speed.
(4) Forward and backwards frame-by-frame.
(5) Skip to next or previous recorded sequence.
(6) Skip to beginning or end of recordings.
(7) Jump to date/time.
c) Timeline: An overview of recorded sequences and
bookmarks via integrated video timeline with time
navigation and playback controls, including the
following functionality:
(1) Timeline Video Playback: Video from multiple
camera view items integrated to a common
video timeline, with common timeline control
from any of the integrated camera view item.
(2) Single and Consolidated Timeline: Two
timelines with the first showing overview of
selected camera view item and second showing a
consolidated overview of all camera view items
in the view.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-31
(3) Timeline Period: Select which period timeline
covers.
(4) 5, 10, 20 minutes.
(5) 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 hours.
(6) 1, 2, 4 days.
(7) 1, 2, 4 weeks.
(8) Recorded Sequences Overview: Recorded
sequences of video and audio are shown in the
timeline. The timeline displaying light-red to
indicate recording, red for motion, light-green
for incoming audio, and green for outgoing
audio. If there are additional sources of data
available, these are displayed as other colors.
(9) Bookmarks Overview: Bookmarks are shown in
the timeline with instant preview of the recorded
video.
(10) Integrated Time Interval Selection: Integrated
function to select a time interval for export or
video and audio retrieval from edge storage
devices.
(11) Visual selection on timeline.
(12) Select start and end date/time.
(13) Loop selected period on playback.
(14) Multi-Window Timeline: Ability to use one
timeline to control playback of cameras in
multiple view windows.
d) Recording Search: Search listing of camera sequences or bookmarks.
(1) Preview: Search results may be previewed.
(2) Print: Print of still image from the selected video clip may be initiated.
(3) Export: Export of selected video clips may be
initiated, reducing time needed to prepare
forensic video material.
13) Two-Way Audio: Audio from cameras with built-in or attached microphones can be configured for listening. Camera built-in or attached speakers can be configured for use to talk to individuals near speakers. Additional capabilities include:
a) Broadcast: Broad announcements can be made by
selecting the All Speakers option when talking.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-32
b) Lock to Selected Audio Devices: Enables continued use of microphones and speakers from selected cameras,
while viewing video from a different set of cameras.

This enables, for example, informing an individual at
risk about the safety status of nearby areas.
c) Level Meter: Level meter indicates the volume of the speaking operator’s voice, to indicate whether the
operator is at a correct distance from the microphone.
14) Centralized Search: Shall enable users to apply search categories and filters to find recording sequences, recordings with motion and bookmarks. From the search results, users shall be able to preview video and perform various actions, e.g. by exporting the search results or sending the search results to PDF. The search results shall be presented instantly as thumbnail images:
a) Sequence Search: Search in recording sequences on one or more cameras.
b) Motion Search: Search for sequences with motion, or
Smart Search for motion in selected areas on one or
more cameras.
c) Bookmark Search: Search for bookmark headlines or
descriptions.
d) Navigation: Ability to jump to search results through a clickable timeline, or the ability to scroll through the search results.
e) Preview: Selected sequence previews with auto play and direct export support.
15) Video Export and Documentation: Smart Client options for video export and documentation include, but are not limited to:
a) Snapshot: Produce instant visual documentation of a
camera by saving the camera image to a file.
b) Print: Produce instant visual documentation of a camera by sending it directly to a printer.
c) Storyboarding: The storyboarding function makes it
possible to include video sequences from different or
overlapping time intervals from different cameras in the one and the same export.
d) Export XProtect Format: Export in XProtect format;
including the standalone XProtect Smart Client —
Player application for simple instant viewing by
authorities.
e) Export Preview: Review video just prior to export, with looped playback option.
f) Export Other Formats: Create evidence material in
media player format (AVI files), MKV format, or still
image format (JPEG images).

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-33
g) Re-Export: Re-Export allows an authorized individual to export a digitally signed selection from the original
video exported. Option to disable re-export, during
initial export to XProtect format, prevents undesirable re-distribution of sensitive video recordings.
h) Bulk Export: In a single step, export in multiple formats to multiple destinations, including direct export to
optical media, to ensure consistency across exported
video sequences in various formats, and reduce human
error possibilities.
i) Export of Comments: Two video formats support
inclusion of comments in exported video:
(1) XProtect Format: Include general and/or
camera-specific comments to a video export file.
(2) Media Player Format: Include comments as
pre/post slides.
j) Video Incident Report Printing: Utilize still images rather than clips to print incident reports including
images, surveillance details and free-text user comments. p. Maps
1) Maps: Provide multi-layered physical overview of surveillance video coverage, with interactive access to and control of the VMS and related devices, including the following elements:
a) Map Images: Illustrated maps or photographs. Supported image file formats are: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG,
TIF, TIFF, and WMP.
2) Camera Icons: Indicate camera locations on the map. Fixed camera icons show camera view as colored angle radiating from the camera. PTZ camera icons show preset camera views as colored angles radiating from the camera.
a) Live Preview: Hover mouse pointer over camera icon to display a live preview in a resizable window.
b) PTZ Preset Navigation: Click on PTZ preset view zone moves camera to the preset position.
3) Microphone Icons: Microphone icons show microphone
locations on the map.
a) Live Listening: Place mouse over microphone icon;
press and hold left mouse button to listen to incoming
audio from microphone.
4) Speaker Icons: Indicate speaker locations on the map. a) Live Speaking: Place mouse over speaker icon; press
and hold left mouse button to talk through speaker.
5) Control Icons: Icons to use for control of objects such as doors, gates, and lights.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-34
6) Hot Zones: Hot zones to provide vertical navigation through a hierarchy of maps by clicking on a hot zone.
7) Map Overview Window: Navigable overview of map hierarchy set up in XProtect Smart Client.
8) Map Image Updates: When map images are replaced by an updated version of the map image of the same scale, map icons and other elements are kept in their original locations. 9) Map Display Information: Information display options include but are not limited to:
a) Real-time status monitoring indication from all system components including cameras, I/O devices and system
servers.
b) Graphical visualization of the system status through color coding.
c) Hierarchical propagation of status indications to higher ordered maps.
d) Different levels of status indications available (alarm, warning and errors).
e) System performance data for cameras and servers
including camera resolution, FPS, network use and disk
space.
f) Ability to suppress status indications (such as alarms and operational status) for a given device.
g) Editable device names in map and map-specific names
and references assignable to devices in Map, subject to user permissions.
q. Media Storage Management
1) Provide multiple media storage containers definable with the following characteristics:
a) Container: Each container consists of a live database and optionally one archive database, with container-specific archiving scheme and retention times. Archive database
can reside on the same disk as the live database or on
secondary disk or network drive.
b) Capacity: Maximum recording capacity shall be limited only by available disk space or configured container
storage limit.
c) Device Assignment: Recording of each device is
assigned to a specific storage container. The assigned
storage container for a device or group of devices may
be changed from one container to another.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-35
d) Archiving: Recorded video data may be automatically
moved from a container’s live database storage to its
archived storage. Archived data is still online and
available to client software.
e) Maximum Recording Times: Maximum recording times
may be set for manual recordings, with VMS deleting
older video to free up storage for newer video.
2) Edge Video Storage: Provide utilization of camera-based storage including the following capabilities:
a) Video and Audio Retrieval: Retrieving video and audio recordings across low-bandwidth connections based on
time profiles, events or manual requests.
b) Video and Audio Consolidation: Consolidating video
and audio from multiple storage mechanisms:
(1) Seamless merging of video and audio stored
centrally in media database, and video and audio
retrieved from associated camera edge storage,
or from an interconnected system.
(2) Optionally consolidate pre-event images
recorded locally in camera or video encoder.
c) Scalable Video Quality Recording (SVQR): Capability
to record high quality video using edge storage and
record low quality video centrally, to minimize network bandwidth utilization, using the capabilities described above. High quality video can be retrieved when needed, on an event-driven, scheduled or manual basis.
r. XProtect Mobile Server
1) User Authentication: Facilitate the following methods of user authentication:
a) Basic Authentication: Basic user VMS account.
b) Windows Authentication: Via Active Directory or local Windows user account. Possible to use current Windows
user to facilitate single sign-on.
2) Direct Streaming: Configure the use of client requested live video streams without server transcoding.
3) Adaptive Streaming: Configure the use of automatic live video streams selection depending on the resolution requested by the client.
4) Dynamic Bandwidth Optimization: Optimize camera video stream from server to client to make optimum use of bandwidth. 5) Bookmarks: Enable the use of bookmarks in live video and recorded video.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-36
6) Smart Connect: Easy configuration of internet access to the Mobile Server by automatic configuration of firewalls and internet routers via UPnP, with verification of configuration and operation of internet connection, with option to email connection details to XProtect Mobile client users. Includes automatic Mobile Server on LAN via UPnP.
s. XProtect Web Client
1) Provide the following browser-based capabilities:
a) User Authentication:
(1) Require only username and password.
(2) Enable basic users to change password during
login.
b) User authentication and authorization is handled by
XProtect Mobile Server.
c) Inherit System Views: Automatically obtain the user’s private and shared views configuration from the system. d) All-Camera View: Automatically generate a view for all cameras when no views are set up.
e) Two-Way Audio: Audio from cameras with built-in or
attached microphones can be configured for listening.

Camera built-in or attached speakers can be configured
for use to talk to individuals near speakers. Audio
playback shall be available for investigations, video
exports and alarms. Additional capabilities include:
(1) Broadcast: Broad announcements can be made
by selecting a microphone icon on the view level
when talking.
(2) Use the Push-to-talk (PTT) Feature:

Communicate via the VMS system, through a
PC microphone and while watching live video
from one camera, with people near a video
camera with audio equipment. Push-to-talk
(PTT) is also available in Actions.
f) Live Video Monitoring: View live video with PTZ
control including use of presets, video playback, and
triggering of camera-related outputs and events from
within the camera’s view.
g) Search: Search function to find cameras, types of
camera, cameras with related microphones, cameras with
related speakers and camera views.
h) Video Export: Provide video export, with the option to preview and store exported video on the server, and
make it available for later usage or download, for
example, when a higher-bandwidth connection is in use:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-37
(1) AVI, MKV, XProtect Format files: Ability to
create AVI, MKV or XProtect format export
files.
(2) Still Image Export: Provide camera view JPEG
image export.
(3) Audio: Option to include audio in the export
package.
(4) Export On Server: Ability to export on the
server to avoid moving large files.
(5) Exceed Retention Time: Ability to store video
recordings for a period that is longer than the
retention time.
(6) Play Back Deleted Recordings: Ability to play
back the recordings even if the recordings have
been deleted from the media database.
(7) Reduced Download: Ability to download only
needed files or save them for downloading when
on a faster connection.
(8) Preview On Server: Preview exports on the
server without downloading them.
i) Data Integrity Of Exported Video:
(1) Encryption And Password Protection: Option to
encrypt and password protect any of the
available export formats.
(2) 256-bit AES Encryption: Ability to encrypt
exports using 256-bit AES algorithm.
(3) Digital Signature: Digitally signed media
exports with SHA-2 algorithm to establish a
means of detecting modification of exported
video.
j) Bookmarks: Bookmarks shall be applicable for live
video and recorded video:
(1) Ability to create quick or detailed bookmarks to
facilitate incident review and documentation.
(2) Ability to edit and delete bookmarks and to use
filtering to find bookmarked video.
k) Secure Connection: Connect to XProtect Mobile Server through trusted CA certificates for HTTPS encryption.
l) Supported Browsers:
(1) Microsoft Edge
(2) Safari
(3) Google Chrome
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-38
(4) Mozilla Firefox
m) Browser Plug-Ins or Extensions: No plug-ins or
extensions to be installed.
t. XProtect Mobile Client
1) Provide the following native-app mobile client capabilities:
a) User Authentication:
(1) Require only user name and password.
(2) Enable basic users to change password during
login.
(3) User authentication and authorization is handled
by XProtect Mobile Server.
b) Multiple Server Profiles: Select between multiple server profiles to facilitate easily switching between sites or different connection addresses.
c) Views and View Groups: Automatically obtain the
user’s private and shared views from the system to be
used as camera lists.
(1) View Groups: Views shall be organized in view
group folders. View groups shall also have the
capability of organizing subordinate view
groups.
(2) All-Camera View: Automatically generate a
view for all cameras when no views are set up.
d) Two-Way Audio: Audio from cameras with built-in or
attached microphones can be configured for listening.

Camera built-in or attached speakers can be configured
for use to talk to individuals near speakers. Audio
playback shall be available for investigations and alarms.

Additional capabilities include:
(1) Use the Push-to-talk (PTT) Feature:

Communicate via the VMS system, through the
microphone of the mobile device and while
watching live video from one camera, with
people near a video camera with audio
equipment. Push-to-talk (PTT) is also available
in access control.
e) Full-Screen View: Display cameras in full screen to take better advantage of the mobile device’s screen, with
camera view navigation in full screen by swiping left or right.
f) Pinch-To-Zoom: Digital pinch-to-zoom shall enable
mobile users to enlarge a part of the image for closer
review and conduct detailed investigation of video.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-39
g) Picture-In-Picture: Provide the following functionality for Picture-In-Picture:
(1) Display a live picture-in-picture frame of the
same camera when in playback mode.
(2) The picture-in-picture shall be movable by
dragging.
(3) Double-tapping and will return to live view.
(4) Hide live picture-in-picture frame.
h) Search: Search function to find cameras, types of
camera, cameras with related microphones, cameras with
related speakers, and camera views.
i) Navigation: Ability to navigate recorded video using a time picker and to adjust the start time by dragging a
timeline scroller.
j) Bookmarks: Bookmarks shall be applicable for live
video and recorded video.
(1) Ability to create quick or detailed bookmarks to
facilitate incident review and documentation.
(2) Ability to edit and delete bookmarks and to use
filtering to find bookmarked video.
k) Mobile Video Push: Provide XProtect Mobile client
capability for mobile device users to use their mobile
device cameras as cameras in the VMS, including the
following characteristics:
(1) No Mobile Setup: No mobile device setup shall
be required for mobile video push. Provide
central server-side configuration.
(2) Metadata Support: Mobile users shall be able to
include metadata in the video submitted.
(3) Audio: Mobile users shall be able to include
audio in the video submitted.
l) Investigation: Provide access to investigations created in the XProtect Web Client.
m) Secure Connection: Connect to XProtect Mobile server through trusted CA certificates for HTTPS encryption.
n) Supported Mobile Operating Systems:
(1) Android
(2) iOS
u. SDK-Based Integration
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-40
1) Milestone Integration Platform Software Development Kit (MIP SDK): The VMS shall support a software development kit (MIP SDK) that allows integrating the video management system with third-party applications, for example access control and video analytics.
2) Integration Types and Functionalities: Integration of third-party applications and plug-ins shall be possible in three different ways:
a) Integration through network protocols shall allow for the possibility to choose coding platform. Protocol
integration shall make it possible to:
(1) Retrieve, save, and change the configuration of
the VMS through a SOAP or RESTful API.
(2) Retrieve live or recorded video, audio, and
metadata.
(3) Send control commands and events to the VMS.
(4) Receive VMS status information, for example if
a camera is down or a server is running out of
space.
(5) Implement protocols on Windows, Java® and
Linux® systems.
3) Integration through the .NET libraries which shall allow for using software components to integrate with the VMS. .NET integration shall make it possible to:
a) Retrieve, save, and change the configuration of the
VMS.
b) Retrieve live and recorded audio and metadata.
c) Display live and recorded video with optional overlay of graphics.
d) Issue control commands to the VMS or related device, for example a camera with PTZ and outputs.
e) Send and receive events to the VMS.
4) Integration through a plug-in embedded directly into the VMS environment that shall run as part of the VMS and client applications. Plug-in integration shall make it possible to:
a) Be integrated with the event server, enabling the event server to use plug-in functionality. This shall allow
event-based functionality to be executed without the
need for an open user interface.
b) Be integrated with XProtect Smart Client, enabling the application to use plug-in functionality.
c) Be integrated with XProtect Management Client,
enabling the application to use plug-in functionality.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-41
d) Plug-ins shall be able to run across all products and versions of the VMS.
e) Plug-ins shall be able to listen for events from other plug-ins.
f) It shall be possible to activate licenses for third party plug-ins in XProtect Management Client.
5) Integration Capabilities: Third party applications shall be able to integrate with the VMS to access a variety of functionalities:
a) Video, Audio, and Metadata Functionality:
(1) Retrieve and play live and recorded video.
(2) Retrieve and play live and recorded audio.
(3) Retrieve and access live and recorded metadata.
(4) Retrieve and display single images (JPEG).
(5) Export video and audio in AVI, MKV and native
database format.
(6) Place overlay information on live and recorded
video in component-based implementation and
in plug-ins for XProtect Smart Client.
(7) Create, find, and delete bookmarks.
b) Configuration:
(1) Retrieve and change VMS configuration,
including camera, user and alarm information.
(2) Enable third party applications to save and
retrieve their own configuration.
c) Authentication and Authorization. Logins and
authorization of third-party plug-ins, applications and protocol integrations:
(1) Manage user rights on plug-in functionality.
(2) A framework for system access and security
token handling.
d) Event and Alarms:
(1) Trigger internal (system-related) and external
(integrated) events and alarms.
(2) A specific event can trigger start or stop
recording.
(3) Search for existing alarms and events.
(4) Update and acknowledge alarms.
e) Licensing. Read licenses and add own plug-in license:
(1) Licensing of third-party integrations
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-42
(2) Integration with online registration
f) System status:
(1) Receive all status messages from the VMS,
including server disk, CPU usage, and triggered
events.
(2) Control. Trigger output, control PTZ, start/stop
recordings:
(3) Send PTZ commands to cameras.
(4) Retrieve PTZ position from absolute PTZ
cameras.
(5) Send a start or stop recording event from a
specific event.
(6) Set bookmarks in recording.
(7) Activate external output.
(8) Control video wall application functionality.
(9) Send camera to a video-sharing monitor.
(10) Send commands to third party-developed plug-
ins.
(11) Playback time controller.
(12) Support for displaying plug-in items on smart
map in XProtect Smart Client.
(13) Change XProtect Smart Client theme
g) System and Audit logs. Generate log entries and reads logs:
h) Write and read systems and audit logs.
6) Use cases:
a) Compatibility with XProtect Transact, which integrate video surveillance with automatic teller machines
(ATM), point-of-sale (POS) and enterprise resource
planning (ERP) systems for managing loss prevention
and fraud.
b) Compatibility with XProtect LPR for automatic reading and tracking of vehicle license plates.
c) Event integration via a simple message-based socket
communication interface enabling external applications
to trigger events in the VMS.
d) Functionality for external applications to trigger user- defined events in the VMS.
v. Licensing
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-43
1) License Activation: VMS shall offer easy-to-use automatic or manual online activation via the Internet and alternatively, offline activation via email and web for closed surveillance networks.
w. Server Base License:
1) One mandatory XProtect Professional+ server base license for installing the product.
2) Server base license shall permit the following deployments within the legal entity purchasing the base license:
a) Unrestricted number of Management Server services.
b) Unrestricted number of Recording Server services.
c) Unrestricted number of XProtect Smart Client, XProtect Web Client and XProtect Mobile client applications.
3) Hardware Device License:
a) One license per hardware IP address to connect:
(1) Cameras.
(2) Audio devices.
(3) Video encoders.
(4) Other devices.
b) Support an unlimited number of hardware device
licenses.
4) License Overview Information: License overview shall include add-on products.
5) License Administration: Provide license information presenting the license use.
6) Changes Without Activation: A “Changes without activation” function shall allow additions and replacements of limited number of devices without requiring license device activation or reactivation.
x. Video Management Data Storage Server
1) EIA 19” Rack Mount chassis, including all necessary mounting rails and hardware to mount in DIN (square hole) 4 post racks as provided under the work of Section 27 11 16 – Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures.
2) Hardware Requirements: Conform with or exceed
manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements of server configuration for system design, intended use and desired level of performance. Optimize server computer count, and server application distribution across servers, to account for likely system expansion. The following are minimum requirements.

The server shall have the minimum capacities as required by the VMS manufacturer including:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-44
a) CPU's: As required by the VMS Manufacturer.
b) RAM: As required by the VMS Manufacturer.
c) USB or PS/2 style mouse
d) USB or PS/2 style keyboard
e) Dual 10/100/Gigabit/10Gigabit Ethernet Adapters
f) Display Adapter (at least 1024 x 768 resolution @
65,536 colors)
g) If server cannot boot from iSCSI Raid Array, provide a boot disk hard drive, at least 1T SATA or SAS.
3) Operating System: As required by the VMS Manufacturer. a) For Individual Servers:
(1) Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro (64 bit).
(2) Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise (64 bit).
(3) Microsoft Windows 10 Pro (64 bit).
(4) Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise (64 bit).
(5) Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB (Long-
Term Servicing Branch) 2016 (version 1607 or
later).
(6) Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise, version
1803 or later (64 bit), IoT Core.
(7) Microsoft Windows Server 2012 (64 bit):

Standard and Datacenter.
(8) Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 (64 bit):

Standard and Datacenter.
(9) Microsoft Windows Server 2016 (64 bit):

Essentials, Standard and Datacenter.
(10) Microsoft Windows Server 2019 (64 bit):

Essentials, Standard or Datacenter.
b) To Run Clustering/Failover Management Server:
(1) Software:
(2) Microsoft .NET 4.7.2 Framework.
(3) Microsoft .NET Core 3.1.13.
(4) DirextX 11 or newer.
4) Quantity of servers: As required and recommended by the VMS manufacturer for the quantity equal to 1.3 times the number of cameras provided under the work of this Project.
5) Features/Functions/Performance - Raid Arrays
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-45
a) Total Capacity: As required to capture full-motion video at highest resolution of specified cameras stored without overwriting for at least 365 days continuous operation, assuming:
(1) 1.1 times the camera count initially provided
with the Project.
(2) 3.5 megapixel recording resolution per camera
or greater as required to match supplied
cameras.
(3) H.264 compression
(4) 40% activity (motion present 40% of period)
(5) 15 frame per second motion recording
(6) Free Hard Disk Space: 50 GB free or more after
provision for video storage above or as required
by the VMS manufacturer
b) Minimum RAID Architecture:
(1) As required by the VMS Manufacturer.
c) Minimum Construction and Performance
(1) As required by the VMS Manufacturer.
d) Server - Rack mountable, EIA 19", including all
necessary mounting rails and hardware to mount in
square hole) 4 post racks with DIN (square) openings
(1) CPU: Intel® Core™ i3 or better.
(2) RAM: 16 GB or more.
(3) Network: Ethernet 2 x 1 Gbit or better.
(4) Graphics Adapter: Onboard GFX, AGP or PCI-
Express, minimum 1024×768, 16-bit color or
better.

3. Manufacturers, VMS System:
a. Milestone XProtect Professional+ (selected item to match existing Sacramento Library System multi-site video management systems). b. Or equal.

4. Manufacturers, Servers
a. As pre-qualified by the VMS Manufacturer.
b. HP
c. Intel
d. Dell
e. Or equal.

5. Manufacturers, iSCSI Array: Quantity - As required to meet storage requirement.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-46
a. As pre-qualified by the VMS Manufacturer.
b. NetApp Inc.
c. Isilon Systems
d. Dell
e. HP
f. pivot
g. Or equal.

6. Manufacturers, Hard Drives for iSCSI Array
a. Seagate
b. Western Digital
c. Or equal.
d. Rack Mount Monitor, Keyboard and 19” Diplay
e. Drawing Reference: 19RMMKVMK

7. Minimum Features, Functions, Performance, Construction a. Combines an 8-port KVM switch, 19” LCD screen, full keyboard and touchpad in a 1U rack-mountable drawer assembly.
b. Mounts into 19”-wide rack, 26”-38” deep.
c. Control up to 8 servers from a single, easily accessible console. d. Includes eight cables that support computers with either PS/2 or USB connections
e. Flip-up/fold-down screen keeps the console from blocking access to rack equipment when not in use:
f. 19” monitor supports video resolutions up to 1280 x 1024 g. DDC emulation allows optimal output to the LCD
h. Multi-Level Password Security
i. Enhances security by limiting access to an administrator and up to 4 local users
j. Two-level log-out allows for manual log-out or automatic log-out after a user-defined period of time has passed.
k. Manufacturers:
l. Tripplite B020-U08-19-K
m. APC
n. Or equal.

2.3 CAMERAS AND RELATED
A. Cameras, General
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-47

1. Form Factor: Unless otherwise noted, provide mini dome cameras which fit tight to trade standard backboxes, and provides no protrusion to grasp or hang from. a. Exceptions:
1) Box cameras where specified.
2) Sunshades at exterior wall mount cameras.
3) Pendant and pole mount cameras.

2. Minimum resolution: Not less than 2.3 Megapixels.

3. Minimum frames per second: Not less than 15 frames per second (fps) on motion detection.

4. Minimum illumination to produce a usable produce a useable picture through the VMS system.
a. Not more than 0.09 lux at 1/30s shutter, no sens up allowed. b. Camera to provide mechanical cut filter.
c. At cameras facing glass doors to the exterior, with a view to exterior windows or other sources of varying light, provide with Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) compensation, 100 dB min.

5. Video Codec: H.265.

6. Lensing. Provide with varifocal lens or field selectable lensing to suit proposed field of view.

7. Focus. Provide and implement manual focus at time of installation. Camera to support remote autofocus or auto backfocus to permit accommodation of changes over time.

8. Vandal resistant construction:
a. IK10 minimum.
b. Integral Tamper alarm.

9. Streaming. Camera to support at least two simultaneous streams at different resolutions for use in monitoring and recording.

10. Motion processing: Provides internal means to trigger motion detection and alarm based on change in field of view defined by software of a minimum number of pixels associated with the arrival or departure of a person in the field being monitored. On detection of motion, relays alarm to VMS and responds to request for high frame output, as specified herein above.

11. Recording Control:
a. Cameras to support continuous and motion detection based recording.

12. Standards Conformance.
a. ONVIF
1) The camera shall be compliant with the Open Network Video Interface Forum Profile S (ONVIF Profile S) conformance.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-48
2) The camera shall also support ONVIF event commands such as Tampering alarm, Motion alarm and Fan error.
b. Cameras to meet the applicable portions of the following standards:
1) FCC Part 15 - Subpart B Class A
2) UL 60950-1
3) UL 60950-22
4) SMPTE 296M (HDTV 720p)
5) SMPTE 274M (HDTV 1080p)
6) MPEG-4:
a) ISO/IEC 14496-10 Advanced Video Coding (H.264)
7) Networking:
a) IEEE 802.3af/802.3at (Power over Ethernet)
b) IEEE 802.1X (Authentication)
c) IPv4 (RFC 791)
d) IPv6 (RFC 2460)
e) QoS – DiffServ (RFC 2475)
8) Mechanical Environment:
a) NEMA 250 Type 4X
(1) Exterior cameras to be IP66 or NEMA 4X
b) IEC/EN 62262 IK10+ (50J)
c) IEC 60068-2-1
d) IEC 60068-2-2
e) IEC 60068-2-6
f) IEC 60068-2-14
g) IEC 60068-2-27
h) IEC 60068-2-52
i) IEC 60068-2-60
j) IEC 60068-2-78
9) Power Source:
a) POE from Sacramento Public Library supplied network
switch ports at TR’s. Use of midspan extenders not
permitted.

13. Housing:
a. To be paintable and painted to match interior as selected by the City's Representative without voiding the manufacturer’s warranty.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-49
b. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturers mounting hardware as required. to suit application, with manufacturer accessory mounting plates, pendant adapters and backboxes as necessary to mount to rough- in conditions without creating installed conditions permitting public to grasp or hang from support of any camera installed within 10 feet of floor.

14. Interior Station cabling to support TCP/IP cameras to be ANSI/TIA Cat 6 category cabling installed using means and methods as outlined under the work of Division 27. To ensure long-term maintainability of the system each cable used for TCP/IP cameras shall be terminated at a surface mounted biscuit box placed internal to the rough-in for the camera and a patch cord shall be extended from the permanently installed surface mount box to the camera network port. It shall not be permitted to terminate RJ45's directly on the ends of the installed permanent link station cabling.

15. Outdoor cabling and transmission systems. Where pathway lengths to site cameras exceed ANSI/TIA category cabling installation distances, provide media extenders and extension cabling under the work of this Section.

B. IP Surveillance Indoor/Outdoor Dome Camera, 5MP Dome network camera:

1. Drawing References:
a. Image of camera as indicated on the single line
b. Circle with 1 in center and one arrowhead

2. Minimum Features/Function/Performance/Construction:
a. The dome network camera shall meet or exceed the following performance specifications:
1) Image sensor 1/2.7” progressive scan RGB CMOS
2) Lens
a) Varifocal, 3–8 mm, F1.3
b) Horizontal field of view: 104°–40°
c) Vertical field of view: 74°–29°
d) Remote zoom and focus, P-Iris control, IR corrected
3) Day and night Automatically removable infrared-cut
filter
4) Minimum Illumination
a) With Forensic WDR and Lightfinder 2.0:
(1) Color: 0.13 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3
(2) B/W: 0 lux at 50 IRE, F1.3
5) Shutter speed: 1/33500 s to 1/5 s
6) Camera angle adjustment: Pan ±180°, tilt ±75°, rotation ±175° b. Video Compression
1) H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-50
2) H.265 (MPEG-H Part 2/HEVC) Main Profile
3) Motion JPEG
c. Resolution 2592x1944 to 160x90
d. Frame rate 25/30 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz e. Video streaming
1) Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264, H.265, and 2) Motion JPEG
3) Axis Zipstream technology for H.264 and H.265
4) Controllable frame rate and bandwidth
5) VBR/ABR/MBR H.264/H.265
f. Multi-view Streaming
1) Up to 2 individually cropped out view areas in full frame rate g. Image settings
1) Compression, color saturation, brightness, sharpness, contrast, local contrast, white balance, day/night threshold, tone mapping, exposure control (including automatic gain control), motion- adaptive exposure, exposure zones, defogging, Forensic WDR:
up to 120 dB depending on scene, barrel distortion correction, fine tuning of low-light behavior, dynamic text and image overlay, privacy masks, mirroring, rotation: 0°, 90°, 180°,270°, including Corridor Format
h. Pan/Tilt/Zoom Digital PTZ, preset positions
i. Audio Streaming Full duplex
j. Audio Encoding
1) 24bit LPCM, AAC-LC 8/16/32/44.1/48 kHz, G.711 PCM 8 kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8 kHz, Opus 8/16/48 kHz
2) Configurable bit rate
k. Audio Input/Output
1) External microphone input, line input, digital input with ring power, line output, automatic gain control
2) Two-way audio connectivity via optional AXIS T61 Audio and I/O Interfaces with portcast technology
l. Security
1) Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPSa encryption, IEEE 802.1X (EAP-TLS)a network access control, digest
authentication, user access log, centralized certificate management, brute force delay protection, signed firmware, secure boot, Axis Edge Vault with Axis device ID
m. Supported Protocols
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-51
1) IPv4, IPv6 USGv6, HTTP, HTTP/2, HTTPS, SSL/TLS, QoS
Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, SFTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour,
UPnP®, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP,

RTSP, RTP, SRTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP,
DHCPv4/v6, ARP, SOCKS, SSH, SIP, LLDP, MQTT v3.1.1,
Syslog
n. Application Programming Interface
1) Open API for software integration, including VAPIX® and AXIS Camera Application Platform; specifications at axis.com 2) AXIS Video Hosting System (AVHS) with One-Click
Connection
3) ONVIF® Profile G, ONVIF® Profile S, and ONVIF® Profile T, specification at onvif.org
4) Support for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for integration with Voice over IP (VoIP) systems, peer to peer or integrated with

SIP/PBX
o. Casing
1) IP52-rated, IK10 impact-resistant polycarbonate casing with hard-coated dome and dehumidifying membrane
2) Encapsulated electronics and captive screws
3) Color: white NCS S 1002-B
p. Mounting
1) Mounting bracket with holes for junction box (double-gang, single-gang, and 4” octagon) and for wall or ceiling mount ¼”- 20 UNC tripod screw thread
q. Sustainability PVC free
r. Memory 1024 MB RAM, 512 MB Flash
s. Power
1) Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af/802.3at Type 1 Class 3 2) Typical 6.5 W, max 10.5 W
t. Connectors
1) RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T PoE
2) I/O: 4–pin 2.5 mm (0.098 in) terminal block for 1 supervised digital input and 1 digital output (12 V DC output, max. load 25 mA)
3) Audio: 4-pin 2.5 mm (0.098 in) terminal block for audio in and out
4) Audio and I/O connectivity via AXIS T61 Audio and I/O Interfaces with portcast technology
u. IR illumination
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-52
1) OptimizedIR with power-efficient, long-life 850 nm IR LEDs 2) Range of reach 40 m (130 ft) or more depending on the scene v. Storage
1) Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card
2) Support for SD card encryption (AES-XTS-Plain64 256bit) 3) Recording to network-attached storage (NAS)
w. Operating Conditions
1) 0 °C to 50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F)
2) Humidity 10–85% RH (non-condensing)

3. Manufacturer:
a. Axis Communications P3267-LVE
1) Provide with mounts, as required
2) Axis T94T01D Pendant Kit
3) Axis T91 Mounts
b. Hanwa QND-8080R
c. Or equal
C. IP Surveillance Interior/Exterior Dome Camera, Three to Four Camera Sensors minimum, Fixed Arrangement, 180° Horizontal Angle by 90° Vertical Angle

1. Drawing References:
a. Interior Cameras, Circle with 2 in center and two arrowheads b. Exterior Cameras, Circle with 2 in center and two arrowheads

2. Minimum Features/Function/Performance/Construction:
a. Camera
1) Image sensor
a) 4 x 1/2.8” progressive scan RGB CMOS
b) Pixel size 2.9 µm
2) Lens
a) Fixed 3.3 mm, F2.0
b) Horizontal field of view: 180°
c) Vertical field of view: 90°
3) Day and night
a) Automatic IR-cut filter
b) Hybrid IR filter
4) Minimum illumination:
a) Color: 0.15 lux at 50 IRE, F2.0
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-53
b) B/W: 0.05 lux at 50 IRE, F2.0
5) Shutter speed: 1/31500 s to 1.5 s
6) Camera angle adjustment:
a) Pan ±180°
b) Tilt 0° to 50°
c) Roll ±5°
b. System on chip (SoC)
1) Memory 2048 MB RAM, 8192 MB Flash
2) Compute capabilities:
3) Deep learning processing unit (DLPU)
c. Video
1) Video Compression
a) H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High
Profiles
b) H.265 (MPEG-H Part 2/HEVC) Main Profile
c) Motion JPEG
2) Resolution: 3712x1856 (7 MP) to 640x320
3) Frame rate: Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) in all resolutions 4) Video streaming:
a) Up to 20 unique and configurable video streams.
b) Manufacturer’sZipstream technology in H.264 and
H.265
c) Controllable frame rate and bandwidth
d) VBR/ABR/MBR H.264/H.265
e) Low latency mode
f) Video streaming indicator
5) Signal-to-noise ratio: >55 dB
6) WDR: Forensic WDR: Up to 120 dB depending on scene
7) Multi-view streaming: Up to 8 individually cropped out view areas.
8) Noise reduction:
a) Spatial filter (2D noise reduction)
b) Temporal filter (3D noise reduction)
9) Image settings: Horizon straightening, saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness, white balance, day/night threshold, local contrast, tone mapping, exposure mode, compression, dynamic text and image overlay, polygon privacy masks
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-54
10) Image processing: Axis Zipstream, Forensic WDR, Lightfinder 11) Pan/Tilt/Zoom: Digital PTZ
d. Audio
1) Audio features:
a) AGC automatic gain control
b) Network speaker pairing
2) Audio streaming:
a) Configurable duplex:
b) One-way (simplex, half duplex)
c) Two-way (half duplex, full duplex)
3) Audio input:
a) Input for external unbalanced microphone, optional 5 V microphone power
b) Digital input, optional 12 V ring power
c) Unbalanced line input
4) Audio output: Output via network speaker pairing
5) Audio encoding:
a) 24bit LPCM, AAC-LC 8/16/32/48 kHz, G.711 PCM 8
kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8 kHz, Opus 8/16/48 kHz
b) Configurable bit rate
e. Network
1) Network protocols: IPv4, IPv6 USGv6, ICMPv4/ICMPv6,
HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP/2, TLS, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP,
SFTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, mDNS (Bonjour), UPnP®, SNMP
v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS/DNSv6, DDNS, NTP, NTS, RTSP,
RTP, SRTP, TCP, UDP, IGMPv1/v2/v3, RTCP, ICMP,
DHCPv4/v6, ARP, SSH, LLDP, CDP, MQTT v3.1.1, Secure
syslog (RFC 3164/5424, UDP/TCP/TLS), Link-Local address (ZeroConf), IEEE 802.1X (EAP-TLS), IEEE 802.1AR
f. System integration
g. Application Programming Interface
1) Open API for software integration, including VAPIX®, metadata and Manufacturer’s Camera Application Platform
2) One-click cloud connection
3) ONVIF® Profile G, ONVIF® Profile M, ONVIF® Profile S, and ONVIF® Profile T
h. Video Management Systems
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-55
1) Compatible with Manufacturer’s Companion, Manufacturer’s Camera Station, video management software from
Manufacturers Application Development Partners
i. Onscreen controls:
1) Privacy masks
2) Media clip
j. Event conditions:
1) Device status: above operating temperature, above or below operating temperature, below operating temperature, within operating temperature, IP address removed, new IP address, network lost, system ready, ring power overcurrent protection, live stream active, casing open
2) Digital audio input status
3) Edge storage: recording ongoing, storage disruption, storage health issues detected
4) I/O: digital input, manual trigger, virtual input
5) MQTT: subscribe
6) Scheduled and recurring: schedule
7) Video: average bitrate degradation, day-night mode, live stream, tampering
k. Event actions
1) Audio clips: play, stop
2) Day-night mode
3) I/O: toggle I/O once, toggle I/O while the rule is active 4) MQTT: publish
5) Notification: HTTP, HTTPS, TCP and email
6) Overlay text
7) Recordings: SD card and network share
8) SNMP traps: send, send while the rule is active
9) Upload of images or video clips: FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share and email
l. Built-in installation aids: Pixel counter, level grid m. Analytics
1) Manufacturer’s ObjectAnalytics
a) Object classes: humans, vehicles (types: cars, buses, trucks, bikes)
b) Scenarios: line crossing, object in area, crossline
counting
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-56
c) Up to 10 scenarios
d) Metadata visualized with trajectories, color-coded
bounding boxes and tables
e) Polygon include/exclude areas
f) Perspective configuration
g) ONVIF Motion Alarm event
2) Metadata
a) Object data: Classes: humans, faces, vehicles (types:
cars, buses, trucks, bikes), license plates
3) Attributes: Vehicle color, upper/lower clothing color, confidence, position
4) Event data: Producer reference, scenarios, trigger conditions n. Applications Included:
1) Manufacturer’s Object Analytics, Manufacturer’s Video Motion Detection, active tampering alarm, audio detection
2) Support for Manufacturer’s Camera Application Platform enabling installation of third-party applications
o. Approvals
1) Product markings CSA, UL/cUL, BIS,UKCA, CE, KC, EAC,

VCCI, RCM
2) Supply chain: TAA compliant
3) EMC: CISPR 35, CISPR 32 Class A, EN 55035, EN 55032
Class A, EN 50121-4, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, IEC
62236-4
4) USA: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
5) Safety: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1 ed. 3, IEC/EN/UL 62368- 1 ed. 3, IS13252
6) Environment: IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-78, IEC/EN
60529 IP66/IP6, IEC/EN 62262 IK10, NEMA 250 Type 4X,
NEMA TS 2 (2.2.7-2.2.9), MIL-STD-810H (Method 501.7,
502.7, 505.7, 506.6, 507.6, 509.7, 512.6)
7) Network: NIST SP500-267
8) Cybersecurity: ETSI EN 303 645
p. Cybersecurity
1) Edge security
a) Software: Signed firmware, brute force delay protection, digest authentication and OAuth 2.0 RFC6749 OpenID
Authorization.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-57
b) Code Flow for centralized ADFS account management,
password protection, AES-XTS-Plain64 256bit SD card
encryption.
c) Hardware: Secure boot, Axis Edge Vault with Axis
device ID, signed video, secure keystore (CC EAL4+,
FIPS 140-2 level 2 certified hardware protection of
cryptographic operations and keys).
2) Network security
a) IEEE 802.1X (EAP-TLS, PEAP-MSCHAPv2), IEEE
802.1AE (MACsec PSK/EAP-TLS), IEEE 802.1AR,
HTTPS/HSTS, TLS v1.2/v1.3, Network Time Security
(NTS), X.509
b) Certificate PKI, host-based firewall
q. General
1) Casing IP66/IP67-, NEMA 4X- and IK10-rated aluminum casing 2) Polycarbonate hard-coated dome
3) Color: white NCS S 1002-B
4) Mounting: Mounting bracket with junction box holes (double- gang, single-gang, 4” square, and 4” octagon) and for wall or ceiling mount
5) ¾” (M25) conduit side entries
6) Power:
a) Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4 b) Typical 12 W, max 18 W
7) Connectors:
a) Network: Shielded RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-
TX/1000BASE-T PoE
b) I/O: Terminal block for two configurable supervised
inputs / digital outputs (12 V DC output, max load 50
mA)
c) Audio: 3.5 mm analog/digital mic/line in
8) Storage:
a) Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card
b) Recording to network-attached storage (NAS)
9) Operating conditions
a) -40 °C to 55 °C (-40 °F to 131 °F)
b) Maximum temperature according to NEMA TS 2
(2.2.7): 74 °C (165 °F)
c) Start-up temperature: -40 °C
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-58
d) Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing)
10) Storage conditions:
a) -40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F)
b) Humidity 5–95% RH (non-condensing)
11) Nominal Dimensions
a) Height: 169 mm(6.7 in)
b) Diameter 195 mm (7.7 in)
c) Effective Projected Area (EPA): 0.025 m2 (0.27 ft2)
12) Max Weight 2300 g (5.1 lb)
r. Languages: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese
s. Manufacturer’sWarranty: 5-year warranty.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Axis:
1) P3827-PVE Panoramic multi-imager camera with mounting and finish hardware provided as required, including:
2) Mounts:
a) AXIS TQ3102 Pendant Kit
b) AXIS TQ3101-E Pendant Kit
c) AXIS TQ3201-E Recessed Mount
d) AXIS T94V01C Dual Camera Mount
b. Avigilon
c. Bosch
d. Hanwa WiseNet
e. Or equal.

D. IP Surveillance Interior/Exterior Dome Camera, Three to Four Camera Sensors minimum, Fixed Arrangement, 180° Horizontal Angle by 90° Vertical Angle, High Resolution

1. Drawing References:
a. Interior Cameras, Circle with 2 in center and two arrowheads and an H subscript
b. Exterior Cameras, Circle with 2 in center and two arrowheads and an H subscript

2. Minimum Features/Function/Performance/Construction:
a. Camera
1) Image sensor 3 x 5 MP 1/2.8” progressive scan RGB CMOS 2) Lens Fixed
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-59
a) 3.2 mm, F2.0
b) Horizontal field of view: 180°
c) Vertical field of view: 90°
3) Day and night: Automatically removable infrared-cut filter 4) Minimum illumination:
a) With Forensic WDR and Lightfinder:
(1) Color: 0.16 lux, F2.0
(2) B/W: 0.05 lux, F2.0
5) Shutter speed:
a) 1/91000 to 1/25 s
b) With WDR: 1/50000 to 1/25 s
6) Camera angle adjustment
a) Pan +/- 180°
b) Tilt 0° to 50°
c) Roll +/- 5°
b. System on chip (SoC)
1) Memory 2048 MB RAM (x2), 512 MB Flash
c. Video
1) Video compression
a) H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High
Profiles
b) H.265 (MPEG-H Part 2/HEVC) Main Profile
c) Motion JPEG
2) Resolution: 5120x2560 (13.1 MP) to 256x128
3) Frame rate 13.1 MP @ 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) WDR
4) Video streaming:
a) 13.1 MP: 1 configurable stream in H.264, H.265 and
Motion JPEG in full frame rate
b) Controllable frame rate and bandwidth
c) VBR/ABR/MBR H.264/H.265
d) Low latency mode
5) Image settings: Saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness, Forensic WDR: up to 120 dB depending on scene, white balance, day/night threshold, exposure mode, compression, dynamic text and image overlay, orientation aid, exposure control, noise reduction, fine tuning of behavior at low light, polygon privacy masks
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-60
d. Audio
1) Audio streaming: Two-way audio via edge-to-edge technology 2) Audio input/output
a) External microphone input, line input, digital audio input, automatic gain control, network speaker pairing
3) Audio encoding:
a) 24bit LPCM, AAC-LC 8/16/32/48 kHz, G.711 PCM 8
kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8 kHz, Opus 8/16/48 kHz, 44.1
kHz ACC-LC, LPCM
b) Configurable bit rate
e. Network
1) Security: IP address filtering, HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1X (EAP-TLS) network access control, user access log, centralized certificate management, signed video, Axis Edge Vault, Axis device ID, secure keystore (CC EAL4 certified), TPM (FIPS 140-2 certified)
2) Network protocols: IPv4, IPv6 USGv6, ICMPv4/ICMPv6,
HTTP, HTTP/2, HTTPS, TLS, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP,
SFTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, mDNS (Bonjour), UPnP®, SNMP
v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS/DNSv6, DDNS, NTP, NTS, RTSP,
RTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP, DHCPv4/v6, ARP, SSH,
LLDP, CDP, MQTT, Secure syslog (RFC 3164/5424,
UDP/TCP/TLS), Link-Local address (ZeroConf)
f. System integration
1) Application Programming Interface: Open API for software integration ONVIF® Profile G, ONVIF® Profile M, ONVIF®
Profile S and ONVIF® Profile T
2) Event conditions
a) Analytics, external input, supervised external input, edge storage events, virtual inputs through API
b) Audio: audio detection
c) Digital audio: digital signal contains Axis metadata, digital signal as invalid sample rate, digital signal
missing, digital signal ok
d) Device status: above operating temperature, above or below operating temperature, below operating
temperature, fan failure, IP address removed, network
lost, new IP address, shock detected, storage failure,
system ready, within operating temperature, casing open, ring power overcurrent protection
e) Edge storage: recording ongoing, storage disruption, storage health issues detected
f) I/O: digital input, manual trigger, virtual input
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-61
g) MQTT subscribe
h) Scheduled and recurring: scheduled event
i) Video: live stream open, average bitrate degradation, day-night mode, tampering
3) Event actions
a) Day/night mode, overlay text, video recording to edge storage, pre- and post-alarm video buffering, send
SNMP trap, play audio clip I/O events, status LED
events
b) File upload: FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS network share,
email
c) MQTT publish
d) Notification: email, HTTP, HTTPS TCP
e) Data streaming: Event data
f) Built-in installation aids: Pixel counter, leveling guide g. Analytics
1) Applications Included: Manufacturer’sFence Guard,
Manufacturer’sMotion Guard, Manufacturer’sLoitering Guard, Manufacturer’sVideo Motion Detection, active tampering alarm, audio detection
2) Supported: Support for Manufacturer’sCamera Application Platform enabling installation of third-party applications h. Approvals
1) EMC EAC, CISPR 24, CISPR 35, EN 55024, EN 55035, EN
55032 Class A,
2) EN 50121-4, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2
3) USA: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
4) Safety: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1 ed. 3, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-22, IEC/EN/UL 62368-1, IEC/EN/UL 60950-22, IS 13252
5) Environment IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-78, IEC/EN
60529 IP66/IP67, IEC/EN 62262 IK10, NEMA 250 Type 4X,
NEMA TS 2 (2.2.7-2.2.9), MIL-STD-810H (Method 501.7),
502.7, 505.7, 506.6, 507.6, 509.7, 512.6
6) Network: NIST SP500-267
7) Cybersecurity: ETSI EN 303 645
i. Cybersecurity
1) Edge security
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-62
a) Software: Signed firmware, brute force delay protection, digest authentication and OAuth 2.0 RFC6749 OpenID
Authorization; Code Flow for centralized ADFS account
management, password protection, AES-XTS-Plain64
256bit SD card encryption
b) Hardware: Axis Edge Vault cybersecurity platform TPM

2.0 (CC EAL4+, FIPS 140-2 Level 2), secure element
(CC EAL 6+), Axis device ID, secure boot
2) Network security: IEEE 802.1X (EAP-TLS, PEAP-
MSCHAPv2), IEEE 802.1AE (MACsec PSK/EAP-TLS), IEEE
802.1AR, HTTPS/HSTS, TLS v1.2/v1.3, Network Time Security (NTS), X.509 Certificate PKI, host-based firewall
j. General
1) Casing IP66-/IP67- and NEMA 4X-rated, IK10-rated impact- resistant casing with polycarbonate hard coated clear dome, aluminum base and dehumidifying membrane
2) Color: white NCS S 1002-B
3) Casing open detection
4) Mounting bracket with junction box holes (double-gang, single- gang, 4” square, and 4” octagon) and for wall or ceilingmount 5) ¾” (M25) conduit side entries
6) Sustainability PVC free, 20% recycled plastic
7) Power: Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4 - Typical 11 W, max 18 W
k. Connectors
1) Shielded RJ45 1000BASE-T
2) Terminal block for two configurable supervised inputs/digital outputs (12 V DC output, max load 50 mA), 3.5 mm
analog/digital mic/line in
l. Storage:
1) Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card
2) Support for SD card encryption (AES-XTS-Plain64 256bit) 3) Support for recording to network-attached storage (NAS) m. Operating conditions
1) -40 °C to 50 °C (-40 °F to 122 °F)
2) Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing)
3) Maximum temperature according to NEMA TS 2 (2.2.7): 74 °C (165 °F)
4) Start-up temperature: -40 °C
n. Storage conditions
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-63
1) -40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F)
2) Humidity 5-95% RH (non-condensing)
o. Nominal Maximum Dimensions:
1) Height: 170 mm (6.6 in)
2) Width in diameter: 195 mm (7.6 in)
3) With weathershield:
a) Height 221 mm (8.7 in)
b) Width 206 mm (8.1 in)
p. Maximum Weight 2.2 kg (4.9 lb)
q. Configuration Languages English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese.
r. Manufacturer’sWarranty 5–year warranty

3. Manufacturers:
a. Axis:
1) P3818-PVE Panoramic multi-imager camera with mounting and finish hardware provided as required, including:
2) Mounts:
a) AXIS TQ3102 Pendant Kit
b) AXIS TQ3101-E Pendant Kit
c) AXIS TQ3201-E Recessed Mount
d) AXIS T94V01C Dual Camera Mount
b. Avigilon
c. Bosch
d. Hanwa WiseNet
e. Or equal.

E. IP Surveillance Interior/Exterior Dome Camera, Three to Four Camera Sensors minimum, Adjustable, 180° to 360° Combined Horizontal Angle

1. Drawing References:
a. Interior Cameras, Circle with 3 or 4 in center and three to four arrowheads
b. Exterior Cameras, Circle with 3 or 4 in center and three to four arrowheads

2. Minimum Features/Function/Performance/Construction:
a. Camera
1) Image sensor: 4 x 1/2.8” progressive scan RGB CMOS
2) Lens:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-64
a) Varifocal, 3–6 mm, F1.8–2.6
b) 4x1080p capture mode:
c) Horizontal field of view: 96°–49°
d) Vertical field of view: 53°–27°
e) Diagonal field of view: 113°–55°
f) Fixed iris, IR corrected, remote zoom and focus
3) Day and night: Automatically removable infrared-cut filter 4) Minimum illumination with Forensic WDR and Lightfinder:
a) Color: 0.17 lux at 50 IRE, F1.8
b) B/W: 0 lux at 50 IRE, F1.8
5) Shutter speed:
a) 1/32500 s to 2 s with 50 Hz
b) 1/32500 s to 2 s with 60 Hz
6) Individual Camera imager angle adjustment: Pan ±90°, tilt +25 to +95°, rotation –5 to +95°, twist ±20°
b. System on chip (SoC)
1) Memory 1024 MB RAM, 512 MB Flash
2) Compute capabilities: Machine learning processing unit (MLPU) c. Video
1) Video compression Standards supported
a) H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High
Profiles
b) H.265 (MPEG-H Part 2/HEVC) Main Profile
c) Motion JPEG
2) Resolution: 4 x 1920x1080 (4 x 2 MP) to 4x 640x360
3) Frame rate: Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz)
4) Video streaming
a) Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264, H.265 and Motion JPEG
b) Manufacturer’sZipstream technology in H.264 and
H.265
c) Controllable frame rate and bandwidth
d) VBR/ABR/MBR H.264/H.265
e) Low latency mode
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-65
5) Image settings: Saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness, Forensic WDR, white balance, day/night threshold, tone
mapping, exposure mode, exposure zones, compression, rotation:
0°, 90°, 180°, 270° including Corridor Format, mirroring, dynamic text and image overlay, polygon privacy masks
d. Audio
1) Audio input/output: Audio features through portcast technology:
two-way audio connectivity, voice enhancer.
e. Network
1) IP address One IP address for all channels
2) Security IP address filtering, HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) network access control, user access log, centralized certificate management, signed video, Manufacturer’sEdge Vault, Manufacturer’sdevice ID, secure keystore (CC EAL4 certified), TPM (FIPS 140-2 certified)
3) Network protocols: IPv4, IPv6 USGv6, ICMPv4/ICMPv6,
HTTP, HTTPS, HTTP/2, TLS, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP,
SFTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, mDNS (Bonjour), UPnP®, SNMP
v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS/DNSv6, DDNS, NTP, NTS, RTSP,
RTP, SRTP/RTSPS, TCP, UDP, IGMPv1/v2/v3, RTCP,
DHCPv4/v6, SSH, LLDP, CDP, MQTT v3.1.1, Secure syslog
(RFC 3164/5424, UDP/TCP/TLS), Link-Local address
(ZeroConf)
f. System integration
1) Application Programming Interface:
a) Open API for software integration, including VAPIX®
b) One-click cloud connection
c) ONVIF Profile G, ONVIF Profile M, ONVIF Profile S
and ONVIF Profile T, specification at onvif.org
2) Onscreen controls:
a) IR illumination
b) Autofocus
c) Privacy mask
3) Event conditions
a) Audio: audio clip playing
4) Device status: above operating temperature, above or below operating temperature, below operating temperature, casing open, IP address removed, network lost, new IP address, storage failure, system ready, within operating temperature
5) Edge storage: recording ongoing, storage disruption, storage health issues detected
6) I/O: manual trigger, virtual input
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-66
7) MQTT subscribe
8) Scheduled and recurring: scheduled event
9) Video: average bitrate degradation, day-night mode, live stream open, tampering
a) Event actions
b) Record video: SD card and network share
c) MQTT publish
d) Upload of images or video clips: FTP, SFTP, HTTP,
HTTPS, network share, and email
e) Notification: email, HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, and SNMP
trap
f) Overlay text, play audio clip, day/night mode, status LED, IR illumination, MQTT
10) Built-in installation aids: Pixel counter, remote focus, remote zoom
g. Analytics:
1) Object Analytics:
a) Object classes: humans, vehicles
b) Scenarios: line crossing, object in area
c) Up to 10 scenarios
d) Metadata visualized with trajectories, color-coded
bounding boxes and tables
e) Polygon include/exclude areas
f) Perspective configuration
g) ONVIF Motion Alarm event
h) Available for one channel
2) Metadata
a) Object data: Classes: humans, faces, vehicles (types:
cars, buses, trucks, bikes), license plates
b) Confidence, position
c) Event data: Producer reference, scenarios, trigger
conditions
3) Applications Included:
a) Manufacturer's Object Analytics, Manufacturer’sVideo Motion Detection,
b) Manufacturer’sMotion Guard, Manufacturer’sFence
Guard, Manufacturer’sLoitering Guard, active
tampering alarm
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-67
c) Support for Manufacturer’sCamera Application
Platform enabling installation of third-party applications h. Approvals
1) EN 55035, EN 55032 Class A, EN 50121-4, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2
2) USA: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
3) Safety
a) CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-22, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.
62368-1,
b) IEC/EN/UL 62368-1 ed. 3, IEC/EN/UL 60950-22, IEC
62471,
4) Environment : IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-78, IEC/EN
60529 IP66/IP67, IEC/EN 62262 IK09, NEMA 250 Type 4X,
NEMA TS 2 (2.2.7-2.2.9)
5) Network: NIST SP500-267
6) Cybersecurity: ETSI EN 303 645
i. Cybersecurity
1) Edge security
a) Software: Signed firmware, brute force delay protection, digest authentication and OAuth 2.0 RFC6749 OpenID
Authorization Code Flow for centralized ADFS account
management, password protection, AES-XTS-Plain64
256bit SD card encryption
b) Hardware: Manufacturer’sEdge Vault cybersecurity
platform TPM 2.0 (CC EAL4+, FIPS 140-2 Level 2),
secure element (CC EAL 6+), Manufacturer’sdevice ID,
secure keystore, signed video, secure boot
2) Network security: IEEE 802.1X (EAP-TLS, PEAP-
MSCHAPv2), IEEE 802.1AE (MACsec PSK/EAP-TLS), IEEE
802.1AR, HTTPS/HSTS, TLS v1.2/v1.3, Network Time Security (NTS), X.509 Certificate PKI, host-based firewall
j. General Construction:
1) Casing IP66, IP67, NEMA 4X and IK09-rated impact-resistant, aluminum and plastic casing with polycarbonate hard-coated dome.
2) Color: white NCS S 1002-B, Field paintable.
3) Dome intrusion switch.
4) Mounting: Mounting bracket with junction box holes (double- gang, single-gang, 4” square, and 4” octagon).
5) ½” (M20) conduit side entry.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-68
6) Sustainability: PVC free
k. Power:
1) Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4 2) IR illumination on: Class 4, typical 12.5 W, max 21.7 W 3) IR illumination off: Class 3, typical 6.4 W, Class 4, max 15.0 W l. Connectors
1) Shielded RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T PoE
2) Audio: Audio and I/O connectivity via portcast technology m. IR illumination: Four individually controllable IR with power-efficient, long-life 850 nm IR LEDs. Range of reach 15 m (50 ft) or more depending on the scene
n. Storage
1) Support for microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC card
2) Dual SD cards
3) Support for SD card encryption (AES-XTS-Plain64 256bit) 4) Recording to network-attached storage (NAS)
o. Environmental
1) Operating conditions:
a) Temperature: -30 °C to 50°C (-22 °F to 122 °F)
b) Humidity: 10–100% RH (condensing)
c) Maximum temperature according to NEMA TS 2
(2.2.7): 74 °C (165 °F)
2) Storage conditions:
a) Temperature: -40 °C to 65 °C (-40 °F to 149 °F)
p. Nominal Maximum Dimensions
1) Height: 92 mm (3.6 in)
2) Diameter 255 mm (10.0 in)
3) Nominal Maximum Weight: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb)
q. Video management software:
1) Manufacturer’sCompanion, Manufacturer’sCamera Station, video management software
2) Languages: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese
r. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 5-year warranty, see axis.com/warranty

3. Manufacturers:
a. Axis
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-69
1) P3727-PLE Panoramic multi-imager camera with mounting and finish hardware provided as required, including:
2) Mounts:
a) AXIS T94N01D Pendant Kit
b) AXIS T94N01L Recessed Mount
c) AXIS TP3814-E Black Casing
b. Avigilon
c. Bosch
d. Hanwa WiseNet
e. Or equal.

2.4 MEDIA CONVERTERS
A. Coax Cable Ethernet Extender:

1. Drawing Reference:
a. CCEE: Coax Cable Ethernet Extender
b. IO6: Indoor/Outdoor Coax Cable

2. Minimum Features/Functions/Performance/Construction - CCEE:
a. The outdoor rated Ethernet Extender over Coax System shall be capable of providing PoE power and transmitting IP Ethernet network data over standard RG59U coaxial cables for distances of up to 1,640 feet (500 meters) over a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet network.
b. The Ethernet Extender over Coax System with Weather-proof Transmitter, shall comprise NEMA TS-2 rated Transmitter and Receiver Units. The Transmitter and Surge Suppressor shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X outdoor rated enclosure. The Transmitter and Receiver units shall be in self-contained aluminum extruded cases 1.1"H x 1.6"W x

5.1"D. The 5.1” dimension being the bottom panel and shall include two mounting tabs, one at each end. The NEMA4X enclosure shall provide protection for the enclosed transmitter and surge suppressor devices from the adverse effects of atmospheric elements and shall be 8.25” x 5.74 X

2.17 with two (2) water-proof cable grommets, four (4) screw holes for securing the face plate to the case body, and four (4) screw holes to be utilized for case body mounting.
c. The Left Panel of both the Transmitter and Receiver units shall provide a RJ45 Network Port for connection to the Ethernet. The RJ45 housing shall contain two LED indicators viewable from the Left Panel. A white LED to indicate PoE power present and a green LED to indicate Ethernet connected.
d. The Right Panel of both Transmitter and Receiver units shall provide a Link Port BNC type female connector for connection to the coaxial cable and two separate LED status indicators; white to indicate PoE power present when illuminated and green to indicate a 100Mb Ethernet link, when illuminated.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-70
e. The Ethernet Extender System Receiver unit shall be powered by either an external PoE supply or network switch with PoE output. PoE supplies shall be compliant with IEEE802.3af or IEEE 802.3at and shall be capable of providing PoE power over the coax cable to power the Transmitter unit and the connected network device.
f. The Ethernet Extender System Transmitter unit shall be powered from the Receiver unit over the connected coaxial cable. The enclosed Transmitter unit shall in turn provide power to the connected network device such as an IP camera. When power requirements of a network device are greater than power available from the Transmitter unit, a local PoE supply shall be connected at the enclosed Transmitter to provide supplemental power. An optional 2.5mm mini-jack for external PoE power input connection shall also be provided on the Left Panel, of the enclosed Transmitter unit for this purpose.
g. The Weatherproof Ethernet Extender System over Coax shall support any standard Network device, shall support mega-pixel cameras and multi-camera installations.
h. The Weatherproof Ethernet Extender System over Coax shall operate in a manner that is completely transparent to the Network. The System shall require no IP or MAC addresses. The system shall operate as follows:
1) A coaxial cable shall be connected between the BNC connectors on the enclosed Transmitter and Receiver.
2) A patch cable from the Receiver shall connect to the head-end Network equipment and a patch cable from the enclosed
Transmitter shall connect to the network device.
3) With PoE power applied to the enclosed Transmitter, the Receiver shall receive power, immediately establish a link with the Transmitter and begin operating as a full-duplex 100BaseT Ethernet conduit.
4) LED indicators on both the enclosed Transmitter and Receiver units shall be illuminated to indicate Power (white LED) and Data connection (green LED).
i. The Ethernet Extender System Over Coax Transmitter and Receiver Units shall be Environmentally Hardened to meet NEMA TS-2 Specifications:
1) Temperature & Humidity – NEMA 2.2.7
2) Operating Temperature Range -40° to 75°C/ -40° to 167°F 3) Mechanical Vibration – NEMA 2.2.8
4) Mechanical Shock – NEMA 2.2.9
5) Operating Voltage – NEMA 2.1.2
6) Operating Frequency – NEMA 2.1.3
7) Transient Test – NEMA 2.1.6 through 2.1.8
j. The Coax Extender shall have a limited lifetime warranty.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-71

3. Minimum Features/Functions/Performance/Construction -IO6:
a. Indoor/outdoor Coaxial Cable
1) General
a) Number of Conductors 1
b) Min AWG Size 18
c) Conductor Stranding Solid
d) Conductor Type Bare Copper
e) Nominal DCR 6.5 Ohm/1000ft
2) Insulation
a) Insulation Type Foam Polyethylene
b) Insulation Thickness 0.18 in
3) Shielding
a) Shield Type 1: 95% Bare Copper Braid
b) Shield Type 2: Aquaseal Water Blocking Tape
4) Electrical Characteristics:
a) Nominal Impedance 75 Ohm
b) Nom. Cap. Between Conductors 16.2 pF/ft
5) Overall Construction Parameters:
a) Jacket Type UV Resistant PVC
b) Nominal Cable O.D. 0.28 in
c) NEC UL Rating CM
d) RoHS Compliant Yes
e) TIA Test TIA455-82 Water Penetration Test
6) Overall Electrical/Optical Characteristics -
a) Nominal Velocity of Propagation (VP) 82 %
b) UL Flammability UL1685
c) Operating Range -20 to 60 Deg C
d) UL Voltage Rating 300

4. Manufacturers - CCEE:
a. NITEK Model EL1500CWS System and NITEK Model IPCOAX Surge Suppression System, with NITEK Model PS48 power supply as required b. Lantronix
c. Axis
d. Or equal.

5. Manufacturers – IO6
a. West Penn AQC806
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-72
b. Belden
c. Commscope
d. Or equal
B. 100base FX Fiberoptic Media Converter with POE, POE+

1. Drawing Reference: 100 FXMC.

2. Minimum Features/Functions/Performance/Construction:
a. Media converter provides conversion from 100 base T to 100 base FX using IEEE standard protocols.
b. Where installed outdoors, industrial construction of assembly is suitable for continuous installation outdoors subject to a wide range of temperature and humidity.
c. Power source: 24VAC or 48-57 VDC.
d. Standards:
1) IEEE 802.3
2) IEEE 802.3x
3) IEEE 802.3u
4) IEEE 802.3ab
5) IEEE 802.3at
6) IEEE 802.3z
7) IEEE 802.3af
e. Status LEDs:
1) PWR (Power): (below RJ-45)
2) FX-Link/Act (Fiber Link/Activity): (Upper Left on RJ-45) ON = Link; Flashing = Activity
3) TX-Link/Act (Copper Link/Activity): (Upper Right on RJ-45) ON = Link; Flashing = Activity
f. Nominal maximum dimensions:
1) Width: 1.8"
2) Depth: 3.3"
3) Height: 0.85"
g. Power Consumption
1) 3.53 Watts (No PoE)
2) 32.725 Watts (1 port PoE+)
h. Power Sources: AC version also supports 22-36 VAC ± 10% i. Overload Current Protection
j. Reverse Polarity Protection
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-73
k. Where installed outdoors, provided finished appearance enclosure meeting NEMA 4X and finished as required by the City’s Representative to house media converter, patch cords and supporting infrastructure.

Where mounted on pole, provide pole mounting hardware.
l. Where installed outdoors, assembly shall be suitable and intended by its manufacturer for installation outdoors. Minimum environmental operating range:
1) Operating Temp: -40°C to 75°C
2) Storage Temp: -40°C to 85°C
3) Humidity: 5% – 95% humidity non-condensing
4) Altitude : 0 – 10,000 ft. altitude
m. Ingress Protection: IP31
n. Regulatory Compliance: FCC Class A, CISPR22/EN55022 Class A, EN55024, CE Mark
o. Supports data rates of 10/100/1000 Mbps
p. Connectors:
1) One or two RJ-45 - 100BaseTX with POE or POE+ providing up to 30 watts to load. Provide port count as required
2) LC - 100baseFX
q. Optical interface: Provision for SingleMode fiber. Provide with SFP optics suitable for transmission at up to at least 3 times the distance of the installed link.

3. Manufacturers, Media Converter:
a. Lantronix/Transition Networks SI-IES-111-LRT or SI-IES-121D-LRT.

Provide with power supply and SFP port optics as required. b. Altronix
c. Axis
d. Avigilon
e. or equal.

4. Manufacturer, Outdoor Enclosure
a. Axis T98A series
b. Hanwa WiseNet
c. Avigilon
d. Custom by Contractor
e. Or equal.

2.5 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Camera Power Supplies

1. Spec Reference: CAM PS
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-74

2. Backboard mounted equipment

3. Function:
a. Power supply.
b. Class 1 (115VAC Input)
c. Individually fused, Power Limited, Class 2 outputs - sized to meet worst case load while maintaining system operations.
d. UL Listings: UL 294, UL603, UL 1069, UL1481 for application e. Power supply and battery fully enclosed in steel NEMA enclosure with cam lock cover and conduit knockouts.
f. Thermal and short circuit protection with auto reset.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Altronix ALTV Series (Design Basis)
b. by camera manufacturer
c. or equal.

B. POE Power Supplies

1. Spec Reference: POE PS

2. Backboard mounted equipment installs on DIN rails.

3. Class 2 Voltage to suit POE device(s). Select for at least 50% safe headroom relative to attached load, cable gauge and run length/IR drop.

4. Approvals:
a. UL 60950-1
b. UL 508
c. Over current protected outputs.

5. Manufacturers
a. Lamda Electronics DPP Series with Altronix DP4 Power Distribution Modules.
b. Altronix
c. By POE Transceiver or Switch Manufacturer
d. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRAMMING AND INSTALLATION
A. Initial Systems Programming

1. Meet with City’s Representative to establish functional requirements for surveillance systems, including but not limited to the following:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-75
a. Camera Views
1) Fixed views
a) The target areas of useable coverage required for each camera are documented on the plans. The scheduled
"View area upper bound distance" defines the minimum
distance for which usable pictures will be provided. The scheduled lensing shown is calculated based on the
mounting height, view area upper bound distance and
the scheduled assumed CCD size. Contractor bears the
responsibility to review the target image requirements
relative to the system the Contractor proposes to provide and to adjust the lensing as necessary.
b) Contractor to review the target for each camera at the Initial Systems Programming Meeting with the City’s
Representative and adjust the target view areas, and
where required, the mounting location to provide the
view currently required by the City’s Representative.
c) For each camera view, Contractor to review with City’s Representative the requirement for electronic masking of images gathered to prevent the system from recording
undesired material.
2) Pan-Tilt-Zoom Views
a) As for Fixed Views above.
b) In addition, review City’s requirement for patrol views (continuous sweeping patterns followed by the cameras
when not under operator control) and preset shots (pre- programmed views that the camera can rapidly switch
between under program and manual control.

2. Document and submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 05 00.

3. Provide initial systems programming in accordance with the preceding.

B. Installation

1. General
a. Conform to the manufacturers recommendations and instructions regarding:
1) camera mounting and adjustment.
2) power and video cable sizing for length of indicated run. b. Wiring Practice - Comply with requirements of Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security.

2. Camera Installation
a. Locate the cameras in accordance with the plans and as required to provide the target images noted on the plans, except where modified through the pre-construction meeting described above.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-76
b. Do not place cameras where they will be subject to ready access or tampering from persons in public access areas of the sites. 1) Bring to the City’s Representative attention through an RFI any proposed location that does not require a ladder or similar means of access from the public space.
2) Obtain City’s Representative's resolution of the RFI prior to proceeding with the installation.
c. Secure cameras to structure so that they can not be readily removed, including with use tools or by force.
1) Cameras are to be mounted to flush mounted backboxes at fed through rear of camera body, except where surface mounting is explicitly called for.
2) Where surface mounting is indicated, use knock-outs on side of camera housing to connect to conduit. Install backbox
containing required structured cabling biscuit box at remote location hidden from view and secure cover with tamperproof fasteners.
3) Select fastening means appropriate to the mounting surface and its underlying framing system and fasten securely to the structure and not to lightweight surface materials. Removal of cameras following successful fastening shall require use of tamper fastener tooling or application of destructive force. City’s Representative reserves the right to request remounting of any camera not found to meet this standard at no additional cost. d. Where mounting to pipe mount indicated/or required by field conditions, select materials to maintain stability of camera image under environmental conditions associated with installation location, including wind load and potential for impact.
e. At exterior cameras, seal openings as directed by the manufacturer’s instructions.
f. Apply manufacturer's recommended anti-graffiti coating to camera housings and domes.
g. Provide cameras with lensing as required to cover area of coverage indicated on the plans.
h. Adjust auto-iris systems at night to gain maximum depth of field under low light conditions.
i. Using a precision display portable video monitor and/or laptop, adjust each camera's angle and field of view as directed by the City’s Representative.

3. Power Supplies.
a. Unless otherwise directed, place camera supplies in the communications room closet to the camera(s) served by the equipment.
b. Submit proposed locations on communications room backboards for review by the City’s Representative prior to installation.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-77
c. Correct installation conditions found to block access work of other Sections.

3.2 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall not apply power to the CCTV system until the following items have been completed:

1. CCTV system equipment items and NVR interface have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. A visual inspection of the CCTV system has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.

3. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.

4. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly installed and connected as indicated.

5. Power supplies to be connected to the CCTV system have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.

B. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installation, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment.

3.3 SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all site testing. The City’s Representative will witness all performance verification and endurance testing. Written permission shall be obtained from the City’s Representative before proceeding with the next phase of testing. Original copies of all data produced during performance verification and endurance testing shall be turned over to the City’s Representative at the conclusion of each phase of testing prior to City’s Representative approval of the test.

B. Contractor's Field Testing.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-78

1. The Contractor shall calibrate and test all equipment, verify system operation, place the integrated system in service, and test the integrated system. Ground rods installed by the Contractor shall be tested as specified in IEEE Std 142. The Contractor shall deliver a report describing results of functional tests, diagnostics, and calibrations including written certification to the City’s Representative that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is ready to begin performance verification testing. The report shall also include a copy of the approved performance verification test procedure. In addition, the Contractor shall make a master video tape recording to DVD showing typical day and night views of each camera in the system and shall deliver the DVD with the report.

Note any objects in the field of view that might produce highlights that could cause camera blinding. Note any objects in the field of view or anomalies in the terrain which may cause blind spots. Note if a camera cannot be aimed to cover the zone and exclude the rising or setting sun from the picture. Note night assessment capabilities and whether lights or vehicle headlights cause blooming or picture degradation. If any of the above conditions or other conditions exist that cause picture degradation or interfere with the camera field of view, the Contractor shall inform the City’s Representative. The DVD shall be recorded using the video recorder installed as part of the CCTV system. If a recorder is not part of the CCTV system, the DVD prepared using the Video Management System installed under the work of this Section. The Contractor shall provide the City’s Representative with the original tape as part of the documentation of the system and shall submit a letter certifying that the CCTV system is ready for performance verification testing. The field testing shall as a minimum include:
a. Verification that the video transmission system and any signal or control cabling have been installed, tested, and approved as specified. b. When the system includes remote control/monitoring stations or remote switch panels, verification that the remote devices are functional, communicate with the security center, and perform all functions as specified.
c. Verification that the switcher is fully functional and that the switcher software has been programmed as needed for the site configuration. d. Verification that switcher software is functioning correctly. All software functions shall be exercised.
e. Verification that software video multiplexers are functioning correctly. f. Operation of all software, electrical and mechanical switcher controls and verification that the control performs the designed function. g. Verification that all analog video sources and video outputs provide a full bandwidth signal at all video inputs.
h. Verification that all video signals are terminated properly. i. Verification that all cameras are aimed and focused properly. The Contractor shall conduct a walk test of the area covered by each camera to verify the field of view.
j. Verification that cameras facing the direction of rising or setting sun are aimed sufficiently below the horizon so that the camera does not view the sun directly.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-79
k. If vehicles are used in proximity of the assessment areas, verification of night assessment capabilities and determination if headlights cause blooming or picture degradation.
l. Verification that all cameras are synchronized and that the picture does not roll when cameras are switched.
m. Verification that the alarm interface to the IDS is functional and that automatic camera call-up is functional with appropriate video annotation for all designated ESS alarm points and cameras.
n. When pan/tilt mounts are used in the system, verification that the limit stops have been set correctly. Verification of all controls for pan/tilt or zoom mechanisms are operative and that the controls perform the desired function. If preposition controls are used, verification that all home positions have been set correctly, and have been tested for auto home function and correct home position.
o. When dome camera mounts are used in the system, verify that all preset positions are correct and that the dome also operates correctly in a manual control mode.

2. The Contractor shall deliver a report describing results of functional tests, diagnostics, and calibrations including written certification to the City’s Representative that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is ready to begin performance verification testing. The report shall also include a copy of the approved performance verification test procedure.

C. Performance Verification Test

1. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the completed CCTV system complies with the contract requirements. Using approved test procedures, all physical and functional requirements of the project shall be demonstrated and shown. The performance verification test, as specified, shall not be started until receipt by the Contractor of written permission from the City’s Representative, based on the Contractor's written report. This shall include certification of successful completion of Contractor Field Testing as specified in paragraph "Contractor's Field Testing," and upon successful completion of training as specified. If the CCTV system is being installed in conjunction with an ESS, the CCTV performance verification test shall be run simultaneously with the ESS performance verification test. The City’s Representative may terminate testing at any time when the system fails to perform as specified. Upon successful completion of the performance verification test, the Contractor shall deliver test reports and other documentation as specified to the City’s Representative prior to commencing the endurance test.

2. Testing
a. Video Systems:
1) Picture Monitors:
a) Apply crosshatch. Verify linearity.
b) Apply red field. Adjust purity.
2) Camera Operation: Demonstrate that each camera:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 VISUAL SURVEILLANCE SECTION 28 2300-80
a) Responds appropriately to PTZ controls from the DVR
and from software installed on the City’s PC's, where
camera is PTZ equipped.
b) Produces images in conformance with specifications and as defined in the initial systems programming
requirements.
c) At PTZ enabled cameras, provides "patrol" and pre-set shots in conformance with specifications and as defined in the initial systems programming requirements.
d) Includes date/time/camera number identification.
b. Uninterrupted Power Systems: Disconnect normal power service.

Demonstrate that the system remains in full operation for the specified time.

3.4 LABELING
A. Conform with the requirements of Section 27 05 53 – Identification for Communications Systems.

END OF SECTION
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-1
SECTION 28 3100 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS ADDRESSABLE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire alarm and detection systems.

B. One-way emergency communications system with voice notification within-building, coverage.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification: Refer to electrical identification for color and identification labeling requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems with ten years' experience.

B. Installer: A factory-authorized Electrical or Security Contractor licensed with the State and local jurisdiction with five years' experience in the design, installation, and maintenance of fire alarm systems by that manufacturer.

C. Qualifications: The person managing/overseeing the preparation of shop drawings and the system installation/programming/testing shall be trained and certified by the system manufacturer and shall be Fire Alarm Certified by NICET, minimum Level 2. This person's name and certification number shall appear on the start-up and testing reports.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
C. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
D. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
E. UL 2017 - General Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems F. UL 217 / 268 - Standard for Smoke Alarms / Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems G. Fire Code (CFC)

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 26 0500 and as noted below.

1. Failure to comply with all the following and all the provisions in 26 05 00 will result in the shop drawing submitt
al being rejected without review.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-2

2. Failure to submit the fire alarm without all requirements fulfilled in a single comprehensive submittal will be grounds to require a complete resubmittal.

B. Provide product catalog data sheets as shop drawings.

1. Provide a product catalog data sheet for each item shown on the Electrical Symbols List and for each piece of equipment that is not shown on the drawings, but required for the operation of the system.

2. Where a particular Electrical Symbols List item has one or more variations (such as those denoted by subscripts, etc.) a separate additional product catalog data sheet shall be provided for each variation that requires a different part number to be ordered. The corresponding Electrical Symbols List symbol shall be shown on the top of each sheet.

3. Where multiple items and options are shown on one data sheet, the part number and options of the item to be used shall be clearly denoted.

C. Submit CAD Floor Plans as Shop Drawings:

1. The complete layout of the entire system, device addresses, auxiliary equipment, and manufacturer's wiring requirements shall be shown.

2. Indicate the precise routing of notification appliance circuits under the provisions of circuit survivability. Refer to "Wiring" under Part 3 - Execution of this specification section for requirements.

3. A legend or key shall be provided to show which symbols shown on the submittal floor plans correspond with symbols shown on the Contract Documents.

D. About all fire alarm circuits, provide the following: manufacturer's wiring requirements (manufacturer, type, size, etc.) and voltage drop calculations.

E. Provide installation and maintenance manuals under provisions of Section 26 0500.

F. Submit manufacturer's certificate that system meets or exceeds specified requirements.

G. Provide information on the system batteries as follows: total battery capacity, total capacity used by all devices on this project, total available future capacity.

H. Voice Alarm Communication System: Submit equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculations, and wiring diagram.

I. Submit photocopy proof of NICET certification of the person overseeing the preparation of drawings and installation/testing.

J. When required to comply with local or state regulatory reviews, the fire alarm submittal shall have a NICET Certification of the state in which the project is completed. NOTE: The Architect/Engineer cannot stamp and seal submittal drawings not prepared under their supervision.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Provide quantity equal to 2 percent (2%) of amount of each type installed, but no less than two (2) units of each type.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-3
a. Smoke and heat detectors, manual pull stations, duct smoke detectors, monitor modules, control modules and relays.
b. Notification Appliances: Speakers, speaker strobes, and strobes.

2. Keys: The installing contractor shall collect all equipment spare keys provided with each lockable or resettable device/cabinet minimum of one (1) set each and shall turn over to the Owner upon completion.

3. All spare parts shall be housed in metal cabinet labeled "Fire Alarm Spare Parts."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 26 0500.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. System: UL or FM Global listed.

B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.

C. Conform to UL 864 Fire Alarm, UL 1076 Security, UL2017 General Signaling, and UL 2572 Mass Notification Communications.

1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Statement: This specification section and the accompanying fire alarm specific design documents describe the minimum material quality, required features, and operational requirements of the system. These documents do not convey every wire that must be installed and every equipment connection that must be made. Based on the equipment described and the performance required of the system, as presented in these documents, the Vendor and the Contractor are solely responsible for determining all wiring, programming and miscellaneous equipment required for a complete and operati
onal system.

B. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation and connection of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting, fire alarm equipment required to form a complete coordinated system that is ready for operation. It shall include, but is not limited to, alarm initiating devices, voice evacuation equipment, control panels, auxiliary control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

C. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72; Automatic and manual fire alarm system, non-coded, analog- addressable with automatic sensitivity control of certain detectors, multiplexed signal transmission.

D. In-Building Network: A complete fire alarm system network shall be provided. Provide quantity of control panels as indicated on the drawings. The network shall be a Style 7 token ring, peer-to-peer network. The network shall be characterized by simultaneous or sequential transmission, or both, and reception of multiple signals on a signaling line circuit or communication channel. The distributed intelligent characteristic of the network shall provide for all nodes independently making pertinent system decisions with no need for a central controller. Each node shall be capable of independent operation should loss of network communications occur. In no case shall read-only network annunciation be acceptable as the only networking function.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-4
E. Voice Communication: The facility shall have an emergency voice alarm communication system.

The digitized recorded voice message shall notify occupants that a fire condition has been reported.

Emergency manual voice override shall be provided.

F. Emergency Communication System (ECS): A system capable of reproduction of prerecorded, synthesized, or live messages with voice intelligibility to indicate the existence of an emergency situation and communicating information necessary to facilitate an appropriate response and action.

The system shall provide alerting in the building.

G. System Supervision: Provide electrically supervised system, with supervised Signal Line Circuit (SLC) and Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). Occurrence of single ground or open condition in initiating or signaling circuit places circuit in TROUBLE mode. Component or power supply failure places system in TROUBLE mode.

H. Alarm Reset: Key-accessible RESET function resets alarm system out of ALARM if alarm initiating circuits have cleared.

I. Lamp Test: Manual LAMP TEST function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel and at annunciator panels.

J. Drawings: Only device layouts and some equipment have been shown on the contract drawings.

Wiring and additional equipment to make a complete and functioning system has not been shown, but shall be submitted on the shop drawings.

1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit document
s under the provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Include location of end-of-line devices.

C. Provide a CAD drawing of each area of the building (minimum scale of 1/8" = 1'-0") showing each device on the project and its address. The devices shall be shown in their installed location and shall be labeled with the same nomenclature as is used in the fire alarm panel programming.

D. Submit test results of sound pressure level (dBA) and intelligibility (STI) with the rooms tested designated on the floor plan. Notification devices shall have the tap wattage designated.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures.

C. Include results of testing of all devices and functions.

D. Include manufacturer's representative's letter stating that system is operational.

E. Include the CAD floor plan drawings.

F. Include shop drawings as reviewed by the Architect/Engineer and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-5

1.12 DOCUMENT STORAGE CABINET
A. The cabinet shall have all fire alarm system documents, including record drawings, wiring diagrams, operation manuals, etc. A legend sheet permanently attached to the door shall contain system passwords and inspection logs. The enclosure shall also provide two (2) key ring holders for system keys and a location for a standard size business card with service contact information.

1. The cabinet will have, permanently and securely mounted inside, a digital flash memory device with a minimum of 4 GB of storage capacity and a standard USB B connector for uploading and downloading electronic versions of record documents and system programming information.

B. The cabinet shall be red in color with an identification label reading "FIRE ALARM DOCUMENTS". Refer to Identification Section 26 0553. The cabinet shall be lockable.

C. The final version of the system database program shall be stored within the cabinet.

1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year warranty on all materials and labor from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Warranty requirements shall include furnishing and installing all software upgrades issued by the manufacturer during the one (1) year warranty period.

1.14 ANNUAL INSPECTION/TESTING AND SERVICE CONTRACT
A. Provide cost to furnish service, inspect, and test all devices of the fire alarm system per the requirement of NFPA
for one (1) year, starting one year after the Date of Substantial Completion.

Submit written reports of inspection testing per NFPA 72, Chapter 14.

B. The Owner may enter into a contract directly with the vendor after shop drawing submittals. This specification is not a contract between the Owner and the vendor to perform these services.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. 6820EVS by Honeywell

2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FAP)
A. Control Panel: Modular, power-limited electronic design. Provide surface wall-mounted enclosure as shown on plans. Enclosure shall be minimum 0.060 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators.

B. Each Signaling Line Circuit (SLC loop) shall not be loaded over 80% of the maximum device capacity. For example, in the minimum system capacity column listed below, if the fire alarm manufacturer's system capacity of analog sensors per loop is 99 devices, then no more than 79 devices shall be wired on that loop. The minimum system capacity shall be as follows:

1. Minimum Total Addressable Points: 198
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-6

2. Minimum Total SLC Loops (including board, ready for field connections): 1

3. Panel Expansion Capability, Minimum Total SLC Loops: 10

4. Minimum Node Capacity for Network System: 100
C. Signal Line Circuit (SLC) and Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Boards:

1. Each board shall communicate directly with each addressable analog sensor and binary input to determine normal, alarm, or trouble conditions. Analog signals would be used for automatic test and determination of maintenance requirements.

2. Each board shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be provided to monitor addressable inputs and to control addressable outputs (addressable relays). The board shall communicate and provide power to all devices on its loop over a single pair of wires, except where 4-wire devices require a separate power circuit.

D. Central Processing Unit:

1. The central processing unit (CPU) shall communicate with the monitor and control all other modules in the panel. Removal, disconnection or failure of any control panel module shall be detected and reported to the CPU.

2. The CPU shall execute all control-by-event programs for specific action to be taken if a designated situation is detected in the system. A real-time system clock for time annotations on the display and printer shall be included.

3. All power for the unit shall be supervised and supplied by the FAP.

E. Display:

1. The board shall provide all controls and indica
tors used by the system operator and may also
be used to program all control panel parameters.

2. The board shall provide an alphanumeric array for display of custom alphanumeric labels for all addressable points. It shall also provide indicators for AC Power, System Alarm, System Trouble, Display Trouble and Signal Silence.

3. Displayed descriptions of addressable points shall include actual room names/numbers selected by the Owner. This information shall be obtained prior to programming. Room names/numbers shown on floor plans shall not be used.

4. The board shall provide a touch key-pad with control capability to command all system functions and entry of any alphanumeric information. Twenty different passwords with four levels of security shall be supported to prevent unauthorized manual control or programming.

F. Memory: The CPU and display interface board shall be augmented by non-volatile field programmable memory. EPROM memory will also be allowed provided the memory is burned in with minimum expansion capability equal to the total system capacity of the panel. Memory shall not be lost upon primary and secondary power failure.

G. Serial Interface Board: The board shall provide interfaces to a printer, LCD display and other monitor
ing devices through RS-232 connections. The minimum operational distance between the board and the peripheral devices shall be 500 feet. Up to three (3) RS-232 outputs shall be supported.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-7
H. Power Supply:

1. Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hertz. Output power shall be as noted on the device specifications and drawings. Each component of the fire alarm system requiring 120 VAC input power shall be served from a dedicated branch circuit. Provide two #12 conductors and one #12 ground in 3/4" conduit to a dedicated 20A/1P circuit breaker with a red handle and a manufacturer's standard handle lock-on device. Identify/label breaker and branch circuit in accordance with NFPA requirements and Specification Section 26 0553.

2. Adequate to supply 125% of all control panel and peripheral power needs as well as 125% of power required for all external audio-visual devices. The power supply may be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion power supplies. Over-current protections shall be provided on all power outputs.

3. All power supplies shall be designed and installed to meet UL and NFPA requirements for power-limited operation on all external initiating and indicating circuits.

4. The power supply shall provide integral charger for use with internal batteries. Battery capacity shall be sufficient for operation of the entire system for 24 hours in a non-alarm state followed by alarm mode for 15 minutes, plus 25% spare capacity for future devices.

I. Surge Protecti
on:

1. All fire alarm control panels, NAC panels, etc. shall be provided with a surge protection device (SPD). The SPD shall be UL listed to Standard 1449 Rev 3. The unit should be clearly labeled in accordance with Identification Section 26 0553. The SPD shall have thermal fuses to protect against fire in short circuit conditions. The unit shall provide visual indication that the unit is protecting and functioning.

2. Any communications or signaling circuits associated with the fire alarm system, which leave or enter a facility, shall be provided with a surge protection device. The devices shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer.

J. Digital Cellular Fire Communicator:

1. Provide digital internet / cellular phone interface capable of fire alarm notification to the local fire department, fire protection agency, or monitoring service. Monitoring fees and initial connection charges are not part of this project.

2. Contractor to provide connection of communicator to Owner's Ethernet 10/100 Base network connection. Wiring shall be in 1" conduit.

3. Communicator shall convert fire alarm control panel phone outputs into Ethernet packets and transmit to GSM networks in area including 2G, 3G, and 4G.

4. Communication shall include system status including individual addressable device status, power loss, low batte
ry and earth fault, and 24-hour test signal.

K. Digitized Voice Command Center (VCC): Include integral with fire alarm system.

1. The Digitized Voice Command Center (VCC) shall contain all equipment required for all audio control signaling, and supervisory functions. Function: The Voice Command Center equipment shall perform the following functions:
a. Operate as a supervised single channel automatic digitized voice evacuation system with manual emergency voice communication system.
b. Dual channel speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one (1) speaker circuit per floor of the building or smoke zone, whichever is greater. c. Operate as a two-way emergency firefighter phone system control center. The two-way emergency telephone system shall support a minimum of seven (7) handsets on line without degradation of the signal.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-8
d. Audibly and visually annunciate the active or trouble condition of every signal circuit e. Audibly and visually annunciate any trouble condition of tone generators and digital voice units required for normal operation of the system. f. Provide all-call activities through activation of a single control switch. g. Provide automatic, digitally recorded voice messages and tones.

2. Audio Amplifiers (AMP): Include integral with fire alarm system. a. The audio amplifiers will provide a dual channel audio power at 25-volt or 70-volt RMS for distribution to speaker circuits.
b. The audio amplifier shall include an integral power supply, and shall provide the following controls and indicators:
1) Normal Audio Level LED
2) Incorrect Audio Level LED
3) Battery Trouble LED
4) Amplifier Trouble LED
5) Audio Amplifier Gain Adjust
c. Includes audio input and amplified output supervision backup input and automatic switchover function, if primary amplifier should fail.

3. Audio Message Generator (Digitized Voice):
a. Each initiating zone or intelligent device shall interface with an emergency voice communication system capable of transmitting a digitized voice message to all speakers in the building.
b. Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause a digitized message to sound over the speakers. The message shall be repeated four (4) times. c. A built-in microphone shall be provided to allow paging through speaker circuits. d. The audio message generat
or shall have the following controls and indicators to allow for proper operator understanding and control:
1) All Call LED
2) On-Line LED
3) All Call Switch

4. Voice Messages:
a. A pre-programmed custom digital voice message shall be used for notification appliance speaker circuits. The messages shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Voice messages shall be from a femaleor male voice. The messages shall be provided in the multi-lingual language of the predominant building population.
b. Message shall be preceded by a tone and message shall be repeated four times until silenced.
c. Primary messages shall be annunciated in the zone of fire alarm and adjoining areas' evacuation signaling zones, and the secondary message in all other evacuation signaling zones.
d. Fire Alarm Pre-Recorded Messages: Refer to drawings for fire alarm pre-recorded message schedule. Message shall be as shown in the schedule.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-9

5. Speaker Circuit Control Switches/Indicators:
a. The speaker circuit control switches/indicators shall include visual indication of active and trouble status for each speaker circuit in the system. b. The speaker circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or de- activate each speaker circuit in the system.
c. Buttons shall be provided on the voice command center to manually activate all auxiliary messages. (i.e. all clear, severe weather, homeland security warning, custom message).

2.3 Fire Alarm Pathway Class and Survivability Level
A. Pathway Class:

1. Pathway Class B: Circuits NOT capable of transmitting an alarm beyond the location of the fault condition. Wiring of outgoing and return conductors is permitted to be run in the same conduit or cable.

2. Pathway Class: SLC for addressable devices with less than 50 devices can be Class A or B, and more than 50 devices shall be Class A.

2.4 FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET (FATC)
A. Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet with locked hinged door. Provide as an extension of the main fire alarm system.

2.5 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT DEVICES
A. Combination Devices: Subscripts identify combination type devices when applicable. Contractor shall provide the combination device or provide multiple device(s) to meet the functionality when the manufacturer does not offer the required functionality with a single device.

B. Signal Line
Device(s):

1. Subscripts: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device type as follows:
1) W = Weather Proof
2) Candela Ratings:
a) ## = 15 Candela, 30 Candela; 75 Candela; 110 Candela; 177 Candela b) CD = NICET designer shall select Candela rating as required to provide full coverage of the space.
b. Sequence of operation as follows:
1) D = HVAC Control
2) DH = Door Hold Release
C. FA-120; Smoke Detectors:

1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-10
a. Device types as follows:
1) Blank = Photoelectric
2) ID = In-Duct Detector

2. (BLANK) Analog Photoelectric Type Sensor: Shall use the photoelectric principle to measure smoke density and send data to the control panel representing the analog level of smoke density measured.

3. (BR) and (BT) Projected Beam Type Detectors: This device shall utilize photoelectric analog smoke sensor technology. Provide with transmitter and associated receiver. Microprocessor- based detector shall provide a minimum of eight sensitivity levels, temperature and dirt compensation, and automatic gain control. Sensor to contain beam alignment adjustments and receiver calibration.
a. Detector shall connect directly to an SLC loop or shall be provided with multiple monitor modules, as required, to connect to the SLC loop and for monitoring alarm and trouble output contacts. The detector shall be provided complete with all mounting hardware provided and installed where indicated on the drawings. b. Dual alarm and power indicators shall be provided that flash under normal conditions and remain continuous under alarm or trouble conditions. Remote indicator terminals shall be provided.
c. Provide with remote indicator panel providing LED indications of alarm and trouble.

4. (IN) In-Duct Smoke Detectors:
a. Analog Photoelectric Type Sensor: Shall use the photoelectric principle to measure smoke density and send data to the control panel representing the analog level of smoke density measured.
b.

Analog Ionization Type Sensor: Shall use the dual chamber ionization principle to measure smoke density and send data to the control panel representing the analog level of smoke density measured.
c. Low Flow Type: Listed for use in duct with 0-2000 feet per minute velocity. d. Each smoke detector shall connect directly to an SLC loop. e. Each detector shall be mounted, where shown on the drawings, on a twist-lock base with all mounting hardware provided to match the duct application. Provide a two- piece head/base design.
f. Each detector shall have a manual switching means to set the internal identifying code (address) of that detector, which the control panel shall use to identify its address with the type of sensor connected.
g. Provide a remote LED indicator device (FA-240/241), mounted in ceiling directly below detector with a single-gang faceplate labeled: Duct Smoke Detector.

5. Each smoke detector shall connect directly to an SLC loop, unless listed as stand alone.

6. Each detector shall be mounted, where shown on the drawings, on a twist-lock base with all mounting hardware provided. Provide a two-piece head/base design.

7. Each detector shall have a manual switching means to set the internal identifying code (address) of that detec
tor, which the control panel shall use to identify its address with the type of sensor connected.

8. Dual alarm and power indicators shall be provided that flash under normal conditions and remain continuous under alarm or trouble conditions. Remote indicator terminals shall be provided. Provide a remote LED indicator device if detector is not visible from a floor standing position.

9. A test means shall be provided to simulate an alarm condition.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-11

10. Where operation is noted as required below 32°F and/or above 120°F, a conventional device shall be installed with a unique monitor module located in the nearest available location with maintained temperatures between 32°F and 120°F.

11. Audible Sounder Detector Base for Sleeping Room Applications:
a. The audible base shall sound an alarm in the local room in UL2017 operation and UL484 for general evacuation. The unit shall be programmable by the main control panel for the duration of operation.
b. The audible sounder base shall sound Temporal 3 (fire) or Temporal 4 (CO alarm) and be at 75 dB at 10 feet.

D. FA-122; Duct Smoke Detectors, Sampling Tube Type:

1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) # = Equipment or system
b. Duct-type smoke detectors shall use the same analog photoelectric sensor technology, with the same features specified for standard smoke detectors, except with additional features as specified below.
c. Provide sampling tubes and mounting hardware to match the duct to which it is attached. Where the detector housing is larger than the duct height, Contractor shall fabricate a mounting bracket for the detector and attach according to the fire alarm manufacturer's recomm
endations.
d. Provide a remote alarm LED indicator device (FA-241) or (FA-242) if detector is not visible from a floor-standing position. If detector is located above a suspended ceiling, mount remote indicator in ceiling directly below detector with a white single-gang faceplate labeled: Duct Smoke Detector.

E. FA-130; Manual Pull Stations:

1. Manual pull station, addressable, single action with plastic breakrod, reset key lock, semi- flush mount, red high abuse plastic or cast metal construction with white lettering. Provided with all necessary mounting hardware. Use surface mount only on precast concrete or structure.

2. Manual stations shall connect directly to an SLC loop. Stations shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal or DIP switches.

3. Where operation is noted as required below 32°F and/or above 120°F, a conventional device shall be installed with a unique monitor module located in the nearest available location, with maintained temperatures between 32°F and 120°F.

F. FA-131; Manual Pull Stations with Cover:

1. Manual pull station, addressable, single action with plastic breakrod, reset key lock, semi- flush mount, red high abuse plastic or cast metal construction with white lettering. Provide device with clear Lexan tamper resistant cover with integral 9V battery powered alarm that sounds when shield is lifted. Provided with all necessary mounting hardware. Use surface mount only on precast concret
e or structure.

2. Manual stations shall connect directly to an SLC loop. Stations shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal or DIP switches.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-12

3. Where operation is noted as required below 32°F and/or above 120°F, a conventional device shall be installed with a unique monitor module located in the nearest available location, with maintained temperatures between 32°F and 120°F.

G. FA-160; Monitor Modules:

1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) Blank = Refer to Plans
2) KB = Knox Box Monitor

2. Monitor Module shall connect directly to an SLC loop and receive power from a separate 24 VDC circuit. It shall interface initiating devices with the control panel using Style D or Style B circuits. Contractor Option: Use an interface module (2-wire operation) for Style B circuits connected to normally-open dry contacts, such as a flow switch.

3. The module shall be mounted in an enclosure located in an accessible service location as near as possible to the device(s) being monitored, or where shown on the drawings. All mounting hardware shall be provided.

4. The module shall supply the required power to operate the monitored device(s).

5. The module shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal or DIP switches.

H. FA-161; Addressable Control Module:

1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific
sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) Blank = Refer to Plans
2) DH = Door Hold Open
3) PD = Hold Open Override

2. Relay that represents an addressable control point used primarily for the control of auxiliary devices as indicated on the drawings. Contractor to provide additional child relay(s), as required, rated for the electrical load being controlled (Contractor to match voltage, amps, etc.).

3. Relay shall connect directly to an SLC loop and receive power from a separate 24 VDC circuit.

4. The relay shall be mounted in an enclosure located in an accessible service location as near as possible to the device(s) being controlled, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. All mounting hardware shall be provided.

5. The relay shall supply 24 VDC power to the device(s) being controlled, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE DEVICES
A. Combination Devices: Subscripts identify combination type devices when applicable. Contractor shall provide the combination device or provide multiple device(s) to meet the functionality when the manufacturer does not offer the required functionality with a single device.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-13
B. Notification Appliance Device(s):

1. Subscripts: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) W = Weather Proof
2) Candela Ratings:
a) ## = 15 Candela; 30 Candela; 75 Candela; 110 Candela; 177 Candela b) CD = NICET designer shall select Candela rating as required to provide full coverage of the space.

C. Notification Device(s):

1. Wall Mounted: Red housing with white lettering or pictogram.

2. Ceiling Mounted: Red housing with white lettering or pictogram.

D. FA-200; Visual Alarm Devices:

1. Wall or ceiling mounted, refer to plans.

2. High intensity (Candela rating as scheduled on the drawings) xenon strobe or equivalent under a lens. Candela rating shall be visible from exterior of the device.

3. The maximum pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with a maximum duty cycle of 40%. The flash rate shall be 1 Hz. Where more than two strobes are visible from any one location, the fire alarm visual devices shall be synchronized.

4. Device, housing, and backbox shall be UL listed for fire alarm/emergency applications.

5. (W) Weatherproof Visual Notification Device: High intensity strobe, square housing, 75 Candela rating, suitable for wet locations. Provide with weatherproof back box. a. Mounting: Semi-flush wall.
b. Conduit shall not be exposed.

E. FA-210; Audio Horn Alarm Devices:

1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.

2. Wall or ceiling mounted, refer to plans.

3. Sound Rating: 85 dB at 10 feet. Sound levels for alarm signals shall not exceed 120 dBA in the occupied area.

4. Device shall be capable of a high and low dB level setting. Unless noted otherwise, the device shall be set to the high setting at building completion.

5. Device, housing, and backbox shall be UL listed for fire alarm/emergency applications.

6. (M) Mini-Horn Audio Notification Device: Electronic Horn. a. Mounting: Single-gang flush wall.

F. FA-211; Combination Audio Horn and Visual Alarm Device:

1. Wall or ceiling mounted, refer to plans.

2. Combine audio and visual components into a single device. Refer to the corresponding paragraphs above for requirements of each component.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-14

3. (W) Weatherproof Audio/Visual Notification Device: Electronic horn with high intensity strobe, square housing, 75 Candela, suitable for wet locations. Provide with weatherproof back box.
a. Mounting: Semi-flush wall.
b. Conduit shall not be exposed.

G. FA-220; Audio (Speaker) Alarm Devices:

1. Wall or ceiling mounted, refer to plans.

2. Sound rating shall be dependent on the tap (wattage) setting. Tap settings shall be available in 3 dBA increments. A minimum of four (4) tap settings should be available to allow field adjustment of the sound output across a minimum range of 78 to 87 dBA, 400Hz to 4KHz (6 dBA cutoff) frequency range. Speakers shall operate on a 25-volt or 70-volt RMS system, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

3. Speakers shall clearly reproduce a signal consisting of a live or prerecorded human voice and with voice intelligibility.

4. Speaker, housing, and backbox shall be UL listed for fire alarm/emergency applications.

5. Wall Mounted: Speaker, square housing, flush or semi-flush mounted.

2.7 DOOR HOLD-OPEN DEVICES
A. FA-270; Electromagnetic Door Holder Devices:

1. Flush wall mounted Surface wall mounted.

2. Voltage: 120V.

3. Holding force shall be 25 pounds minimum.

4. Provide fail-safe operation; power failure releases door.

5. Provide self-adjusting swivel catch plate with pivot points to adjust to door alignment changes.

6. Provide all hardware and wiring needed to accommodate the complete functioning door holder install
ation.

7. Ensure that the door hardware and trim projections are compatible with total projection of door release.

8. Provide firm anchoring for the electromagnet, such that the mounting box and device will not move independently from the wall or floor they are mounted to. This device and mounting will function as a doorstop and hold the force of the door closer mechanism.

9. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation and location instructions unless noted otherwise.

10. Electromagnetic door holder devices, housing, and back box shall be UL listed.

2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT PANEL (NAC)
A. As shown on the plans or as a Contractor's option if not shown, furnish and install NAC extender panels as necessary to provide remote power supply for notification appliance circuits (NAC).

Contractor shall indicate quantity and locations of each NAC on the shop drawing submittals.

B. Each NAC shall be self-contained remote power supply with batteries, and battery charger mounted in a surface lockable cabinet. Battery capacity shall be sufficient for operation for 24 hours in a non-alarm state followed by alarm for 15 minutes, plus 25% spare capacity for future devices. Each NAC provides a minimum of up to 4 outputs, 2A continuous, or 6A full load total capac ity.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-15
C. Power for each NAC shall be from a local 120 VAC circuit. Provide two #12 conductors and one #12 ground in 1/2" conduit to each NAC from a dedicated 20A/1P circuit breaker with a red handle and a manufacturer's standard handle lock-on device. Coordinate panel and circuit number with the Architect/Engineer prior to installation.

D. NAC extender panels may be installed only where shown on drawings.

E. Mounting: Surface.

2.9 ANNUNCIATION
A. FAA; Remote LCD Annunciators:

1. Auxiliary annunciators shall indicate alarm and trouble conditions visually and audibly as shown on the drawings. Provide local TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, TEST, and ALARM SILENCE capability. Minimum 80-character display.

2. Communications and power to the annunciators shall be supervised. The annunciator shall receive power from the fire alarm control panel.

3. A single key switch shall enable all switches on the annunciator.

4. Mounting: Surface.

B. Facility Management Control System (FMCS) Interface:

1. Provide addressable relays to report the following to the FMCS via dry contact monitoring on the FMCS:
a. General Alarm
b. System Trouble
c. Supervisory Alarm
d. Other Alarms (if applicable)

2. Provide BACnet IP interface for fire alarm panel to communicate status with the FMCS.

Provide list of points and descriptions to FMCS supplier. a. UL listed to Standard 864. Provide RJ45 connection and cable.

2.10 ETHERNET NETWORK
A. Campus Etherne
t IP Network: A complete fire alarm and mass notification Ethernet network shall be provided. The network shall be Class X wiring, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) 100BaseTX / 100 Mbps that shall be able to operate with any single break and restore network communications.

2.11 CONNECTIONS TO AUXILIARY DEVICES PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. FA-250; Smoke and Fire/Smoke Damper Controller:

1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.

2. Device types as follows:
a. + = Indicates equipment system associated with smoke or fire/smoke damper.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-16

3. Motorized type, 120 VAC, furnished and installed by MC. Fire alarm control and power connections by EC. A subscript is used to identify the device with a specific air handler or zone for its sequence of operation. Refer to the Fire Alarm Operation Matrix on the drawings and the sequence of operation descriptions in this specification section for additional requirements.

4. The EC provides:
a. Fire alarm control and power connections by EC.
b. Fire alarm addressable control module (FA-161) located within 5 feet of smoke damper.
c. Smoke detection, selected by NICET designer based on duct size, ventilation airflow, and specific field conditions. Detector shall be mounted within 5 feet of smoke damper. Approved options include:
1) Smoke Detector (FA-120) (ID) In-Duct Detector. In-duct smoke detector in ducts less than 18". Detector shall be listed for use in HVAC ductwork. 2) Duct Smoke Detector (FA-122). Sampling type duct detector (FA-122) in ducts 18" and larger.
d. Remote indicator (FA-241) or Remote Indicator with test switch (FA-242) mounted in visible location. Refer to drawings for mounting location or verify location with engineer when not shown.
e. The smoke damper shall close upon activation of the detector, and a supervisory signal shall be sent to the fire alarm control panel. Refer to the Fire Alarm Operation Matrix and these specific
ations for complete requirements.

B. FA-260; Flow Switch:

1. (FA-260) Connection to flow switch to monitor fire protection flow switch or discharge output contacts. Normally open dry contacts for fire alarm interface. Furnished and installed by MC; wired by EC.

2. Provide a dedicated monitor switch for each sprinkler flow switch.

C. FA-261; Tamper / Monitor Switch:

1. (FA-261) Connection to monitor switch to monitor fire protection system supervisory switches or output contacts. Normally open dry contacts for fire alarm interface. Furnished and installed by MC; wired by EC.

2. Tamper switches in the same room or system may be monitored by a single monitor switch when shown grouped on the plans.

3. Subscripts: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.

4. Device types as follows:
a. Blank = Refer to Plans
b. PIV = Post Indicator Valve

5. (PIV) Post Indicator Valve. Connection to post indicator valve for sprinkler system supervisory notification. Normally open dry contacts for fire alarm interface. Furnished and installed by MC; wired by EC. Provide surge protection device as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer on line entering/leaving the facility.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-17
D. FA-263; Electronic Bell:

1. Electronic bell for sprinkler alarm, electro-mechanical type, 120 VAC. Furnished and installed by MC. Fire alarm control and power connections by EC.

E. FA-271; Door Hold Device:

1. Subscript: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. DH - Door Hold Open
b. PD = Hold Open Override

2. (BLANK) Integral with door hardware, 120 VAC. Furnished and installed by GC. Fire alarm control and power connections by EC.

3. (PD) Hold open override connection to GC-provided power door operator. EC shall intercept the hold open switch wiring (unless specific contacts for this purpose are provided on the door) and connect addressable relay to override this switch and allow the door to close. All modifications to the power door operator shall be coordinated with the GC.

2.12 WIRING
A. Fire alarm wiring/cabling shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and pursuant to National Fire Codes. Cabling shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with the Electrical Code for power-limited fire alarm signal service.

B. Fire Alarm Cable:

1. Manufacturers:
a. West Penn Wire/CDT.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SEQUENCES OF FIRE ALARM OPERATION
A. General:

1. Refer to the Fire Alarm Operation Matrix on the drawings for basic requirements and system operation.

2. The GUI/graphic annunciator shall display audible and visual alarms. The device activated shall be immediately displayed on a CAD floor plan at approximately 1/8" scale. Visual indication shall further indicate the device by utilizing an easily recognized color change of the symbol. The use of flashing symbols is encouraged.

3. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event equations to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.

B. Panel/Annunciator Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory Indication:

1. Appropriate system Alarm, Trouble, or Supervisory LED shall flash at the control panel, transponder, and annunciator locations.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-18

2. A local signal in the control panel and the color graphics PC shall sound.

3. The LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the condition, including the name of the item, type of device and its location within the protected premises.

4. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated with the fire alarm control panel (FAP) condition, along with the time and date.

5. Transmit the appropriate signal (supervisory, trouble, alarm) to the central station via the digital communicator.

6. Transmit the appropriate signal (supervisory, trouble, alarm) to the building automation system via addressable relays tied to contact monitors on the system.

C. Audible Alarms Sequence:

1. Audible alarms throughout the building shall sound.

D. Visual Alarms Sequence:

1. Visual alarms throughout the building shall flash.

E. Fire Protection Electric Sprinkler Bell Sequence:

1. The fire alarm shall utilize an addressable relay to energize the electric sprinkler bell upon activation of the flow switch.

F. Smoke Damper Control Sequence:

1. The AHU and mechanical fan shutdown sequence shall be initiated only when ALL the dampers associated with that unit or mechanical fan are closed. Otherwise, the AHU or mechanical fan shall continue to serve other areas.

2. All smoke and fire/smoke dampers shall be closed throughout the building.

G. AHU and Mechanical Fan Shutdown Sequence:

1. The fire alarm
system shall utilize addressable relays to de-energize all AHU motor controllers and mechanical fans. Coordinate other requirements with HVAC installer.

2. The fire alarm system shall directly shut down the AHU or mechanical fan through the local HVAC control device (i.e., variable frequency drive or motor starter).

3. Where a facility has more than one AHU or mechanical fan, each shall be shutdown individually based on input from initiation devices in the area served by the unit or designated for each air distribution system.

4. All AHUs and mechanical fans shall be shutdown simultaneously throughout the building.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced codes.

B. Fire Alarm Control Panel:

1. Install the control panel where shown on the drawings.

2. All expansion compartments, if required, shall be located at the control panel.

3. Install the voice command center and fire command center in the location as indicated on the drawings. This location should be primary fire department "attack" location. Coordinate with the local fire department prior to submitting shop drawings.

4. The fire alarm voice prerecorded messages shall be verified by the Contractor, as approved by the Owner, prior to the shop drawing submittal process.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-19
C. Devices:

1. General:
a. All ceiling-mounted devices shall be located where shown on the reflected ceiling and floor plans. If not shown on the reflected ceiling or reflected floor drawings, the devices shall be installed in the relative locations shown on the floor drawings in a neat and uniform pattern.
b. All devices shall be coordinated with luminaires, diffusers, sprinkler heads, piping and other obstructions to maintain a neat and operable installation. Mounting locations and spacing shall not exceed the requirements of NFPA 72.
c. Where the devices are to be installed in a grid type ceiling system, the detectors shall be centered in the ceiling tile.
d. The location of all fire alarm devices shall be coordinated with other devices mounted in the proximity. Where a conflict arises with other items or with architectural elements that will not allow the device to be mounted at the location or height shown, the Contractor shall adjust location of device so that new location meets all requirements in NFPA 72 and all applicable building codes.

2. Per the requirements of NFPA, detector heads shall not be installed until after the final construction cleaning unless required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). If detector heads must be installed prior to final clea
ning (for partial occupancy, to monitor
finished areas or as otherwise required by the AHJ), they shall not be installed until after the fire alarm panel is installed, with wires terminated, ready for operation. Any detector head installed prior to the final construction cleaning shall be removed and cleaned prior to closeout.

3. Protection of Fire Alarm System:
a. A smoke detector shall be installed within the vicinity of the main fire alarm panel and every NAC extender panel per NFPA 72. A heat detector may be substituted when a smoke detector is not appropriate for the environment of installation.

4. Analog Smoke and Heat Detectors:
a. In elevator shafts and elevator equipment rooms, provide a heat detector for elevator shutdown within 2' of every sprinkler head. Coordinate with fire protection contractor.

5. Duct-type Analog Smoke Detectors:
a. Duct-type analog smoke detectors shall be installed on the duct where shown on the drawings and details. The sampling tubes shall be installed in the respective duct at the approximate location where shown on the electrical drawings to meet the operation requirements of the system.
b. All detectors shall be accessible.
c. Duct-type detectors shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions.

6. In-Duct Analog Smoke Detectors:
a. In-duct analog smoke detectors shall be installed in the duct where shown on the drawings and detai
ls. The devices shall be installed in the respective duct at the approximate location where shown on the electrical drawings to meet the operation requirements of the system.
b. All detectors shall be accessible.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-20

7. Manual Pull Stations:
a. Stations shall be located where shown and at the height noted on the drawings.

8. Addressable Relays and Monitor Modules:
a. Modules shall be located as near to the respective monitor or control devices as possible, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
b. All modules shall be mounted in or on a junction box in an accessible location. c. Where not visible from a floor standing position, a remote indicator shall be installed to allow inspection of the device status from a local floor standing location.

9. SLC Loop Isolation Modules:
a. Isolation modules shall be installed to limit the number of addressable devices that are incapacitated by a circuit fault.
b. Install all Isolation Modules within the fire alarm control panel, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Refer to the fire alarm riser diagram for requirements. Refer to the floor plans for areas served by separate isolation modules.

10. Notification Appliance Devices:
a. Devices shall be located where shown on the drawings. b. Wall-mounted audio, visual and audio/visual alarm devices shall be mounted as denoted on the drawings.
c. Where ceiling mounted visual alarm devices or combination audio/visual alarm devices are shown where the ceiling is greater than 30'-0" high, they shall be stem mounted so that the entire unit is below 30'-0". This does not apply to audio-only alarm
devices.

D. Annunciators:

1. Remote Annunciators: The annunciators shall be located where shown on the drawings and approved by the fire marshal.

E. Wiring:

1. Fire alarm wiring/cabling shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and pursuant to National Fire Codes.

2. Wiring shall be installed in conduit.

3. All junction boxes with SLC and NAC circuits shall be identified on cover. Refer to Identification Section 26 0513 for color and identification requirements.

4. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wiring as specified in Section 26 0513.

5. Notification Appliance Circuits shall provide the features listed below. These requirements may require separate circuits for visual and audible devices. a. Fire alarm temporal audible notification for all audio appliances. b. Synchronization of all visual devices where two or more devices are visible from the same location.
c. Ability to silence audible alarm while maintaining visual device operation. d. Emergency communication alert and textual visible appliance notification.

6. Notification Appliance Circuits shall not span floors.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-21

7. Signal line circuits connecting devices shall not span floors .

8. Signal line circuits connecting devices shall be provided with an isolation module at each floor separation or as otherwise shown on the drawings.

9. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm or auxiliary fire protection functions shall be in fire alarm conduits. Wiring splices shall be avoided to the extent possible, and if needed, they shall be made only in junction boxes and enclosed by plastic wire nut type connectors. Transposing or changing color coding of wires shall not be permitted. All conductors in conduit containing more than one wire shall be labeled on each end, in all junction boxes, and at each device with "E-Z Markers" or equivalent. Conductors in cabinets shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each drops off directly opposite to its terminal. Cabinet terminals shall be numbered and coded, and no unterminated conductors are permitted in cabinets or control panels. All controls, function switches, etc. shall be clearly labeled on all equipment panels.

F. Fire Alarm Cabling Color Code: Provide circuit conductors with insulation color coding as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box.

1. Power Branch Circuit
Conductors: In accordance with Section 26 0553.

2. Signaling Line Circuit: Overall red jacket with black and red conductors.

3. DC Power Supply Circuit: Overall red jacket with violet and brown conductors.

4. Notification Appliance Circuit: Overall red jacket with blue and white conductors.

5. Door Release Circuit: Gray conductors.

6. Central Station Trip Circuit: Orange conductors.

7. Central Station Fire Alarm Loop: Black and white conductors.

G. Devices surface mounted in finished areas shall be mounted on surface backboxes furnished by fire alarm equipment supplier. Backboxes shall be painted to match device, shall be the same shape and size as the device shall not have visible knockouts.

H. Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow and pressure switches, sprinkler valve monitor switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct analog smoke detectors and all other system devices shown or noted on the Contract Documents or required in the manufacturer's product data and shop drawings.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 14 and local fire department requirements. Submit documentation with O & M manuals in accordance with Section 14.6 of the Code.

C. Contractor shall test and adjust the fire alarm system as follows:

1. Speaker taps shall be adjusted to the lowest tap setting which achieves a sound level higher than or equal to the greatest of the following:
a. 70dBA.
b. 15 dBA above ambient levels as indicated in NFPA 72 Table A.18.4.3. c. 15 dBA above measured ambient. 5 dBA above the maximum measured sound level with duration of more than 60 seconds.
d. As specified on the drawings.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-22

2. Sound level measurement procedure shall meet the following requirements:
a. All measurements shall use the 'A' weighted, dBA, sound measurement scale. b. All measurements shall be taken after furnishings, wall coverings and floor coverings are in place.
c. All measurements shall be taken after fixed equipment (HVAC units, etc.) producing ambient noise is installed and is in operation.
d. Final ambient sound measurements shall be taken during occupancy and the units shall be re-adjusted at that time, if necessary.
e. All sound level measurements shall be taken at a height of 5' above the finished floor level.
f. Measurements shall be taken in every unique room. If there are multiple rooms, which have the identical dimensions and function, 10%, or a minimum of two (2) rooms shall be tested. The results from the rooms tested shall be averaged and the remaining rooms may be adjusted per the average.
g. Measurements shall be taken on a 20' x 20' grid and the results for all points taken shall be averaged. If the room is smaller than 20' x 20' a minimum of two measurements are required.
h. Measurements shall be taken halfway between speakers or halfway between a speaker and the wall. No measurements shall be taken at the extreme edges of the room, nor directly under speakers.

D.

Additionally, test the voice alarm communication system intelligibility per IEC 60849:

1. The following acoustically distinguishable spaces shall be tested: All unique rooms shall be tested.

2. Utilize equipment designed to test per IEC 60849 per the equipment manufacturer's instructions. This equipment includes a signal generator, which is input to the fire alarm system and a portable measurement device. This equipment is available from Simplex Grinnell or Gold Line.

3. Testing equipment that can simulate 'crowd babble' shall be used in rooms with occupancy of greater than 200.

4. Wide-area notification intelligibility shall be tested in acoustically distinguishable spaces and areas as designated by the Owner.

5. When testing for intelligibility, the quantity and location of the measurement points shall be the same as the points used for measurement of dBA level.

6. Provide a room by room report, showing the average dBA level and STI for each room tested, the number and location of. The report shall be presented to the Architect/Engineer in an Excel .xls file.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Include services of the manufacturer's software programmer to write initial custom-user program (for Color Graphics Annunciation System).

C. Include services of certi
fied technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-23
D. Note that room numbers depicted on the architectural/engineering drawings will not necessarily reflect the actual room (signage) numbers that the Owner selects. Contractor and fire alarm manufacturer shall coordinate the actual room numbers as the Owner directs to identify each device. This list shall be a part of the floor plan record drawing to be turned in at the project closeout.

E. System Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by Owner within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site system adjustments to suit actual occupied conditions. For this purpose, provide up to two (2) site visits, four (4) hours each visit, outside normal occupancy hours.

3.5 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. System training shall be performed under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Minimum on-site training times shall be:

1. System Operators: One (1) day.

2. GUI Operation and Editing: One (1) day.

3. Emergency Communication System: Four (4) hours.

END OF SECTION 28 3100
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 28 3100-24
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 SITE CLEARING SECTION 31 1000-1
SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal of existing trees and vegetation
B. Clearing vegetation, debris, trash and other materials within limits indicated C. Grubbing of vegetation within limits indicated
D. Stripping of topsoil within limits indicated
E. Removing above-grade site improvements within limits indicated F. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place G. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities H. Disposing of objectionable material

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000, Earth Moving
B. Section 321216, Asphalt Paving
C. Section 321313, Concrete Pavement

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. ANSI A300: Industry Standards for Tree Care Practices

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
B. CAL-OSHA: California Occupational Safety and Health Administration C. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow submittal procedure outlined in Section 011000, Supplemental General Requirements.

B. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 SITE CLEARING SECTION 31 1000-2

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Do not remove or prune trees without first securing a permit from the appropriate agency.

B. Prune to the standards of the International Society of Arborists and to ANSI A300.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain the Owner’s property, cleared materials are the Contractor's property. Remove cleared materials from site and dispose of in lawful manner.

B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store where indicated on plans or where designated by the Owner’s Representative. Avoid damaging materials designated for salvage.

C. Unidentified Materials;

1. If unidentified materials are discovered, including hazardous materials that will require additional removal other than is required by the Contract Documents, immediately report the discovery to the Owner’s Representative.

2. If necessary, the Owner’s Representative will arrange for any testing or analysis of the discovered materials and will provide instructions regarding the removal and disposal of the unidentified materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Backfill excavations resulting from demolition operations with on-site or import materials conforming to engineered fill defined in Section 312000, Earth Moving.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points during construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain during construction.

3.2 TREE REMOVAL
A. Remove trees designated for removal prior to the construction of new improvements in the vicinity:

1. When demolishing trees indicated to be removed within areas for new pavement or hardscape, remove tree, stump to a depth of two (2) feet below finish grade, and all roots located in the top twelve (12) inches of soil. Remove wood chips created from grinding process down to remaining stump then refill void and re-compact to 80% relative compaction. Use import soil as indicated in specifications for this purpose. Import soil and compaction in future paved areas shall be in accordance with Section 321216, Asphalt Paving and Section 321313, Concrete Pavement.

2. When demolishing trees indicated to be removed within new landscaped areas, removal shall be done in one of the following ways:

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 SITE CLEARING SECTION 31 1000-3
a. For trees located in accessible areas, remove tree and grind stump to four (4) inches below finish grade. Backfill the void and re-compact to 80% relative compaction. Use import soil as indicated in specifications for this purpose. Do not remove existing roots. b. For trees located in inaccessible areas, cut stump flush with finish grade, and cover with 3 inches of bark mulch. Do not grind the stump and do not remove existing roots.

B. Perform tree removal work in a safe and proper manner, adhering to CAL-OSHA tree work protection standards and ANSI A300 Standards.

C. All trees to be demolished shall be removed in such a way as to not damage branches, trunks, or root systems of adjacent trees.

3.3 RESTORATION
A. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.

B. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where the Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

3.4 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned.

B. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies or verify that utilities have been shut off.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner’s Representative or others unless authorized in writing by the Owner’s representative, and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

D. Coordinate utility interruptions with utility company affected.

E. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the permission of the Owner’s Representative and utility company affected. Notify Owner’s Representative and utility company affected two working days prior to utility interruptions.

F. Excavate and remove underground utilities that are indicated to be removed.

G. Fill abandoned piping with cement slurry.

H. Securely close ends of abandoned piping with tight fitting plug or cement slurry minimum 6 inches thick.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Areas to be graded shall be cleared of existing vegetation, rubbish, existing structures, and debris.

B. Remove obstructions, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 SITE CLEARING SECTION 31 1000-4
C. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

D. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.

3.6 SITE STRIPPING
A. Strippings and spoils shall be disposed at an off-site location, per geotechnical recommendations.

B. Remove vegetation before stripping soil.

C. Surface soils that contain organic matter should be stripped. In general, the depth of required stripping will be relatively shallow (i.e. less than 2 inches); deeper stripping and grubbing may be required to remove isolated concentrations of organic matter or roots.

D. Remove trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

E. Stockpile soil materials designated to remain on site at a location approved by the Owner’s Representative at a location away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

F. Do not stockpile soil within drip line of remaining trees.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

3.8 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact material in excavations and depressions remaining after site clearing in accordance with Section 31 2000, Earth Moving.

3.9 DISPOSAL
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable soil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off the Owner’s property.

END OF SECTION
BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-1
SECTION 312000 – EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavation and/or embankment from existing ground to subgrade, including soil sterilant, for roadways, driveways, parking areas, building pads, walks, paths, or trails and any other site improvements called for on the Plans.

1.2 SECTION EXCLUDES
A. Earthwork related to underground utility installation shall be performed in accordance with Sections 312100, Utility Trenching and Backfill.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 011000, Supplemental General Requirements
B. Section 015050, Erosion Control
C. Section 311000, Site Clearing
D. Section 312319, Dewatering

1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Geotechnical Report

1. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

2. D1586, Method for Penetration Tests and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils

3. D2487, Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

4. D3740, Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

5. D4318. Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

6. E329, Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

7. E548, Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence B. California Building Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 18, Soils and Foundations, and Chapter 33, Safeguards During Construction C. Caltrans Standard Specifications, 2022

1. Section 17, General

2. Section 19, Earthwork
D. CAL/OSHA, Title 8.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-2

1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Borrow: Approved soil material imported from off-site for use as Structural Fill or Backfill.

B. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.

1. Authorized Over-Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated horizontal dimensions as shown on plans or authorized by the Geotechnical Engineer.

2. Unauthorized Over-Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated horizontal dimensions without authorization by the Geotechnical Engineer. Unauthorized excavation shall be without additional compensation.

C. Geotechnical Testing Agency: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E329 to conduct soil materials and rock definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D3740 and ASTM E548.

D. Structural Backfill: Soil materials approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and used to fill excavations resulting from removal of existing below grade facilities, including trees.

E. Structural Fill: Soil materials approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and used to raise existing grades.

F. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material ¾ cubic yards or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man made stationary features constructed above or below grade.

H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, base or topsoil materials.

I. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.

J. Unsuitable Material: Any soil material that is not suitable for a specific use on the Project. The Geotechnical Engineer will determine if a soil material is unsuitable.

K. Relative Compaction: In-place dry density of soil expressed as percentage of maximum dry density of same materials, as determined by laboratory test procedure ASTM D1557.

L. Utilities: onsite underground pipes, conduits, ducts and cables.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow submittal procedure outlined in Section 011000, Supplemental General Requirements.

B. Samples:

1. If required by the Geotechnical Engineer, provide 20 pound samples, sealed in airtight containers, tagged with source locations and suppliers of each proposed soil material from on-site or borrow sources, 72 hours prior to use. Do not import materials to the Project without written approval of the Geotechnical Engineer.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-3

2. Provide materials from same source throughout work. Change of source requires approval of the Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Material Test Reports: Provide, from a qualified testing agency, the recommended test results showing compliance with the project requirements per Geotechnical report.

D. Classification according to ASTM D2487 of each onsite or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

1. Laboratory compaction curve in conformance with ASTM D1557 for each onsite or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide an independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E329 to conduct soil materials and rock definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D3740 and ASTM E548.

B. Conform all work and materials to the recommendations or requirements of the Geotechnical Report and meet the approval of the Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Conform all work in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 17, General and Section 19, Earthwork.

D. Percentage of compaction specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The percentage represents the ratio of the dry density of the compacted material to the maximum dry density of the material as determined by the procedure set forth in ASTM D1557.

E. Perform excavation, filling, compaction and related earthwork under the observation of the Geotechnical Engineer. Materials placed without approval of the Geotechnical Engineer will be presumed to be defective and, at the discretion of the Geotechnical Engineer, shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. Notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least 24 hours prior to commencement of earthwork and at least 48 hours prior to testing.

F. The Geotechnical Engineer will perform observations and tests required to enable him to form an opinion of the acceptability of the Project earthwork. Correct earthwork that, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, does not meet the requirements of these Technical Specifications and the Geotechnical Report.

G. Upon completion of the construction work, certify that all compacted fills and foundations are in place at the correct locations, and have been constructed in accordance with sound construction practice. In addition, certify that the materials used are of the types, quality and quantity required by these Technical Specifications and the Geotechnical Report. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all fills and backfills constructed by his forces and shall replace portions that in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer have been displaced or are otherwise unsatisfactory due to the Contractor’s operations.

H. Finish subgrade tolerance at completion of grading:

1. Building and paved areas: 0.05 feet

2. Other areas: 0.10 feet

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Promptly notify the Owner’s Representative of surface or subsurface conditions differing from those disclosed in the Geotechnical Report. First notify the Owner’s Representative verbally to permit verification and extent of condition and then in writing. No claim for conditions differing from those BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-4
anticipated in the Contract Documents and disclosed in the Geotechnical Report will be allowed unless the Contractor has notified the Owner’s Representative in writing of differing conditions prior to the Contractor starting work on affected items.

B. Protect open excavations, trenches, and the like with fences, covers and railings to maintain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic passage.

C. Prevent erosion of freshly-graded areas during construction and until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed in accordance with Section 015050, Erosion Control.

D. Temporarily stock-pile fill material in an orderly and safe manner and in a location approved by the Owner’s Representative.

E. Environmental Requirements: When unfavorable weather conditions necessitate interrupting earthwork operation, areas shall be prepared by compaction of surface and grading to avoid collection of water.

Provide adequate temporary drainage to prevent erosion. After interruption, compaction specified in last layer shall be re-established before resuming work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: On-site soils are considered suitable for use as fill provided the materials are placed in accordance with Geotechnical Recommendations. Highly expansive soils shall not be used as select structural fill, or used as backfill for trenches located within hardscape areas.

B. Imported fill soils, if required, should be predominantly granular in nature, and should be free of organics, debris, or rocks over 3 inches in size, and shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer before importing to the site. Imported non-expansive soils shall have a Plasticity Index less than 15 as determined by ASTM D4318, an R-value of at least 20, and fines content between 15 and 65 percent. Import fill shall be considered non-hazardous per Department of Toxic Substances Control guidelines (DTSC, 2017) and non- corrosive per Caltrans Corrosion Guidelines (Caltrans, 2015).

2.2 SOIL STERILANT
A. Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by EPA. Provide granular, liquid or wet-able powder form.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Perform work in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 19, Earthwork, as modified by the Contract Documents.

B. Placement and compaction of material by flooding, ponding, or jetting will not be permitted.

C. The use of explosives will not be permitted.

D. Grading and earthwork operations shall be observed and tested by a representative of the Geotechnical Engineer for conformance with the project plans/specifications and the geotechnical recommendations.

This work includes site preparation, selection of satisfactory materials, and placement and compaction of the subgrades and fills. Sufficient notification prior to commencement of earthwork is essential to make certain that the work will be properly observed.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-5

3.2 CONTROL OF WATER AND DEWATERING
A. Comply with Section 312319, Dewatering, if dewatering is necessary.

B. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding the site and surrounding area. Provide dewatering equipment necessary to drain and keep excavations and site free from water.

C. Dewater during backfilling operation so that groundwater is maintained a least 1 foot below level of compaction effort.

D. Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer’s approval for proposed control of water and dewatering methods.

E. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout and damage by rain or water accumulation.

F. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.

G. Maintain dewatering system in place until dewatering is no longer required.

3.3 WET WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Do not prepare subgrade, place or compact soil materials if subgrade or materials are above optimum moisture content.

B. If the Geotechnical Engineer allows work to continue during wet weather conditions, conform to supplemental recommendations provided by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.4 BRACING AND SHORING
A. Conform to California and Federal OSHA requirements.

B. Place and maintain such bracing and shoring as may be required to support the sides of the excavations for the proper protection of workmen; to facilitate the work; to prevent damage to the facility being constructed; and to prevent damage to adjacent structures or facilities. Remove all bracing and shoring upon completion of the work.

C. Be solely responsible for all bracing and shoring and, if requested by the Owner’s Representative, submit details and calculations to the Owner’s Representative. The Owner’s Representative may forward the submittal to the Geotechnical Engineer, the Consulting Engineer and/or the California Division of Industrial Safety for their review. The Contractor's submittal shall include the basic design, assumed soils conditions and estimation of forces to be resisted, together with plans and specifications of the materials and methods to be used, and shall be prepared by a civil engineer or structural engineer registered in California. No excavations related to the proposed facility shall precede a response to the submittal by the Owner’s Representative.

D. Be solely responsible for installing and extracting the sheathing in a manner which will not disturb the position or operation of the facility being constructed or adjacent utilities and facilities.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove topsoil in accordance with Section 311000, Site Clearing.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-6

3.6 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate earth and rock to lines and grades shown on plans and to the neat dimensions indicated on the plans, required herein or as required to satisfactorily compact backfill.

B. Remove and dispose of large rocks, pieces of concrete and other obstructions encountered during excavation.

C. Excavation through buried concrete and other unknown obstructions will require specialized techniques for demolition and removal.

D. Where forming is required, excavate only as much material as necessary to permit placing and removing forms.

E. Provide supports, shoring and sheet piles required to support the sides of excavations or for protection of adjacent existing improvements.

3.7 GRADING
A. Uniformly grade the Project to the elevations shown on plans B. Finish ditches, gutters and swales to the sections, lines and grades indicated and to permit proper surface drainage.

C. Round tops and bottoms of slopes as indicated or to blend with existing contours.

3.8 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Subgrade Preparation: Prior to backfilling depressions created by the removal of old foundations and utility lines, scarify the bottom of the excavation to an approximate depth of 8 inches and uniformly moisture condition the scarified surfaces to a moisture content that is at least 2 percent over optimum. Compact the scarified surfaces to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction at above optimum moisture content.

B. Over-excavate any remaining soft (pumping) areas down to firm soil and backfill the area.

C. Subgrade shall be maintained in a moist, but not wet, condition by periodically sprinkling water prior to the placement of additional fill or installation of roads. Subgrade that has been permitted to dry out and loosen or develop desiccation cracking should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and re-compacted as recommended above.

D. Install underground utilities and service connections prior to final preparation of subgrade and placement of base materials for final surface facilities. Extend services so that final surface facilities are not disturbed when service connections are made.

E. Prepare subgrades under the structural section of paved areas, curbs, gutters, walks, structures, other surface facilities and areas to receive structural fill.

F. Protect utilities from damage during compaction of subgrades and until placement of final pavements or other surface facilities.

G. Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer’s approval of subgrades prior to placing pavement structural section.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-7

3.9 KEYWAYS AND BENCHES
A. Provide keyways as indicated for fill slopes steeper than 6 horizontal to 1 vertical. Extend keyway 5 feet minimum into competent, undisturbed soil or 3 feet minimum into competent, undisturbed rock as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Place subsurface drains in bottom of keyway in accordance with Section 334600, Subdrainage.

C. Bench subgrade as indicated above toe of fill.

D. Place subsurface drains at benches every 20 vertical feet or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.10 LOT FINISH GRADING
A. Blade finish lots to lines and grades indicated.

3.11 FILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Place fill in uniformly moisture conditioned and compacted lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness.

Each lift should be thoroughly moisture conditioned and compacted to 90 percent before successive fill layers are placed.

B. In order to achieve satisfactory compaction in the subgrade and fill soils, it may be necessary to adjust the soil moisture content at the time of soil compaction per geotechnical recommendations. This may require that water be added and thoroughly mixed into any soils which are too dry or that scarification and aeration be performed in any soils which are too wet.

C. Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer’s approval of surface to receive structural fill prior to placement of structural fill material.

D. Place structural fill on prepared subgrade.

E. Do not drop fill on structures. Do not backfill around, against or upon concrete or masonry structures until structure has attained sufficient strength to withstand loads imposed and the horizontal structural system had been installed.

F. Do not compact by ponding, flooding or jetting.

G. Perform compaction using rollers, pneumatic or vibratory compactors or other equipment and mechanical methods approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

H. Compaction requirements (unless specified otherwise by the Geotechnical Engineer):

1. Compact structural fills less than 5 feet thick to 90 percent compaction.

2. Compact structural fill 5 feet thick or greater to 95 percent compaction.

3. Compact the upper 6 inches of subgrade soils beneath pavements, curbs and gutters to 95 percent compaction. Extend compaction 5 feet beyond pavement edges unless specified otherwise by the Geotechnical Engineer.

4. Compact the upper 6 inches of subgrade soils under walks, structures and areas to receive structural fill to 90 percent compaction.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 EARTH MOVING SECTION 31 2000-8

3.12 SOIL STERILIZATION
A. Apply soil sterilant to areas indicated, such as beneath asphalt concrete pavement, brick pavement, concrete pavement and at grade concrete slabs, including sidewalks, curbs and gutters. Also where indicated apply soil sterilant below expansion and control joints and at areas where pipes, ducts or other features penetrate slabs.

B. Apply soil sterilant uniformly and at the rates recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Apply soil sterilant to prepared subgrade, or after installation of aggregate base as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.13 DISPOSAL
A. Lawfully dispose of all unsuitable and excess or surplus material off-site at no cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION
BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILL SECTION 31 2100-1
SECTION 312100 – UTILITY TRRNCHING AND BACKFILL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavation, bedding, and backfill for underground water piping and associated structures only.

B. Provide labor, material, equipment, and services necessary to complete the backfilling and compacting as necessary for this project. Section includes, but is not limited to:

1. Select Backfill Material

2. Aggregate Base

3. Detectable Tape

4. Trench Excavation

5. Pipe Bedding

6. Trench Backfill

7. Trench Surfacing
C. This section excludes excavation, bedding, and backfill for underground HVAC piping, electrical conduit, telephone conduit, gas piping, cable TV conduit, and drainage fill material and placement around subdrains.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 311000 – Site Clearing
B. Section 312000 – Earthwork Moving
C. Section 312319 - Dewatering
D. Section 331000 – Water System

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. ASTM

1. D1557, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

B. California Administrative Code, Title 24, Part 2 - Basic Building Regulations, Chapter 24, Excavations, Foundations, and Retaining Walls.

C. Caltrans Standard Specifications, 2022

1. Section 19, Earthwork

2. Section 26, Aggregate Bases

3. Section 68, Subsurface Drains

4. Section 96, Geosynthetics
BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILL SECTION 31 2100-2
D. CAL/OSHA, Title 8

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Asphalt Concrete
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
C. Base: The layer placed between the subgrade and surface pavement in a paving system.

D. Bedding: Material from bottom of trench to bottom of pipe E. CDF: Controlled Density Fill
F. DIP: Ductile Iron Pipe
G. Engineered Fill:

1. Soil or soil-rock material approved by the Owner and transported to the site by the Contractor in order to raise grades or to backfill excavations.

2. Contractor shall provide sufficient tests, and a written statement that all materials brought onto the project site comply with specification requirements.

H. Excavation: Consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations I. Initial Backfill: Material from bottom of pipe to 12 inches above top of pipe J. PCC: Portland Cement Concrete
K. Relative Compaction: In-place dry density of soil expressed as percentage of maximum dry density of same materials, as determined by laboratory test procedure ASTM D1557.

L. Springline of Pipe: Imaginary line on surface of pipe at a vertical distance of ½ the outside diameter measured from the top or bottom of the pipe.

M. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base.

N. Subsequent Backfill: Material from 12 inches above top of pipe to subgrade of surface material or subgrade of surface facility or to finish grade.

O. Trench Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and within horizontal trench dimensions.

1. Authorized Trench Over-Excavation: Excavation below trench subgrade elevations or beyond indicated horizontal trench dimensions as shown on plans or authorized by the Geotechnical Engineer.

2. Unauthorized Trench Over-Excavation: Excavation below trench subgrade elevations or beyond indicated horizontal trench dimensions without authorization by the Geotechnical Engineer.

Unauthorized excavation shall be without additional compensation.

P. Utility Structures:

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILL SECTION 31 2100-3

1. Storm drainage manholes, catch basins, drop inlets, curb inlets, vaults, etc.

2. Sanitary sewer manholes, vaults, etc.

3. Water vaults, etc.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow submittal procedures outlined in Section 011000 – Supplemental General Requirements.

B. Test Reports: Submit the following report for import material directly to the Owner from the Contractor’s testing services:

1. Compaction test reports for aggregate base.

C. Samples:

1. If required by the Geotechnical Engineer, provide 20-pound samples of all imported trench bedding and backfill material sealed in airtight containers, tagged with source locations and suppliers of each proposed material. Do not import materials to Project without written approval of the Geotechnical Engineer and the Owner.

2. Provide materials from same source throughout work. Change of source requires approval of the Geotechnical Engineer and the Owner.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform all work and materials to the recommendations or requirements of the Geotechnical Report and meet the approval of the Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Conform all work to the appropriate portion(s) of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 19, Earthwork.

C. Percentage of compaction specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The percentage represents the ratio of the dry density of the compacted material to the maximum dry density of the material as determined by the procedure set forth in ASTM D 1557.

D. The Geotechnical Engineer will perform observations and tests required to enable him to form an opinion of the acceptability of the trench backfill. Correct the trench backfill that, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, does not meet the requirements of these Technical Specifications and the Geotechnical Report.

E. Soil Testing:

1. Contractor to engage a geotechnical testing agency, to include compaction testing and for quality control testing during fill operations.

2. Test results will be submitted to the Owner.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Promptly notify the Owner of surface or subsurface conditions differing from those disclosed in the Geotechnical Report. First notify the Owner verbally to permit verification and extent of condition and then in writing. No claim for conditions differing from those anticipated in the Contract Documents and disclosed in the Geotechnical Report will be allowed unless Contractor has notified the Owner in writing of differing conditions prior to contractor starting work on affected items.

B. Barricade open excavations and post with warning lights.

BKF Engineers CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UTILITY TRENCHING AND BACKFILL SECTION 31 2100-4

1. Operate warning lights and barricades as required.

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations, from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards.

3. Protect open, trenches, and utility structure excavations with fences, covers and railings to maintain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic passage.

C. Stockpile on-site and imported backfill material temporarily in an orderly and safe manner.

D. Provide dust and noise control in conformance with Section 011000 Supplemental General Requirements.

E. Environmental Requirements:

1. Protect existing storm drainage system from silt and debris resulting from construction activities. If contamination occurs, remove contamination at no cost to the Owner.

← All documents from this meeting